advertisement
I N ST R U C T I O N S F O R U S E
IntelliVue MP2
P at i e nt Mo n i t o r
R e l e a s e F . 0 w i t h S o f t w a r e R e v i s i o n F . 0 1 . x x
P a t i e n t M o n i t o r i n g
Printed in Germany 07/07
*M8102-9001A*
Part Number M8102-9001A
4512 610 21441
S
M8102-9001A
1
Table Of Contents
1 Installation
Installation Checklist
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
Mounting the Monitor
Mounting the External Power Supply (M8023A)
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains
Checking Out the Monitor
Operating the Monitor
Setting the Date and Time
Checking Country-Specific Default Settings
Handing Over the Monitor
2 Basic Operation
Introducing the IntelliVue MP2
Controls, Indicators and Connectors
MP2 Patient Connectors, Right Side
Extending Measurements
Operating and Navigating
Operating Modes
Understanding Screens
Switching to a Different Screen
Understanding Profiles
Understanding Settings
Changing Measurement Settings
2
2
2
1
2
7
7
6
7
3
5
3
3
1
9
11
12
12
13
16
10
10
10
18
18
19
19
21
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
26
26
26
26
26
i
ii
Switching a Measurement On and Off
Adjusting a Measurement Wave
Changing Wave Speed for a Channel
Using Labels
Changing Measurement Labels (e.g. Pressure)
Changing Monitor Settings
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Checking Your Monitor Revision
Getting Started
Disconnecting from AC Mains Power
Monitoring After a Power Failure
Networked Monitoring
3 Alarms
Visual Alarm Indicators
Audible Alarm Indicators
Changing the Alarm Tone Volume
Minimum Volume for No Central Monitoring INOP
Minimum Volume for Severe Yellow or Red INOPs
Acknowledging Alarms
Acknowledging Disconnect INOPs
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms
To Switch Individual Measurement Alarms On or Off
While Alarms are Paused or Off
Resetting Arrhythmia Alarm Timeouts
Extending the Alarm Pause Time
Alarm Limits
Viewing Individual Alarm Limits
About Automatic Alarm Limits (AutoLimits)
28
28
28
27
27
27
27
27
30
30
30
29
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
36
36
37
34
34
35
35
36
36
38
38
38
38
37
37
37
37
38
39
39
40
41
33
Reviewing Alarms
Latching Alarms
Viewing the Alarm Latching Settings
Testing Alarms
Alarm Behavior at On/Off
Alarm Recordings
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Patient Alarm Messages
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
5 Managing Patients
Admitting a Patient
Patient Category and Paced Status
Admitting a Centrally-Monitored Patient
Quick Admitting a Patient
Editing Patient Information
Discharging a Patient
Transferring Patients
Transferring a Centrally-Monitored Patient with the Monitor
Data Exchange Between Information Centers
Resolving Patient Information Mismatch
Manually Resolving Patient Mismatch
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement
Connecting ECG Cables
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads
Checking Paced Status
Understanding the ECG Display
Monitoring Paced Patients
Setting the Paced Status (Pace Pulse Rejection)
Avoiding Pace Pulse Repolarization Tails
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave
To Change the Size of an Individual ECG Wave
To Change the Size of all the ECG Waves
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone
Changing the ECG Filter Settings
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6-lead placement)
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement
About ECG Leads
45
51
75
75
75
73
74
74
76
76
76
76
77
77
82
83
83
81
81
82
82
79
79
80
80
83
83
84
84
84
85
43
43
44
44
44
42
42
42
43
79
45
73
iii
ECG Lead Fallback
ECG Lead Placements
Choosing Standard or Modified Electrode Placement
Capture 12-Lead
EASI ECG Lead Placement
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview
Using ECG Alarms
HR Alarms When Arrhythmia Analysis is Switched Off
ECG Safety Information
About Arrhythmia Monitoring
Where Can I Find More Information?
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off
Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring
Atrial Fibrillation and Flutter
Intermittent Bundle Branch Block
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display
Arrhythmia Relearning
Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia Alarms and Latching
Switching Individual Arrhythmia Alarms On and Off
Switching All Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms On or Off
Adjusting the Arrhythmia Alarm Limits
Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods
How are Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms Indicated?
Understanding PVC-Related Alarms
About ST Monitoring
Switching ST On and Off
Selecting Leads for ST Analysis
iv
92
92
92
92
93
94
94
94
95
95
95
95
96
88
88
89
86
86
87
87
89
90
91
92
85
85
85
98
98
99
96
96
96
97
100
100
100
101
103
99
100
100
100
104
104
104
Understanding the ST Display and Windows
Updating ST Baseline Snippets
About the ST Measurement Points
Adjusting ST Measurement Points
ST Alarms
Single- or Multi-lead ST Alarming
Viewing ST Maps
Working in the ST Map Task Window
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
Indications For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
Limitations For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
QT Alarms
Switching Individual QTc Alarms On and Off
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off
7 Monitoring Pulse Rate
Entering the Setup Pulse Menu
System Pulse Source
Switching Pulse On and Off
Using Pulse Alarms
Selecting the Active Alarm Source: ECG or Pulse?
Alarm Source Selection Disabled
Changing HR/Pulse Alarm Limits
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp
Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp
Understanding the Resp Display
Changing Resp Detection Modes
Resp Detection Modes and Cardiac Overlay
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave
121
121
121
122
122
122
122
122
123
123
123
119
119
119
119
117
117
118
118
118
109
109
109
109
111
112
112
105
106
106
107
109
114
114
115
115
115
116
116
116
116
116
117
121
v
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave
Using Resp Alarms
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
Resp Safety Information
9 Monitoring SpO
2
SpO
2
Sensors
Applying the Sensor
Connecting SpO
Cables
Measuring SpO
2
Assessing a Suspicious SpO
2
Understanding SpO
2
Alarms
Reading
Adjusting the Desat Limit Alarm
Pleth Wave
Perfusion Numeric
Perfusion Change indicator
Setting SpO
2
/Pleth as Pulse Source
Setting Up Tone Modulation
Setting the QRS Volume
10 Monitoring NBP
Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement
Preparing to Measure NBP
Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level
Understanding the NBP Numerics
Starting and Stopping Measurements
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition Time
Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The Sequence
Choosing the NBP Alarm Source
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off
Assisting Venous Puncture
Calibrating NBP
11 Monitoring Temperature
Making a Temp Measurement
Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring
Extended Temperature Label Set
Calculating Temp Difference
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Setting up the Pressure Measurement
vi
139
140
140
140
134
135
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
138
133
134
134
134
141
130
130
130
131
131
131
131
132
132
127
127
128
128
129
130
124
124
124
124
127
133
139
141
Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer
Determining a Pressure’s Most Recent Zero
Zeroing a Pressure Measurement
Zeroing All Pressures Simultaneously
Adjusting the Calibration Factor
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only
Changing the Pressure Wave Scale
Optimizing the Waveform
Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6
Making the Pressure Calibration
Troubleshooting the Pressure Calibration
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Measuring CO
2
using the CO
2
Option or M3014A
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO
2
Preparing to Measure Sidestream CO
Measuring Mainstream CO
using M3016A
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO
2
2
Transducer
Measuring Microstream CO
using M3015A
Preparing to Measure Microstream CO
Using the FilterLine and Airway Adapter
Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
Setting up Mainstream and Sidestream CO
Wave Scale
Corrections
Suppressing Sampling (not Mainstream CO
2
)
Alarms
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
14 Trends
Viewing Trends
150
150
151
153
153
153
154
154
155
155
155
156
156
156
158
158
158
158
156
156
157
157
142
142
143
144
145
145
145
145
145
143
143
143
144
144
146
147
147
148
148
159
149
159
vii
Setting Up Trends
Documenting Trends
Trends Databases
Trending Multiple-Value Measurements
Screen Trends
Changing the Selection of Screen Trends Displayed
Activating the Cursor for Screen Trends
Changing the Screen Trend View
15 Recording
Starting and Stopping Recordings
Overview of Recording Types
Creating and Changing Recordings Templates
Recorder Status Messages
16 Printing Patient Reports
Starting Report Printouts
Stopping Reports Printouts
Setting Up Reports
Setting Up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend Reports
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs
Checking Printer Settings
Printing a Test Report
Switching Printers On Or Off for Reports
Dashed Lines on Reports
Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports
Checking Report Status
Printer Status Messages
Sample Report Printouts
viii
171
171
172
172
173
173
179
179
179
180
181
177
178
178
178
175
176
176
176
176
177
182
182
164
164
165
165
165
167
167
167
167
159
160
161
161
161
162
163
163
163
163
171
175
17 Care and Cleaning
General Points
Cleaning the Monitor
Disinfecting the Monitor
Sterilizing the Monitor
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories
18 Using Batteries
Battery Power Indicators
Battery Status on the Main Screen
Checking Battery Charge
Replacing a Battery
Optimizing Battery Performance
Battery Safety Information
19 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories
Inspecting the Cables and Cords
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule
Troubleshooting
Disposing of the Monitor
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders
20 Accessories
ECG/Resp Accessories
NBP Accessories
Adult/Pediatric Multi-Patient Comfort Cuffs and Disposable Cuffs
Adult/Pediatric Antimicrobial Coated Reusable cuffs
Adult/Pediatric Soft Single Patient Single-Hose Disposable Cuffs
Neonatal/Infant Cuffs (Disposable, non-sterile)
Invasive Pressure Accessories
SpO
2
Accessories
Temperature Accessories
Mainstream CO
Accessories
192
193
193
194
194
194
194
195
190
190
190
191
197
197
198
199
199
199
201
201
203
205
205
205
205
206
206
206
206
210
211
183
183
185
186
186
186
187
185
189
197
201
ix
x
Sidestream CO
Accessories
Mainstream CO
Accessories (for M3016A)
Microstream CO
Battery Accessories
Accessories
21 Specifications
Intended Use
Indication for Use
Manufacturer’s Information
Symbols
Installation Safety Information
Altitude Setting
Monitor Safety Specifications
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance
Monitor Performance Specifications
M4607A Battery Specifications
Measurement Specifications
2
Safety and Performance Tests
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Specifications
Recommended Separation Distance
Recommended separation distances from portable and mobile RF communication equipment
22 Default Settings Appendix
Country-Specific Default Settings
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings
Alarm Default Settings
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
Pulse Default Settings
Respiration Default Settings
SpO
2
Default Settings
NBP Default Settings
225
227
228
229
231
232
232
236
236
236
237
237
218
218
218
219
220
220
221
223
225
215
215
215
216
216
217
217
238
251
251
252
253
241
247
247
248
211
212
212
213
215
241
Temperature Default Settings
Invasive Pressure Default Settings
CO
2
Default Settings
253
253
256
xi
xii
1
1
Installation
Installation should be carried out by qualified service personnel, either by the hospital’s biomedical department, or by Philips Support.
If you have purchased a “customer-installable bundle”, it is assumed that your own hospital personnel will install and, if necessary, configure the monitor. You can contact Philips Support for assistance if required; any assistance will be associated with additional costs.
For mechanical and electrical installation, you need technically qualified personnel with a knowledge of english. Additionally, for monitor configuration, you need clinically qualified personnel with a knowledge of the use environment. For further information on Installation, refer to the Service Guide.
WARNING
• Monitor configuration settings must be specified by authorized hospital personnel.
• For installation of the device as part of a system, always refer to the Service Guide.
• As the first step in preparing the monitor for use, follow the installation instructions given in this chapter.
Installation Checklist
Use this checklist to document your installation.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Task
Perform initial inspection of delivery, unpack and check the shipment
(see “Unpacking and Checking the Shipment” on page 2).
Mount the monitor as appropriate for your installation
(see “Mounting the Monitor” on page 3).
Insert the battery into the battery compartment (the battery must always be in the battery compartment during use). Connect the monitor to AC mains
Perform Visual, Power On and Functional test blocks (see “Checking Out the
Perform Safety Tests, if required by local laws and regulations (see “Checking
Check Box when Task
Done
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
1
2
1 Installation
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
Step
6
7
8
Task
Check/set the time and date (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 7).
Check that the country-specific default settings are appropriate (see
“Checking Country-Specific Default Settings” on page 7)
Perform System Test as necessary (see the Service Guide)
Check Box when Task
Done
❏
❏
❏
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
The monitor and any supporting options ordered are supplied packed in protective shipping cartons.
Initial Inspection
Before unpacking, check the packaging and ensure that there are no signs of mishandling or damage.
Open the package carefully and remove the monitor and accessories.
Check that the contents are complete and that the correct options and accessories have been delivered.
System Components, Accessories and Supplies
Monitor with options as ordered
ECG accessories
NBP accessories
SpO
2
accessories
Pressure accessories
Temperature accessories
CO
2
Accessories
External Power Supply including AC power cord and MSL cable
Rechargeable battery
Instructions for Use
Quick Guide
Documentation CD-ROM (includes Service Guide and Instructions for Use)
Comments
1 optional optional optional optional optional optional
1
1
1
1
1
Claims for Damage
If the shipping cartons are damaged, contact the carrier.
If any of the equipment is damaged, contact both the carrier and your local Philips service organization for repair or replacement arrangements.
Repacking
Retain the original packing carton and material, in case you need to return equipment to Philips for service. If you no longer have the original packing materials, Philips can advise you on alternatives.
Mounting the Monitor
1 Installation
Mounting the Monitor
The monitor can be rested on a flat, level surface, hung on the bed rail, or mounted on a wall or on a rollstand. See the Service Guide for details.
Mounting the External Power Supply (M8023A)
The external power supply (M8023A) can be rested on its rubber feet on a flat, level surface, or mounted as described in the Service Guide.
The following pictures show examples of correct ( power supply.
) and incorrect ( ) ways to mount the
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains
The monitor is an electrical Class II device in which the protection against electric shock does not rely on basic insulation and a protective earth conductor but on double and/or reinforced insulation.
3
1 Installation
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains
The monitor has a wide-range external power supply (M8023A) that allows you to operate the monitor from an AC (alternating current) power source of 100 V to 240 V (± 10%) and 50/60 Hz (± 5%). The external power supply also charges the monitor’s battery.
MSL Cable connects to power supply (M8023A)
1
2
4
3
4
1
2
3
4
AC power cord. Connect to AC mains socket.
Connect LAN cable here. For connection to a PC or Information Center.
Measurement Link (MSL) cable. Supplies AC input power to the monitor for AC operation and for battery charging. When there is a LAN connection to a PC or Information Center, the MSL cable also carries this data to and from the monitor.
Power-on LED. The green light is on when the external power supply is connected to AC mains.
WARNING
• Always use the supplied power cord with the earthed mains plug to connect the external power supply (M8023A) to an earthed AC mains socket. Never adapt the mains plug from the power supply to fit an unearthed AC mains socket.
Checking Out the Monitor
1 Installation
• Do not use AC mains extension cords or multiple portable socket-outlets. If a multiple portable socket-outlet without an approved isolation transformer is used, the interruption of its protective earthing may result in enclosure leakage currents equal to the sum of the individual earth leakage currents, so exceeding allowable limits.
• Do not connect any devices that are not supported as part of a system.
• Any non-medical device placed and operated in the patient’s vicinity must be powered via an approved isolation transformer that ensures mechanical fixing of the power cords and covering of any unused power outlets.
Checking Out the Monitor
The following table defines which tests and inspections need to be performed, and when they are required.
Visual
Power On
System
Test
Functionality Test
Safety Tests (1) to (4)
Test or Inspection to be Performed
Inspect the monitor, measurement accessories and cables for any damage.
Are they free of damage?
Power on the monitor. Does it start up successfully without errors? Do all alarm lamps light up during power up?
After start up, the monitor sounds a tone, and you can see the monitoring main screen (normally with measurement wave channels and numeric positions).
After power up, touch the battery status indicator in the bottom right of the screen. The battery status window should open. Press the blue Main Screen key to close the window and return to the main screen.
Perform safety tests (1) to (4), as described in the Service Guide, for standalone devices if required by local laws and regulations, and each time you combine equipment to form a system, or exchange system components. Details of the safety tests and procedures are described in the Service Guide. These safety tests are derived from international standards but may not always be sufficient to meet local requirements.
Perform the system test according to IEC 60601-1-1, if applicable, after combining equipment to form a system (see the Service Guide).
For test and inspection information regarding repairs, upgrades and all other service events, refer to the
Service Guide.
5
1 Installation
Operating the Monitor
Operating the Monitor
To complete installation you will need to operate the monitor to check basic functionality. Here is a quick introduction to the monitor.
1
Switch on the monitor. After start-up the monitor display will become active. You operate the monitor using the touch screen.
2
Touch something on the screen (numerics, waves, other screen items) to enter the corresponding menu. Touching the NBP numeric, for example, brings you to the
Setup NBP menu.
3
Touch again to select an item on the menu and work through the menu activities.
4
To access SmartKeys, press the SmartKeys key. Main Setup is one of the
SmartKeys.
6
5
If you cannot find a menu by touching the screen you can always use the Main Setup SmartKey which will get you to all menus on the monitor.
6
Press the Main Screen key to close all open menus/windows and return to the main screen. Press again to enter the Change
Screen
window, where you can choose from a number of pre-configured screens.
Setting the Date and Time
1 Installation
Setting the Date and Time
To set the date and time:
1
Press the SmartKeys key
to enter the SmartKeys window.
2
3
4
Select the Main Setup SmartKey to enter the Main Setup menu.
Select the Date, Time screen element from the monitor’s info line to enter the Date, Time menu.
Select, in turn, the
Year, Month, Day, Hour
(in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as necessary. Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
5
Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from this.
Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.
Checking Country-Specific Default Settings
Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country. Line frequency, units for weight and height, and ECG cable colors (AAMI or IEC) have been set to appropriate values. If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements, check the settings and change them if necessary as described in the Configuration Guide.
WARNING
Before starting monitoring, check that the current configuration meets your requirements, especially patient category, alarm limits and paced setting.
1
2
If you need to enter configuration mode:
In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes.
Select Config and enter the passcode.
The passcode for configuration mode is given in the monitor’s service documentation.
The monitor displays Config at the right hand side of the status line and in the center of the Screen while you are in configuration mode.
Before you leave configuration mode, always be sure to store any changes you made. You must store changes made to each Settings Block and to each Profile, individually. As it may be difficult to remember whether the settings you changed belong to a Monitor Settings block or a Measurement
Settings block, we recommend that you store each block before you leave configuration mode.
To leave configuration mode:
♦
In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes and then select Monitoring.
Handing Over the Monitor
If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it is in
Monitoring mode.
7
8
1 Installation
Handing Over the Monitor
Users must be adequately trained to use the monitor before monitoring a patient. To achieve this, they should have access to, and read, the following documentation delivered with the monitor:
• Instructions for Use (this book) - for full operating instructions
• Quick Guide - for quick reminders during use
Additionally, we recommend working through the Training Guide for self-training on the monitor before use (not available in all languages).
2
2
Basic Operation
These Instructions for Use are for clinical professionals using the IntelliVue MP2 (M8102A) patient monitor.
This basic operation section gives you an overview of the device and its functions. It tells you how to perform tasks that are common to all measurements (such as entering data, switching a measurement on and off, setting up and adjusting wave speeds, working with profiles). The alarms section gives an overview of alarms. The remaining sections tell you how to perform individual measurements, and how to care for and maintain the equipment.
Familiarize yourself with all instructions including warnings and cautions before starting to monitor patients. Read and keep the Instructions for Use that come with any accessories, as these contain important information about care and cleaning that is not repeated here.
This guide describes all features and options. Your monitor may not have all of them; they are not all available in all geographies. Your monitor is highly configurable. What you see on the screen, how the menus appear and so forth, depends on the way it has been tailored for your hospital and may not be exactly as shown here.
In this guide:
• A warning alerts you to a potential serious outcome, adverse event or safety hazard. Failure to observe a warning may result in death or serious injury to the user or patient.
• A caution alerts you to where special care is necessary for the safe and effective use of the product.
Failure to observe a caution may result in minor or moderate personal injury or damage to the product or other property, and possibly in a remote risk of more serious injury.
• Monitor refers to the entire patient monitor. Display refers to the physical display unit. Display
Screen and Screen refer to everything you see on monitor’s display, such as measurements, alarms, patient data and so forth.
9
2 Basic Operation
Introducing the IntelliVue MP2
Introducing the IntelliVue MP2
The Philips IntelliVue MP2 monitor provides a comprehensive set of basic physiological measurements: ECG (including ST analysis and optional 10-lead ECG), NBP, SpO
2 invasive blood pressure, temperature and CO
, and optionally
2
. Through networking it provides information integration, documentation and information access. The MP2 can be used with adult, pediatric and neonatal patients in a hospital environment and during patient transport both inside and outside hospitals.
The monitor stores data in trend databases. You can see tabular trends (vital signs) and document them on a central printer. You can view measurement trend graphs, including horizon trends, to help you identify changes in the patient’s physiological condition.
The monitor can be powered by a rechargeable battery, or from AC mains using the external power
supply (M8023A). For battery charging, care and status information, refer to the chapter “Using
Controls, Indicators and Connectors
MP2 Overview
3
4
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
6
5
9
9
On/Standby Switch
Power and battery indicators (see “MP2
Controls and Indicators” on page 11)
3.5-inch TFT LCD touchscreen QVGA display
Alarm lamps (see “MP2 Controls and
Built-in carrying handle
Battery eject button
Keys (see “MP2 Controls and Indicators” on page 11)
Measurement connectors (see “MP2
Patient Connectors, Right Side” on page 12)
Battery
10
5
4
3
2
Controls, Indicators and Connectors
6
MP2 Controls and Indicators
7
2 Basic Operation
8
9
10
11
1
1
On/Standby switch
2
On/Standby LED. Green when monitor is on. Red indicates an error.
3
Battery status LED. Yellow when charging. Flashing red when battery is empty, or a battery malfunction is detected.
4
External power LED. Green when monitor is powered from an external power source.
5
Alarms off indicator. When alarms are suspended, the lamp is red, and the
ALARMS OFF message appears on the screen.
6
Active INOP alarm lamp in light blue.
Stays lit until active INOP is acknowledged.
7
Active alarm lamp. Red or yellow, depending on alarm level. Stays lit until active alarm is acknowledged.
8
Silence key
9
Alarms key: turns alarms On/Off, or pauses them
10 SmartKeys key: brings up SmartKeys on the screen
11 Main Screen key: closes all open menus/windows and returns to the main screen, or selects current screen.
11
2 Basic Operation
Controls, Indicators and Connectors
6
MP2 Patient Connectors, Right Side
4
5
1
3
Symbols (International)
2
3
1
4
7
2
Text (English versions only)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Pressure (option)
Temperature (option)
Noninvasive blood pressure
SpO
2
ECG sync pulse output
(See page 222 for specifications)
ECG/Respiration
CO
2
(option)
MP2 Left Side
1
2
Loudspeaker
MSL Connector. Connects to the external power supply via the MSL cable for AC mains operation, battery charging, and communication with a network.
1
2
12
Extending Measurements
2 Basic Operation
Extending Measurements
Your monitor is compatible with Philips measurement extensions for use with other IntelliVue patient monitoring devices. These allow you to add specific measurements to those already integrated into your monitor. These measurement extensions are referred to as MMS extensions.
MMS Extension
M3014A attached to the MP2
The MMS extensions connect to the monitor and use the monitor’s settings and power. Trend data and measurement settings from the measurements in the extensions are stored in the monitor.
WARNING
• Measurements from a MMS extension are only available when the extension is connected to the monitor, and the monitor is running on AC mains via the external power supply (M8023A).
Measurements from a MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor is running on battery power.
• Any measurements on a MMS extension that conflict with those in the monitor cannot be used. For example, only one CO
2
measurement is supported.
To separate an extension from the monitor, press the release lever and push the extension forward.
13
2 Basic Operation
Extending Measurements
M3014A, M3015A and M3016A Measurement Extensions
The optional M3014A Capnography extension adds mainstream capnography, and optionally one pressure plus either a pressure or a temperature to the monitor. Cardiac Output and Continuous
Cardiac Output are not available when used with the MP2.
The optional M3015A Microstream CO
2
extension adds microstream capnography and optionally either pressure or temperature to the monitor. The optional M3016A Mainstream CO
2 mainstream capnography and optionally either pressure or temperature to the monitor.
extension adds
Only one CO
2
measurement at a time is supported.
M3015A Microstream
M3014A Capnography
1
1
4
3
M3016A Mainstream
2
1
7
6
1
2
3
4
3
Pressure connectors (red)
Temperature connector (brown)
Mainstream/sidestream connector CO
2
(optional)
Cardiac Output connector
2
5
6
7
Inlet
Microstream connector CO
2
Gas sample outlet
5
2
14
Extending Measurements
M3012A Hemodynamic MMS Extension
MSL Connector to MP2
2 Basic Operation
Pressure connectors
(red)
Cardiac Output (orange; optional)
Temperature connectors (brown)
When attached to the MP2 connected to the external power supply, the optional M3012A
Hemodynamic extension adds temperature, pressure, and an additional pressure or a temperature to the monitor.
Cardiac Output and Continuous Cardiac Output are not available when used with the MP2.
15
2 Basic Operation
Operating and Navigating
Operating and Navigating
The principle method of operating your monitor is via the touchscreen. Almost every element on the screen is interactive. Screen elements include measurement numerics, information fields, alarms fields, waveforms and menus.
These let you:
• Silence alarms: the Silence key acknowledges all active alarms by switching off audible alarm indicators and lamps.
• Switch alarms on or off, or pause alarms.
Key with symbol
(international)
Text replaces symbol (English versions only)
• Call up SmartKeys on the screen (see below).
• Close all open menus/windows and return to the main screen.
• If you are already in the main screen (no additional menus/ windows are open), then pressing this key opens the
Change Screen
window, where you can choose from a number of pre-configured screens.
• To temporarily disable the touchscreen operation, press and hold this key for 2 seconds. Press the key again to re-enable the touchscreen operation.
16
Operating and Navigating
A typical main screen looks like this:
HR
Bed9
3
Adult Doe, John
SpO
2
2
5
6
7
4
Sinus Rhythm
M
8
1mV
NBP
Sys.
9
All Settings reset to Profile Adult
2 Basic Operation
1
10
4
5
6
MP2 Screen Elements
Item
1
2
3
Description
Alarm volume off indicator
Patient name / alarm message field
Patient category and bed label / INOP message field
Network connection indicator
Measurement label
Paced status
Comments
is displayed when the alarm volume is set to zero (0).
Patient name can be covered by alarm messages or alarms On/Off/Paused message.
HR
Bed4 Adult
ST-I
ST-V6
SpO2 LOW
SpO
2
If red and yellow alarms are active at the same time, they rotate in the alarm field.
HR
Bed4 Adult
ST-I
ST-V6
APNEA
SpO
2
Patient category and bed label can be covered by INOP messages. If there are multiple red/ yellow/cyan INOPs active at the same time, they rotate in the INOP field.
HR
ALL ECG ALARMS OFF
ST-I
ST-V6
APNEA
SpO
2
Documented in Information Center
Instructions for Use.
Touch the measurement to enter the measurement setup menu.
Displayed below the HR label.
17
2 Basic Operation
Operating and Navigating
MP2 Screen Elements
Item
7
Description
Measurement numeric/values
8
9
10
Measurement wave
Status line
Battery status indicator
Comments
Touch the numeric to enter the measurement setup menu.
Touch the wave to enter the measurement setup menu.
Shows information and messages prompting you for action.
Gives information about remaining battery charge, estimated operating time, maintenance requirements and malfunctions. See the
chapter “Using Batteries” on page 189.
Using the Touchscreen
Touch a screen element to get to the actions linked to that element. For example, touch a measurement numeric and the setup menu for that measurement opens. Touch a wave to enter the setup menu for that wave.
Measurement Setup Menus
Each measurement has a setup menu where you can perform operations or change settings. Typically, the setup menu window covers the whole screen, with the exception of the INOP and alarm message fields, which are always displayed at the top. The following picture is for illustration purposes, and may not exactly represent what you see on the screen. We are using non invasive blood pressure as an example, but all measurement setup windows are similar and share the same basic layout and components.
Touch the measurement numeric on the screen to enter the setup menu.
HR
Main screen
Bed4
Adult
SpO
2
Doe, John
Pulse 60 Auto 15 min
Measurement setup menu
No Central Monit.
**
Setup NBP
NBPs HIGH
NBP
Pulse 60
Auto 08:28
1
2
3
NBP meas. + autom. cycle started
Alarms :
On
Sys.
Al. from :
Sys
Auto/Man. :
Auto
Repeat:
15 min
Start/
Stop
Stop
All
NBP
STAT
4
5
18
Operating and Navigating
2 Basic Operation
Key to measurement setup menu:
Item Description
1
2
INOP and alarm message field.
Wave/numerics window.
3
4
5
Status/prompt message.
Next page arrows.
Measurement menu buttons.
Comment
These are always displayed at the top of the screen.
The main measurement numeric and wave (if applicable) are shown in this window so that you do not lose sight of the current measurement while making changes in the menu.
Status/prompt messages related to the measurement menu are displayed below the wave/numerics. General status/prompt messages on the main screen are covered by the measurement setup menu.
The menu may have more than one page, as shown here. Move to another page by touching these arrows.
Each button has two lines of text. To perform an operation on a measurement, press one of the buttons. Some buttons lead directly to a task. For example, pressing the Start/Stop button for noninvasive blood pressure starts a measurement. Other buttons open a pop-up window, which can have more than one page, from which you make a selection. Again, using noninvasive blood pressure as an example, pressing the Repet.Time button for setting the repetition time opens a pop-up window from which you pick a time, scrolling if necessary.
Main Setup Menu
There is usually more than one way to enter a setup menu for a measurement, to change a setting or to execute a task. Some routes are more direct than others. You can use whichever method you find most convenient. Which routes are available to you, however, can vary depending on your monitor’s configuration.
For this reason, this book generally describes entry to a measurement’s setup menu via the Main Setup menu, as this route is always available and is not subject to configuration dependencies. You can get to all setup windows from the Main Setup menu. You enter the Main Setup menu by pressing the
SmartKeys key, then selecting the Main Setup Smartkey.
Main Setup
menu
From here you can get to all setup menus
SmartKeys
A SmartKey is a configurable graphical key on the screen allowing fast access to frequently used functions. Press the SmartKeys hard key to call up a set of SmartKeys on the screen. Although the selection of SmartKeys available on your monitor depends on the monitor configuration and on the options purchased, the SmartKeys window generally looks like this:
19
2 Basic Operation
Operating and Navigating
No Central Monit.
SmartKeys
**
NBPs HIGH
Start/
Stop
Alarm
Limits
Alarm
Volume
Measmt.
Select.
Admit/
Discharge
Vitals
Trend
Profiles
QRS
Volume
Monitor
Standby
Main Setup
is one of the SmartKeys.
enter Main Setup menu - you can get to all setup windows using this key enter profile menu, or revert to default profile previous Screen
Touch to view more
SmartKeys enter standby mode - suspends patient monitoring. All waves and numerics disappear from the display. All settings and patient data information are retained.
change Screen, or revert to default screen quick admit a patient enter patient identification menu to admit/discharge/transfer lock touchscreen operation end case to discharge a patient change alarm volume change QRS volume set alarm limits change screen brightness (not for independent displays) change amplitude (size) of ECG wave review beat labels (annotate arrhythmia wave)
- start/stop manual NBP measurement
- start auto series
- stop current automatic measurement within series stop automatic or STAT NBP measurement and measurement series re-learn arrhythmia start NBP STAT measurement start NBP measurement and measurement series
20
Operating and Navigating
2 Basic Operation
start veni puncture (inflate cuff to subdiastolic pressure) set the NBP repeat time stop current NBP measurement access patient reports zero invasive pressure transducer switch CO
2
pump off new lead setup set standard or EASI lead placement review vital signs trend review graph trend unpair equipment and continue central monitoring with the monitor start 12-Lead Capture (only available if Information Center is connected) select measurement device unpair equipment and continue central monitoring with the telemetry device access ST Map application
Pop-Up Keys
Pop-up keys are task-related graphical keys that appear automatically on the monitor screen when required. For example, the confirm pop-up key appears only when you need to confirm a change.
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
Use this as you would a conventional keyboard. Enter the information by selecting one character after another. Use the Shift key to access uppercase letters. Use the Back key to delete single characters, or use the Clr key to delete entire entries. Select Enter to confirm what you have entered and close the on-screen keyboard.
Bed10 Adult
Last Name
Not Admitted
!
@ #
Q W
E
A S D
$
R
F
% ^
T
Y
G
H
&
U
J
*
I
(
O
K L
)
P
?
Z
X C
Shift Alt
V B
N
M < >
< >
Back
Clr
Enter
21
2 Basic Operation
Operating Modes
Operating Modes
When you switch the monitor on, it starts up in monitoring mode. To change to a different mode:
1
Select the Main Setup menu.
2
Select Operating Modes and choose the mode you require.
Your monitor has four operating modes. Some are passcode protected.
• Monitoring Mode: This is the normal, every day working mode that you use for monitoring patients. You can change elements such as alarm limits, patient category and so forth. When you discharge the patient, these elements return to their default values. Changes can be stored permanently only in Configuration Mode. You may see items, such as some menu options or the altitude setting, that are visible but ‘grayed out’ so that you can neither select nor change them.
These are for your information and can be changed only in Configuration Mode.
• Demonstration Mode: Passcode protected, this is for demonstration purposes only. You must not change into Demonstration Mode during monitoring. In Demonstration Mode, all stored trend information is deleted from the monitor’s memory.
• Configuration Mode: Passcode protected, this mode is for personnel trained in configuration tasks.
These tasks are described in the Configuration Guide. During installation the monitor is configured for use in your environment. This configuration defines the default settings you work with when you switch on, the number of waves you see and so forth.
• Service Mode: Passcode protected, this is for trained service personnel.
Config
When the monitor is in Demonstration Mode, Configuration Mode, or
Service Mode, this is indicated by a box with the mode name in the center of the Screen and a symbol in the bottom right-hand corner. Select this field to change to a different mode.
Standby Mode
Standby mode can be used when you want to temporarily interrupt monitoring.
To enter Standby mode,
1
2
Press the SmartKeys key
.
Either select the Monitor Standby SmartKey
Or select the Main Setup SmartKey, then select Monitor Standby.
The Standby screen looks like this:
22
Understanding Screens
2 Basic Operation
STANDBY
Press any key or select any field on the screen to resume monitoring
The monitor enters Standby mode automatically after the End Case function is used to discharge a patient. Standby suspends patient monitoring. All waves and numerics disappear from the display but all settings and patient data information are retained. A special Standby screen is displayed.
If a patient location is entered at the Information Center, this will also be displayed on the Standby screen (availability depends on Information Center revision).
To resume monitoring,
♦
Select anything on the screen or press any key.
Understanding Screens
Your monitor comes with a set of pre-configured Screens, optimized for common monitoring scenarios. A Screen defines the overall selection, size and position of waves and numerics on the monitor screen when you switch on. You can easily switch between different Screens during monitoring. Screens do NOT affect alarm settings, patient category and so forth.
Switching to a Different Screen
To switch to a different Screen:
1
2
After closing any open menus or windows, press the Main Screen key to access the Change
Screens
menu.
Choose the new Screen from the Change Screens menu.
Changing a Screen’s Content
If you do not want to change the entire Screen content, but only some parts of it, you can substitute individual waves, numerics, or trends. Be aware that these changes cannot be stored permanently in
Monitoring Mode.
To change the selection of elements on a Screen,
1
Select the element you want to change. For example, touch the wave menu to enter the wave setup menu, or touch the numeric to enter the numeric setup menu.
2
From the menu that appears, select
Change Wave
or Change Numeric, and then select the wave or numeric you want.
23
2 Basic Operation
Understanding Profiles
In the Change Screen menu, the changed Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an asterisk.
Up to three modified Screens can be accessed via the Change Screen menu.
To recall Screens, select the name of the
Screen in the Change Screen menu
After a patient discharge, the monitor’s default Screen is shown. Modified Screens are still available in the
Change Screen
menu.
Change Screen
1 Wave B
1 Big Wave
Vital Signs B
2 Waves A
2 Waves B
If the monitor is switched off and then on again, modified Screens are erased from the monitor’s memory and cannot be recalled. If a modified Screen was the last active Screen when the monitor was switched off, it is retained (unless Automat. Default is set to Yes in Configuration Mode).
Using the Visitor Screen
If a visitor Screen is configured for your monitor, you can use it to clear the screen of all waves and numerics but continue to monitor the patient with active alarms and trend storage at the bedside and
Information Center. You can change the name of the visitor Screen in Configuration Mode.
To activate this Screen,
1
Press the Main Screen key to open the Change Screen menu.
2
Select the name of the visitor Screen configured for your monitor from the list of available Screens.
To select a Screen with waves and numerics again,
♦
Touch the gray rectangle in the center of the screen showing the visitor Screen’s name, or press the
Main Screen
key, to open the Change Screen menu and then select a Screen from the list.
Understanding Profiles
Profiles are predefined monitor configurations. They let you change the configuration of the whole monitor so you can adapt it to different monitoring situations. The changes that occur when you change a complete profile are more far reaching than those made when you change a Screen. Screens affect only what is shown on the display. Profiles affect all monitor and measurement settings.
The settings that are defined by Profiles are grouped into three categories. Each category offers a choice of ‘settings blocks’ customized for specific monitoring situations. These categories are:
• Display (screens)
– Each profile can have a choice of many different predefined screens. When you change the profile, the screen selection configured for the new profile becomes active.
• Measurement Settings
– Each profile can have a choice of different predefined measurement settings. These relate directly to individual measurements, for example, measurement on/off, measurement color, alarms limits,
NBP alarm source, NBP repeat time, temperature unit ( o
F or o
C) pressure unit (mmHg or kPa).
24
Understanding Profiles
2 Basic Operation
• Monitor Settings
– Each profile can have a choice of different predefined monitor settings. These relate to the monitor as a whole; for example, display brightness, alarms off/paused, alarm volume, QRS tone volume, tone modulation, prompt tone volume, wave speed, resp wave speed, pulse source.
PAP ZERO+CHECK CAL
Doe, John
PAP ZERO+CHECK CAL
Profiles
Doe, John
Profile : Profile Adult
Patient Category
Paced
: Adult
: No
Profile
Patient
Measmnt. Adult
Measmnt. Pedi
Please Confirm
To activate the highlighted settings block select confirm
Measmnt.Settings
: Measmt. Adult
Profiles Menu, showing current settings
Please Confirm Confirm Cancel
Available choices in measurement menu. Confirm your choice when prompted.
You can change from one complete profile to another or swap individual settings blocks (display screen/monitor settings/measurement settings) to change a subset of a profile. Changes you make to any element within the settings blocks are not saved when you discharge the patient, unless you save them in Configuration Mode.
Depending on your monitor configuration, when you switch on or discharge a patient the monitor either continues with the previous profile, or resets to the default profile configured for that monitor.
WARNING
If you switch to a different profile, the patient category and paced status normally change to the setting specified in the new profile. However some profiles may be setup to leave the patient category and paced status unchanged. Always check the patient category, paced status, and all alarms and settings, when you change profiles.
When you leave Demonstration Mode, the monitor uses the default profile.
Swapping a Complete Profile
1
Press the SmartKeys key and
– Either select Main Setup and then Profiles in the Setup menu.
– Or select the Profiles SmartKey .
2
3
4
In the Profiles menu, select Profile.
Chose a profile from the pop-up list.
Confirm your selection.
25
2 Basic Operation
Understanding Settings
Swapping a Settings Block
3
4
1
2
Select the Main Setup SmartKey and then Profiles in the Main Setup menu, or select the Profiles SmartKey.
In the Profiles menu, select Display or
Measmnt. Settings
or
Monitor Settings
to call up a list of the settings blocks in each category.
Choose a settings block from the pop-up list.
Confirm your selection.
Default Profile
Your monitor has a default profile that it uses when you leave Demonstration, or Service modes, or when you discharge a patient. This profile is indicated by a diamond .
Locked Profiles
Some profiles are locked, so that you cannot change them, even in Configuration Mode. These are indicated by this lock symbol.
Understanding Settings
Each aspect of how the monitor works and looks is defined by a setting. There are a number of different categories of settings, including,
Screen Settings, to define the selection and appearance of elements on each individual Screen
Measurement settings, to define settings unique to each measurement, for example, high and low alarm limits
Monitor settings, including settings that affect more than one measurement or Screen and define general aspects of how the monitor works, for example, alarm volume, reports and recordings, and display brightness.
You must be aware that, although many settings can be changed in Monitoring Mode, permanent changes to settings can only be done in the monitor’s Configuration Mode. All settings are reset to the stored defaults:
• when you discharge a patient
• when you load a Profile
• when the monitor is switched off for more than one minute (if Automat. Default is set to
Yes
).
Changing Measurement Settings
Each measurement has a setup menu in which you can adjust all of its settings. You can enter a setup menu:
• via the measurement numeric - select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu. For example, to enter the Setup ECG menu, select the HR (heart rate) numeric.
26
Switching a Measurement On and Off
2 Basic Operation
• via the Main Setup SmartKey - if you want to setup a measurement when the measurement is switched off, use the Main Setup SmartKey and select Measurements. Then select the measurement name from the popup list. With this permanent key you can access any setup menu in the monitor.
• via the Measurement Selection key.
Switching a Measurement On and Off
When a measurement is off, its waves and numerics are removed from the monitor’s screen. The monitor stops data acquisition and alarming for this measurement.
1
Enter the measurement’s setup menu and select the measurement.
2
Select the measurement name to toggle between on and off. The screen display indicates the active setting.
Adjusting a Measurement Wave
To quickly adjust wave-related measurement settings (such as speed or size), select the measurement wave itself. This displays the measurement Wave menu, which has only wave-related measurement settings.
Changing Wave Speeds
Lowering the wave speed compresses the wave and lets you view a longer time period. Increasing the speed expands the waveform, giving you a more detailed view.
The monitor distinguishes two groups of wave speed settings,
• RespiratorySpeed, for CO
2
waves.
• Global Speed, for all waves not included in the other group.
Changing the Wave Group Speed
The wave speed group setting defines the speed of all the waves in the group.
To change the wave speed of a wave speed group,
1
Select Main Setup -> User Interface
2
Select Global Speed or RespiratorySpeed, as required
3
Select a value from the list of available speeds.
Changing Wave Speed for a Channel
To change the wave speed of an individual wave channel,
1
2
Enter the
Wave
menu for a measurement by selecting its wave.
Select Change
Speed
.
3
To set the speed to the wave group speed, select RespiratorySpeed or Global Speed.
To set an individual channel speed, select a numeric value from the list of available speeds. This overrides the wave group speed setting and sets the speed for the individual wave channel on the
27
2 Basic Operation
Using Labels monitor Screen. The wave channel speed is independent of the wave (label) depicted in the channel, if you change the wave, the new wave will retain the set channel speed.
Using Labels
You can measure up to three invasive pressures and temperatures simultaneously. The monitor uses labels to distinguish between them. The default settings defined in the profile (such as measurement color, wave scale, and alarm settings) are stored within each label. When you assign a label to a measurement, the monitor automatically applies these default settings to the measurement. The labels assigned are used throughout the monitor, in reports, recordings, and in trends.
Changing Measurement Labels (e.g. Pressure)
To change a measurement label of a measurement with multiple labels (invasive pressure or temperature),
1
Enter the Wave menu of the measurement.
2
3
Select Label.
Choose a label from the list.
The monitor automatically applies the scale, color, etc. settings stored in the Profile for the label you select. You can change scale settings in Monitoring Mode, but color can only be changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.
Any labels already being used in the monitor are shown “grayed-out” in the list and cannot be selected.
Resolving Label Conflicts
Each label must be unique, that is, it can only be assigned once. If you have a MMS Extension equipped with a pressure measurement connected to the monitor, there is a potential conflict with, for example, the ABP label. If you manually enter measurement values these may also conflict with existing labels on the monitor.
Depending on your configuration, the monitor will either
• display the Measurement Selection window automatically for you to resolve the conflict
• take no action, you must enter the Measurement
Selection
window and resolve the conflict
measurement selection key
All the currently available measurements are depicted in the
Measurement Selection
window. Any measurement labels causing a label conflict are shown in red. If a measurement is connected but currently unavailable, for example, because it was deactivated due to a label conflict, that measurement is shown “grayed-out”. If a MMS Extension is not available, for example if monitor is running on battery power and not an external power source, the MMS Extension is not displayed.
28
Changing Monitor Settings
2 Basic Operation
PAP ZERO+CHECK CAL
*** APNEA
Measurement Selection
ABP
Tcore
Temp
NBP PAP
Unavailable measurements are grayed-out
SpO
2
ECG
Resp
CO
2
CPP
Temp
Change
Label
De-
Activate
Setup
SpO
2
More
A MMS Extension is only shown in the Measurement Selection window when the monitor is connected to the external power supply (M8023A) and running on AC mains power, and not when running on battery power.
To resolve a label conflict:
1
Press the SmartKeys key and
– Either select Main Setup and then Meas. Selection
– Or select the Meas. Select. SmartKey to display the Measurement Selection window.
2
Select the label to be corrected.
3
Use the measurement selection keys to resolve the conflict. Select either:
– Change Label: to assign a different label to the conflicting label.
– De-activate: to disable the conflicting measurement. It retains its label for future use but becomes invisible to the monitor, as though it had been unplugged.
– Setup <Measurement label>: to enter the Setup menu for the measurement and change the conflicting device’s label to a different label.
4
Select the De-activate pop-up key to disable the conflicting measurement.
Changing Monitor Settings
To change monitor settings such as brightness, or QRS tone volume:
1
2
Press the SmartKeys key .
Either Enter the Main Setup menu by selecting the SmartKey . Select the setting you want to change, or select User Interface to enter a submenu where you can change user interface settings.
Or Select the appropriate SmartKey for the setting you want to change.
29
2 Basic Operation
Checking Your Monitor Revision
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
1
2
Select the
Brightness
SmartKey.
Select the appropriate setting for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, 1 is the least bright. Optimum is suitable for most situations.
Your monitor may be configured with a lower brightness for Standby mode and also for transport to conserve battery power. These settings can only be changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.
Adjusting Touch Tone Volume
The touch tone volume is the tone you hear when you select any field on the monitor screen. To adjust the touch tone volume,
1
In the Main Setup menu, select User Interface
2
Select TouchToneVolume, then select the appropriate setting for the touch tone volume: 10 is the loudest and 1 is the quietest. Selecting zero switches the touch tone volume off.
Setting the Date and Time
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from this.
Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.
1
In the Main Setup menu, select Date, Time.
2
3
Select, in turn, the
Year, Month, Day, Hour
(in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as necessary. Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.
Checking Your Monitor Revision
1
2
3
Select Main Setup -> Revision to open the Monitor Revision menu.
Select the correct device from the device pop-up keys.
From the Monitor Revision menu, select the monitor component for which you need revision information.
Getting Started
Once you understand the basic operation principles, you can get ready for monitoring.
Inspecting the Monitor
WARNING
If the monitor is mechanically damaged, or if it is not working properly, do not use it for any monitoring procedure on a patient. Contact your service personnel.
1
Before you start to make measurements, carry out the following checks on the monitor.
– Check for any mechanical damage.
30
Getting Started
2 Basic Operation
2
– Check all the external cables, plug-ins and accessories.
Always ensure that the battery is loaded in the battery compartment when monitoring a patient, even when the monitor is running on external power.
3
If you are using battery power, ensure that the battery has sufficient power for monitoring. Before using a battery for the first time, you must charge it, following the instructions given in the section on Charging Batteries.
4
5
Measurements from measurement extensions attached to the monitor are only available when the monitor is operating from AC mains power. The measurement extensions are not active when the monitor is operating from battery power.
Check all the functions of the instrument that you need to monitor the patient, and ensure that the instrument is in good working order.
Switching On
Press the on/off switch on the monitor for one second. The monitor performs a self test and is then ready to use. If you see a message such as CO2 Sensor Warmup wait until it disappears before starting to monitor that measurement.
Power On/Power Off Behavior
The general rules determining the behavior of the monitor when connected to, or disconnected from power are as follows:
• A monitor that was switched on prior to a temporary power loss switches on again when power is restored.
• A monitor that was switched off prior to a temporary power loss remains off when power is restored.
• When AC mains power is lost, a battery powered monitor continues to run without interruption on battery power.
Setting up the Measurements
1
Decide which measurements you want to make.
2
Connect the required patient cables and sensors. The connectors are color-coded to the patient cables and sensors for easy identification.
Starting Monitoring
After you switch on the monitor,
1
2
3
Admit your patient to the monitor.
Check that the profile, alarm limits, alarm and QRS volumes, patient category and paced status and so forth are appropriate for your patient. Change them if necessary.
Refer to the appropriate measurement section for details of how to perform the measurements you require.
31
2 Basic Operation
Disconnecting from AC Mains Power
Disconnecting from AC Mains Power
To disconnect the monitor from AC mains power, unplug the power cord for the external power supply (M8023A) from the mains socket.
Monitoring After a Power Failure
If external power is disconnected or there is a power failure, the monitor continues to run on its rechargeable battery.
If the monitor is without any power (no external power or the battery is empty) for less than one minute, monitoring will resume with all active settings unchanged. If the monitor is without power for
more than one minute, the behavior depends on your configuration. If Automat. Default is set to Yes, the default profile will be loaded when power is restored. If Automat. Default is set to
No
, all active settings are retained, if power is restored within 48 hours. The Automat. Default setting is made in Configuration Mode.
Networked Monitoring
You can connect your monitor to an Information Center on a network. This can be done using one of the optional interfaces:
• Standard wired LAN
• IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry System (IIT)
If your monitor is connected to a network, a network symbol is displayed in the upper left corner next to the bed label. To see details about the monitoring equipment and technical information about the network, select the Main Setup SmartKey to enter the Setup menu, then select
Bed Information
.
Be aware that some network-based functions may be limited for monitors on IIT wireless networks in comparison to those on wired networks.
32
3
3
Alarms
The alarm information here applies to all measurements. Measurement-specific alarm information is discussed in the sections on individual measurements.
The monitor has two different types of alarm: patient alarms and INOPs.
Patient Alarms are red and yellow alarms. A red alarm indicates a high priority patient alarm such as a potentially life threatening situation (for example, asystole). A yellow alarm indicates a lower priority patient alarm (for example, a respiration alarm limit violation). Additionally there are short yellow alarms, most of which are specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions (for example, ventricular bigeminy).
INOPs are technical alarms, they indicate that the monitor cannot measure or detect alarm conditions reliably. If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection (for example, LEADS OFF), the monitor places a question mark in place of the measurement numeric and an audible indicator tone will be sounded. INOPs without this audible indicator indicate that there may a problem with the reliability of the data, but that monitoring is not interrupted.
Most INOPs are light blue, however there are a small number of INOPS which are always yellow or red to indicate a severity corresponding to red and yellow alarms. The following INOPs can also be
configured as red or yellow INOPs to provide a severity indication:
• ECG Leads Off
• Cuff Overpress
• Cuff Not Deflated
All monitors in a unit should have the same severity configured for these INOPs.
Alarms are indicated after the alarm delay time. This is made up of the system delay time plus the trigger delay time for the individual measurement. See the specifications section for details.
If more than one alarm is active, the alarm messages are shown in the alarm status area in succession. An arrow symbol next to the alarm message informs you that more than one message is active.
↑ ** HR HIGH
The monitor sounds an audible indicator for the highest priority alarm. If more than one alarm condition is active in the same measurement, the monitor announces the most severe. Your monitor may be configured to increase alarm indicator volume automatically during the time when the alarm is not acknowledged.
33
3 Alarms
Visual Alarm Indicators
Visual Alarm Indicators
Alarm message: An alarm message text appears in the alarm status area at the top of the screen indicating the source of the alarm. There is a field for INOPs (light blue, red or yellow) and a field for patient alarms, which is shared for red and yellow alarms. If more than one measurement is in an alarm condition, the message changes every two seconds, and has an arrow ( ) at the side. If both red and yellow alarm conditions are active simultaneously, they alternate every two seconds in the patient alarms field. The background color of the alarm message matches the alarm priority: red for red alarms, yellow for yellow alarms, light blue for standard INOPs, red for red INOPs and yellow for yellow
INOPs. The asterisk symbols (*) beside the alarm message match the alarm priority: *** for red alarms,
** for yellow alarms, * for short yellow alarms. Standard INOPs do not have a symbol, red and yellow
INOPs have exclamation marks beside the alarm message: !!! for red INOPs and !! for yellow INOPs.
Depending on how your monitor is configured, it may display alarm limit violation messages
• in text form, for example “**SpO2 LOW” or
• in numeric form, for example “**SpO2 94<96”, where the first number shows the maximum deviation from the alarm limit, and the second number shows the currently set limit.
Flashing numeric: The numeric of the measurement in alarm flashes.
Bright alarm limits: If the alarm was triggered by an alarm limit violation, the corresponding alarm limit on the monitor screen is shown more brightly if Show AlarmLimits is enabled and there is sufficient room on the screen.
Alarm lamp: A lamp on the monitor’s front panel flashes. The alarm lamp is divided into two sections. The right one flashes for a patient alarm, except for short yellow alarms where the lamp will light for approximately six seconds. The color is yellow or red corresponding to the highest priority patient alarm currently present. The left one lights continuously for a light blue INOP and flashes for yellow or red INOPs as follows:
INOP Lamp
Color
Yellow
Red
Modulation (how long the lamp is on or off while flashing)
On
1.0 seconds
0.25 seconds
Off
1.0 seconds
0.25 seconds
If only patient alarms are present, and no INOPs, the patient alarms will use both left and right sections to flash (for red and yellow alarms) or light for approximately six seconds (for short yellow alarms). If only INOPs are present, and no patient alarms, red and yellow INOPs will use both left and right sections to flash but light blue INOPs will always light continuously in the left section only.
Audible Alarm Indicators
The audible alarm indicators configured for your monitor depend on which alarm standard applies in your hospital. Audible alarm indicator patterns are repeated until you acknowledge the alarm by switching it off or pausing it, or until the alarm condition ceases (if audible alarm indication is set to non-latching).
34
Audible Alarm Indicators
3 Alarms
WARNING
• Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to a low level or off during patient monitoring may result in patient danger. Remember that the most reliable method of patient monitoring combines close personal surveillance with correct operation of monitoring equipment.
Alarm Tone Configuration
The audible alarm indicators of your monitor are configurable. In the monitor’s Configuration Mode, you can:
• increase the alarm volume of unacknowledged alarms at regular intervals
• change the interval between alarm sounds (ISO/IEC Standard 9703-2 alarms only)
• change the base volume of the red and yellow alarm tones and the INOP tones
• change the alarm sound to suit the different alarm standards valid in different countries.
Traditional Audible Alarms (HP/Agilent/Philips/Carenet)
• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched sound is repeated once a second.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched sound is repeated every two seconds.
• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow alarms, but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: an INOP tone is repeated every two seconds.
ISO/IEC Standard 9703-2 Audible Alarms
• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched tone is repeated five times, followed by a configurable pause.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched tone is repeated three times, followed by a configurable pause.
• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow alarms, but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: a lower pitched tone is repeated twice, followed by a pause.
Changing the Alarm Tone Volume
♦
If you want to see a numerical indication of the current alarm volume on a scale from zero to 10, or change the setting, select the Alarm Volume SmartKey. The volume scale pops up. The current setting is indented. To change the setting, select the required number on the scale. Any settings that are inactive (“grayed out”) have been disabled in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.
Alarm
Volume
When the alarm volume is set to zero (off), the alarm volume symbol reflects this. If you switch the alarm volume off, you will not get any audible indication of alarm conditions.
35
3 Alarms
Acknowledging Alarms
Minimum Volume for No Central Monitoring INOP
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, and the connection is interrupted, the INOP message No Central Monit. will appear within 30 seconds, accompanied by an INOP tone. To help ensure that this INOP, and any other active alarm, is not overlooked, the INOP and alarm tones may be configured to have a minimum volume. In this case, INOP and alarm tones will sound even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.
Minimum Volume for Severe Yellow or Red INOPs
Severe yellow or red INOPs require action to ensure the well-being of the patient. Therefore the minimum volume for the INOP tone is set to at least alarm volume 8, irrespective of the current alarm volume setting. The INOP tone will sound even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.
The severe INOPs for which this applies are:
Cuff Not Deflated (configurable to yellow or red)
NBP Cuff Overpress (configurable to yellow or red)
Insert Battery (yellow)
Acknowledging Alarms
To acknowledge all active alarms and INOPs, press the Silence key. This switches off the audible alarm indicators and alarm lamps.
A check mark beside the alarm message indicates that the alarm has been acknowledged. If the monitor is configured to re-alarm, a dashed check mark will be shown.
If the condition that triggered the alarm is still present after the alarm has been acknowledged, the alarm message
APNEA
stays on the screen with a check mark symbol beside it, except for NBP alarms. When an NBP alarm is acknowledged the alarm message disappears.
If the alarm condition is no longer present, all alarm indicators stop and the alarm is reset.
Switching off the alarms for the measurement in alarm, or switching off the measurement itself, also stops alarm indication.
Acknowledging Disconnect INOPs
Acknowledging an INOP that results from a disconnected transducer switches off the associated measurement. The only exception is ECG/Resp: acknowledging a disconnect INOP for ECG leads does not switch off the ECG and Resp measurements. Acknowledging a disconnect INOP at the
Information Center switches off the audible INOP indicator but does not switch off the measurement.
36
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms
3 Alarms
Alarm Reminder (ReAlarm)
If Alarm Reminder is configured on for your monitor, you will get an audible reminder of alarm conditions that remain active after you have acknowledged the alarm. This reminder may take the form of a repetition of the alarm tone for a limited time, or an unlimited repetition of the alarm tone (this is the same as a new alarm). Alarm reminder is not available for standard, light blue INOPs but for yellow and red INOPs.
In Configuration Mode, you can set the interval between silencing the alarm and sounding the reminder tone to one, two, or three minutes.
The alarm reminder behavior at the Information Center is different to that at the monitor. Refer to the
Information Center Instructions for Use for further information.
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms
If you want to temporarily prevent alarms from sounding, for example while you are moving a patient, you can pause alarms. Depending on your monitor configuration, alarms are paused for one, two, or three minutes, or infinitely.
To view the alarm pause setting chosen for your unit,
1
Select Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings
2
Check the Alarms Off setting.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
To Pause All Alarms
♦
Press the Alarms key.
If your monitor is configured to infinite pause time, the lamp next to the alarms off symbol is red, and pressing this key switches alarms off.
To Switch All Alarms Off
You can only switch alarms off permanently if your monitor is configured to allow infinite alarms pause.
♦
Press the Alarms key.
Pausing alarms infinitely is the same as switching them off.
Alarms
Off
To Switch Individual Measurement Alarms On or Off
1
2
Select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu.
Select Alarms to toggle between On and Off.
The alarms off symbol is shown beside the measurement numeric.
37
3 Alarms
Alarm Limits
While Alarms are Paused or Off
• The red Alarms Paused lamp on the monitor front panel is lit.
•
In the alarm
field, the monitor displays the message
Alarms Paused
or Alarms Off, together with the alarms paused symbol and the remaining pause time in minutes and seconds, or alarms off symbol.
ALARMS PAUSED 1:28
• No alarms are sounded and no alarm messages are shown.
ALARMS OFF
• INOP messages are shown but no INOP tones are sounded.
The only exceptions are the INOPs CUFF NOT DEFLATED, NBP Cuff Overpressure and INOPs relating to empty, missing and malfunctioning batteries.
These INOPs switch the alarms on, and the INOP tones are sounded, even if alarms are paused or off. You need to remove the INOP condition first before you can switch the alarm tones off again.
If a NO SENSOR or NO TRANSDUCER INOP is present and alarms are paused or switched off, the measurement in question is switched off.
Restarting Paused Alarms
♦
To manually switch on alarm indication again after a pause, press the Alarms key again.
Alarm indication starts again automatically after the pause period expires. If the monitor is configured to stay paused infinitely, you must select Alarms Off again to restart alarm indication.
Resetting Arrhythmia Alarm Timeouts
♦
To reset the arrhythmia alarm timeout period, press the Alarms key and then press it again.
Extending the Alarm Pause Time
If your monitor has extended alarm pause enabled, you can extend the alarm pause time. Use this to prevent alarms being indicated, for example, while you are washing a patient or carrying out a procedure. Only extend the alarm pause time when you are sure that clinical personnel are available to monitor the patient’s condition closely.
To extend the alarm pause time to five or 10 minutes,
1
Select one of the alarm fields. This calls up the Review Alarms window.
2
Select either the pop-up key Pause Al. 5 min or the pop-up key Pause Al. 10 min.
Each time you select one of these pop-up keys, the Alarm Pause Time is reset to five (or 10) minutes.
Alarm Limits
The alarm limits you set determine the conditions that trigger yellow and red limit alarms. For some measurements (for example, SpO
2
), where the value ranges from 100 to 0, setting the high alarm limit to 100 switches the high alarm off. In these cases, the alarms off symbol is not displayed.
38
Alarm Limits
3 Alarms
WARNING
Be aware that the monitors in your care area may each have different alarm settings, to suit different patients. Always check that the alarm settings are appropriate for your patient before you start monitoring.
Viewing Individual Alarm Limits
HR
120
50
85
Alarm limits
You can usually see the alarm limits set for each measurement next to the measurement numeric on the main screen.
If your monitor is not configured to show the alarm limits next to the numeric, you can see them in the appropriate measurement setup menu. Select the measurement numeric to enter the menu and check the limits.
Viewing All Alarm Limits
The Alarm Limits overview window lists the currently set alarm limits for all measurements. If an
Apnea alarm delay time is set, this is also shown. The Alarms Off symbol is shown beside the measurement label of any measurement whose alarm switched off.
To open the Alarm Limits window, either select one of the alarm fields then select the
Alarm Limits
pop-up key, or select the Alarm Limits SmartKey, if configured.
Graphic view of current yellow and red alarm limits and currently monitored measurement value
Off
indicates the measurement is switched off
Measurement labels, with alarms off symbol where appropriate
Δ
QTc
SpO
2
NBPs
Alarm Limits
Off
ABPs
All Lim. All Lim.
Narrow
Wide
Set narrow or wide alarm AutoLimits for all measurements
♦
Select Show ST Limits to expand the list of ST leads and view the currently set alarm limits.
Selecting Hide ST Limits hides the list again.
You can use the pop-up keys that open with the Alarm Limits window to perform common tasks:
39
3 Alarms
Alarm Limits
– All Lim. Narrow/All Lim. Wide to set narrow or wide alarm AutoLimits for all measurements.
These pop-up keys are not available in the window for changing individual alarm limits which you access by selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.
Changing Alarm Limits
To change individual measurement alarm limits using the measurement’s Setup Menu,
1
2
In the measurement’s setup menu, select the alarm limit you want to change. This calls up a list of available values for the alarm limit.
Select a value from the list to adjust the alarm limit.
For example, to change the alarm limits for SpO
2
:
• Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the high alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
• Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
Alternatively, you can use the keys in the measurement Change Limits window, which you access by selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.
Parameter label
High red alarm (view only)
ABPs
Graphic view of alarm limits with currently measured value
Alarms
On/Off
High yellow alarm field
Select to open a pop-up list of high alarm limits
Alarms On/Off key - select to toggle between alarms on or off
Preview Alarm AutoLimits for a measurement before applying
Select to apply wide AutoLimits
Select to apply narrow AutoLimits
Low yellow alarm field
Select to open a pop-up list of low alarm limits
Low red alarm (view only)
40
Alarm Limits
3 Alarms
To change alarm limits,
1
Enter the Change Limits window.
2
To set the high alarm limit, select the high yellow alarm field to open a pop-up list of high alarm limits. Select a limit from the list. Repeat to set the low yellow alarm field.
If you set the yellow alarm limit outside the red alarm limit, the monitor will automatically set the red alarm to the yellow alarm limit.
When an ST measurement is in the Change Limits window there are also two pop-up keys available labeled All ST Narrow/All ST Wide. With these keys you can set Auto Limits for all ST
Leads.
About Automatic Alarm Limits (AutoLimits)
The monitor can automatically set alarm limits suited to your individual patient, using the Automatic
Alarm Limits function. This tells the monitor to adapt the alarm limits of selected measurements to the measured vital signs within a defined safe limit. The monitor calculates safe AutoLimits for each patient based on the measured values from the last 12 seconds.
The defined safe limits never exceed the non-pathological range.
Limits Narrow
sets limits close to the currently measured values for situations where it is critical for you to be informed about small changes in your patient’s vital signs.
Limits Wide
sets limits further away from the currently measured values for situations where small changes are not so critical.
♦
Use the keys in the Change Limits window to apply AutoLimits for individual measurements.
These keys are not available if AutoLimits have been disabled for the measurement in the monitor’s
Configuration Mode.
High alarm limit, wide
High alarm limit, narrow
Alarm limits
Low alarm limit, narrow
Low alarm limit, wide
Measurement value
Lower limit clamps
Upper limit clamps
AutoLimits are not available for all measurements. The list of measurements for which AutoLimits can be used is defined in the monitor’s Configuration mode.
Use the Change Limits window to check AutoLimits before you apply them to ensure that they are appropriate for your individual patient and their clinical condition. Once applied, AutoLimits are shown on the monitor screen just like manually-set alarm limits. If the AutoLimits are not appropriate for your patient, you must set alarm limits manually. The limits remain unchanged until you set them again or change them manually.
41
3 Alarms
Reviewing Alarms
Documenting Alarm Limits
To print a list of all current alarm limit settings on an available printer:
1
2
Select the Main Setup SmartKey.
Select Reports from the Main Setup menu.
3
Select Alarm Limits.
Reviewing Alarms
You can see which alarms and INOPs are currently active in the respective alarms and INOPs fields at the top of the screen.
To review the history of alarms and INOPs, select the alarms or INOPs field to open the Review
Alarms
window.
All alarms and INOPs are erased from the Review Alarms window when you discharge a patient, or if you change to Demonstration Mode.
Review Alarms Window
The Review Alarms window contains a list of the most recent alarms and INOPs with date and time information.
Review Alarms
23 Apr 14:08:30
***Apnea
23 Apr 14:08:30 Alarms Silenced
23 Apr 14:08:19 **AwRR LOW (14<15)
23 Apr 14:42:55
**SpO2 NON-PULSAT.
Alarm
Limits
PauseAl.
PauseAl.
5 MIn
10 MIn
If configured to do so, each alarm is shown with the alarm limit active when the alarm was triggered and the maximum value measured beyond this limit. The Review Alarms window also shows when the monitor was switched on (after being switched off for longer than 1 minute) and any changes made to the Alarms On/Off, Standby, Silence or ECG source changes.
When you select an item from the list, you can get additional information about that item. If you select a high or low limit alarm in the list, the Graphical Trends window will open to provide further data. If you select an alert other than a high or low alarm, a help text window opens with more information. Some items in the list are simply log items not related to a patient alert as such (for example, Alarms On or Alarms Off). You cannot see any further information if you select one of these items. When you close these windows you will return to the Review Alarms window.
The information in the Review Alarms window is deleted when a patient is discharged, and when you leave Demonstration Mode.
42
Latching Alarms
3 Alarms
The Review Alarms window pop-up keys appear when the window is opened. If alarm pause extension is disabled, the pause pop-up keys are inactive.
Alarm
Limits
Pause Al.
5 Min.
Pause Al.
10 Min.
Latching Alarms
The alarm latching setting for your monitor defines how the alarm indicators behave when you do not acknowledge them. When alarms are set to non-latching, their indicators end when the alarm condition ends. Switching alarm latching on means that visual and/or audible alarm indications are still displayed or announced by the monitor after the alarm condition ends. The indication lasts until you acknowledge the alarm.
Viewing the Alarm Latching Settings
To see the alarm latching setting for your monitor
1
2
In the monitor’s Main Setup menu, select Alarms.
Select Alarm Settings, and see the Visual Latching and Audible Latching settings.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode. You should be aware of the settings chosen for your unit. There are three possible choices each for visual and audible latching, Red, Red and
Yellow, and Off. These choices can be combined to give the following settings:
Visual Latching
Audible latching
R&Y
R&Y
R = red alarms, Y = yellow alarms
Alarm Latching Behavior
R&Y
R
R&Y
Off
R
R
R
Off
Off
Off
Red and Yellow Measurement
Alarms
Non-latching alarms
Visual and audible latching
Visual latching, audible non-latching
Alarm has not been acknowledged.
Alarm has been acknowledged.
Alarm condition still present.
Alarm condition no longer present.
Alarm tone on. Alarm lamp on. Alarm message. Flashing numerics.
All audible and visual alarm indicators automatically stop.
Alarm tone on.
Alarm lamp on.
Alarm message.
Flashing numerics.
Alarm message. Flashing numerics.
Audible alarm indicators automatically stop.
Alarm condition still present.
Alarm condition no longer present.
Alarm tone off. Alarm lamp off. Alarm message. Flashing numerics. Audible alarm reminder (if configured).
Audible and visual alarm indicators automatically stop.
All INOPs are non-latching. See “Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms” on page 100 for information on one-star
yellow alarms latching behavior.
43
3 Alarms
Testing Alarms
Testing Alarms
When you switch the monitor on, a selftest is started. You must check that the alarms lamps light, one after the other, and that you hear a single tone. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm indicators are functioning correctly. For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the measurement on yourself (for example SpO that appropriate alarm behavior is observed.
2
or CO
2
) or use a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check
Alarm Behavior at On/Off
When you switch alarms on, the settings defined in the currently active Profile are used.
If the monitor is switched off for longer than one minute and then switched on again, or after a loss of power lasting longer than one minute, or when a patient is discharged, the monitor can be configured to restore either the alarm settings from the monitor's configured default Profile, or the most recently used alarm settings. After any of these situations, you should check that the alarm settings are appropriate for your patient, and if necessary, select the correct Profile and patient category.
If power is lost for less than one minute, the alarm settings prior to the power loss are restored.
Alarm Recordings
3
4
You can set up your monitor so that it automatically triggers alarm recordings at the Information
Center, or if configured, to a printer as a realtime report.
1
2
Press the Main Setup SmartKey.
Select Alarms from the Main Setup menu.
Select Alarm Recording from the Alarms menu to open the Alarm Recordings menu.
Select a measurement from those listed for which you want to change the alarm condition that triggers an alarm recording. This opens a pop-up list.
5
For the desired measurement(s), choose the alarm condition to trigger an alarm recording:
Red Only
: an alarm recording will automatically be triggered when the measurement enters a red alarm condition.
Red&Yell
: both yellow and red alarms will trigger an alarm recording.
Off:
disables automatic alarm recording.
Refer to the chapter “Recording” for details of how to set up a recording.
44
4
4
Patient Alarms and INOPs
This chapter lists patient alarms and technical alarms (INOPs) alphabetically, irrespective of their
priority. INOPs start on page 51. All alarms and INOPs are listed here; the ones which can appear on
your monitor will depend on the model and the individual options.
Patient Alarm Messages
The measurement labels and abbreviations for pressure, temperature, SpO
2
, and anesthetic agent alarms are explained in the individual chapters.
Some alarms may be shown at the Information Center in shortened form, when transferred through
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry. These shortened alarm texts are included in the list and identified with the note “at Information Center”.
Note that yellow arrhythmia alarms may be shown with one or with two stars, depending on your monitor configuration and the Information Center revision you are using.
Alarm Message
***APNEA
or
***APNEA xxx sec
***ASYSTOLE
**awRR HIGH
**awRR LOW
**BIS HIGH
**BIS LOW
***BRADY (Pulse) or
***BRADY xxx<yyy
From
CO
2
, Resp,
AGM
ECG
CO
2
, Resp,
AGM
CO
2
, Resp,
AGM
BIS
BIS
Press, SpO
2
Condition Indication
Respiration has stopped for longer than the preset apnea time. “xxx” denotes the
Apnea duration.
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
No QRS detected for a period greater than the asystole threshold (in the absence of Vfib or chaotic ECG).
The airway respiration rate has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The airway respiration rate has dropped below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The Bispectral Index value has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The Bispectral Index value has dropped below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The heart rate from the Pulse signal has fallen below the bradycardia limit. xxx denotes the lowest measured value; yyy is the bradycardia limit.
numeric flashes and alarm limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
45
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Patient Alarm Messages
Alarm Message
**CCO/CCI HIGH
**CCO/CCI LOW
**CPP HIGH
**CPP LOW
***DESAT
or
***DESAT xxx<yyy
**etCO2 HIGH
**etCO2 LOW
**etO2 HIGH
**etO2 LOW
*/**/***
EVENT:<GRP>
*/**/*** EVENT
at Information center
***EXTREME BRADY
***EXTREME TACHY
**HR HIGH
**HR LOW
From
CCO
CCO
CPP
CPP
SpO
CO
2
, Resp,
AGM
CO
2
, Resp,
AGM
O
O
2
2
2
, AGM
, AGM
Event surveillance
Event surveillance
ECG
ECG
ECG
ECG
Condition Indication
Continuous Cardiac Output or CC
Index is above the high alarm limit.
Continuous Cardiac Output or CC
Index is below the low alarm limit.
The CPP value has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone
The CPP value has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The SpO
2
value has fallen below the desaturation alarm limit. xxx denotes the lowest measured value, and yyy is the desaturation limit. numeric flashes, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The end tidal CO
2 been exceeded.
high alarm limit has numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The end tidal CO
2
value has fallen below the low alarm limit.
The end tidal O been exceeded.
2
high alarm limit has numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The end tidal O
2
value has fallen below the low alarm limit. numeric flashes, and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
An event has occurred and the event notification is configured to alarm.
<GRP> is the event group event group name flashes, yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm tone
An event has occurred and the event notification is configured to alarm.
Check on the monitor for more details on event group.
(on monitor) event group name flashes, yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm tone
The bradycardia limit has been exceeded.
The tachycardia limit has been exceeded.
numeric flashes and alarm limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and alarm limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The heart rate high alarm limit has been exceeded.
The heart rate has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone. The sound switches off after 5 seconds if
Arrhythmia is On.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone. The sound switches off after 5 seconds if
Arrhythmia is On.
46
Patient Alarm Messages
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Alarm Message From Condition Indication
*/**IRREGULAR HR
*/**MISSED BEAT
*/**MULTIFORM PVCs
**NBP HIGH
***<Pressure>
DISCONNECT
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
NBP
**NBP LOW
*/**NON-SUSTAIN VT
NBP
ECG/
Arrhythmia
The measured NBP value is below the low alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
A run of Vs having a ventricular
HR>V-Tach HR limit, but lasting for less than the V-Tach Run limit has been detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
*/**PACER NOT CAPT
ECG/
Arrhythmia
(paced patients only)
A missed beat with a pace pulse was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
*/**PACER NT PACING
ECG/
Arrhythmia
(paced patients only)
A missed beat without a pace pulse was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
*/**PAIR PVCs
ECG/
Arrhythmia
*/**PAUSE
ECG/
Arrhythmia
A non-ventricular contraction, followed by two ventricular contractions, followed by a non-ventricular contraction has been detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
No beat detected for a period greater than the pause threshold. numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
PRESS
Consistently irregular heart rhythm.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
No beat detected for 1.75*R-R interval, or if HR>120bpm no beat detected for one second (non-paced patients only).
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
Two differently shaped Vs detected, each occurring at least twice within the last 300 beats and at least once within the last 60 beats.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
The measured NBP value is above the high alarm limit.
s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
***<Pressure> HIGH
PRESS
The pressure is non-pulsatile and the mean pressure is continuously less than
10mmHg (1.3kPa). This alarm occurs only with arterial pressures (P, ABP,
ART, Ao, BAP, FAP, PAP, UAP, P1, P2,
P3, P4).
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The measured pressure value is above the extreme high alarm limit. s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes, high limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
47
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Patient Alarm Messages
Alarm Message
**<Pressure> HIGH
***<Pressure> LOW
**<Pressure> LOW
**PULSE HIGH
**PULSE LOW
*/**PVCs/min HIGH
**QTc HIGH
**
ΔQTc HIGH
*/**R-ON-T PVCs
**RR HIGH
**RR LOW
*/**RUN PVCs HIGH
**<SpO2 label> HIGH
**<SpO2 label> LOW
From
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
SpO
2
PRESS
SpO
2
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
RESP
RESP
ECG/
Arrhythmia
SpO
SpO
2
2
Condition Indication
The measured pressure value is above the high alarm limit. s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes, high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The measured pressure value is below the extreme low alarm limit. s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The measured pressure value is below the low alarm limit. s, d, or m after the label indicates whether the systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has crossed the limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The pulse rate has exceeded the high alarm limit.
The pulse rate has dropped below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
More premature ventricular contractions have been detected in a minute than the limit.
QTc value has exceeded the QTc high limit for more than 5 minutes
ΔQTc value has exceeded the ΔQTc high limit for more than 5 minutes numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
For HR <100, a PVC with R-R interval
< 1/3 the average interval followed by a compensatory pause of 1.25 x average
R-R interval or two such Vs without compensatory pause occurring within 5 minutes of each other. (When HR
>100, 1/3 R-R interval is too short for detection.).
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
The respiration rate has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The respiration rate has dropped below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
A run of PVCs greater than 2 was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
The arterial oxygen saturation has exceeded the high alarm limit.
The arterial oxygen saturation has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
48
Patient Alarm Messages
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Alarm Message
**ST<n> HIGH
**ST<n> LOW
**ST MULTI <n>,<n>
ECG/
Arrhythmia
**ST MULTI
at Information Center
**SvO2 HIGH
**SvO2 LOW
*/**SVT
**tcpO2 HIGH/
**tcpCO2 HIGH
**tcpO2 LOW/
**tcpCO2 LOW
**<Temperature label> HIGH
**<Temperature label> LOW
SvO
SvO
2
2
***TACHY (Pulse) or
***TACHY xxx>yyy
Press, SpO
2
**Tblood HIGH
**Tblood LOW
*/**/***TELE ALARM
From
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG/
Arrhythmia
C.O.
C.O.
tcGas tcGas
Telemetry
TEMP
TEMP
Condition Indication
The ST elevation in lead <n> is higher than the limit.
The ST depression or elevation is outside of the limit in two or more leads <n> and <n> numeric flashes and high alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The ST depression in lead <n> is lower than the limit.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone. numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone
(on monitor) numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone
The ST depression or elevation is outside of the limit in two or more leads. Check on the monitor for more details about which leads are affected.
The SvO
2 limit.
value has exceeded the high
The SvO low limit.
2
value has fallen below the numeric flashes and high alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes and low alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
A run of supraventricular beats greater than the SVT run limit has been detected and the HR has exceeded the
SVT HR limit.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The heart rate from the Pulse signal has exceeded the tachycardia limit. xxx denotes the highest measured value; yyy is the tachycardia limit.
numeric flashes, alarm limit is highlighted, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The blood temperature value has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes, high alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The blood temperature value has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes, low alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The tcpO exceeded the high alarm limit.
The tcpO
2
2
or tcpCO
or tcpCO
2
2
value has value has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes, high alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
numeric flashes, low alarm limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
This is a generic alarm from the telemetry system. The specific alarm cause is indicated in the alarm message in the Telemetry Data Window.
yellow or red alarm lamp and alarm tone
The temperature has exceeded the high alarm limit.
numeric flashes and high limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
The temperature has fallen below the low alarm limit.
numeric flashes and low limit is highlighted, yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone.
49
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Patient Alarm Messages
Alarm Message
*/**VENT BIGEMINY
***VENT FIB/TACH
*/**VENT RHYTHM
*/**VENT TRIGEMINY
ECG/
Arrhythmia
***VTACH
**/***VueLink ALARM
at Information Center
From
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG
ECG/
Arrhythmia
ECG,
Arrhythmia
VueLink
Condition Indication
A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V (N = supraventricular beat, V = ventricular beat) was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
A fibrillatory waveform for 4 consecutive seconds was detected.
numeric flashes, red alarm lamp, alarm tone.
A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs > vent rhythm limit and ventricular HR <
VTach HR limit was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N,
V (N = supraventricular beat, V = ventricular beat) was detected.
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
Ventricular tachycardia has been detected (Consecutive PVCs exceed V-
Tach Run limit and HR exceeds V-Tach
HR limit).
numeric flashes, yellow alarm lamp, short yellow audible alarm.
A yellow (**) or red (***) patient alarm is present on the VueLink module.
Check the monitor display for more detailed alarm information.
(on monitor) yellow or red alarm lamp, alarm tone
50
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection, the measurement numeric will be replaced by -?-. If an INOP may lead to unreliable measurement values, a ? appears next to the numeric.
INOP Message, Indication Source What to do
ABP
INOPS
ALL ECG ALARMS OFF
Ao INOPS
ART INOPS
AWF CHANGE SCALE
AWP CHANGE SCALE
AWV CHANGE SCALE
Bad Serverlink
INOP tone
BAP
INOPS
BATT EMPTY
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
PRESS
ECG/
Arrhythmia
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
All ECG alarms have been switched off, or the HR alarm source is not ECG. To resume ECG alarm generation, switch
ECG alarms on or select ECG as the alarms source.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
PRESS
PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Spirometry Airway flow signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust scale to display complete wave.
Spirometry Airway pressure signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust scale to display complete wave
Spirometry Airway volume signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust scale to display complete wave.
Monitor 1) An MMS with an incompatible software revision is connected to the monitor. This combination does not allow monitoring, OR
2) You cannot use this combination of monitor, MMS and cable. Switch off the monitor and contact your service personnel.
PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Battery The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time is less than 10 minutes. Replace the battery immediately.
Battery
If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
The battery cannot be used with this monitor. Replace with the correct battery
(M4607A)
.
BATT INCOMPAT
INOP tone
BATT LOW
INOP tone
BATT MALFUNCTION
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off unless the monitor is connected to mains power.
BATTERIES EMPTY
or BATT 1/
BATT 2 EMPTY
Batteries
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
BATTERIES INCOMP
or BATT
1/BATT 2 INCOMP
INOP tone
Battery
Battery
Batteries
The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less than 20 minutes.
The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP persists, replace the faulty battery. If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is reissued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
Place the battery in a different monitor or in a battery charger.
If the same INOP is shown, contact your service personnel.
The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time of the indicated battery or batteries is less than 10 minutes.
Replace the batteries immediately.
If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
The indicated battery or batteries cannot be used with this monitor. Replace with the correct battery or batteries as specified in this book.
51
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
BATTERIES LOW
or BATT 1/
BATT 2 LOW
INOP tone
BATTERIES MALF
or BATT 1/
BATT 2 MALFUNCTION
INOP tone, battery LED flashes
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off unless the monitor is connected to mains power.
BATTERY LOW T
Source
Batteries
Batteries The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP persists, replace the faulty battery or batteries. If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this
INOP is re-issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
Place the batteries in a different monitor or in a battery charger.
If the same INOP is shown, contact your service personnel.
Telemetry The battery in the Telemetry device is low and must be replaced soon.
Batteries The monitor requires two batteries but can detect only one battery. Insert the missing battery immediately.
BATT 1/BATT 2 MISSING
INOP tone.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
BIS CABLE INCOMPAT
INOP tone.
BIS
What to do
The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less than 20 minutes.
BIS CABLE USAGE
INOP tone.
BIS DSC DISCONN
INOP tone
BIS DSC INCOMPT
INOP tone
BIS DSC MALFUNC
BIS DSC UPDATE
INOP tone
BIS ELECTR. DISC
INOP tone.
BIS ENGINE DISCONN
INOP tone
BIS ENGINE INCOMPT
INOP tone
BIS ENGINE MALFUNC
INOP tone
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
The semi-reusable sensor cable connected is unknown or not supported by your software revision. Replace it with a Philipssupported sensor cable.
The semi-reusable sensor cable has exceeded the maximum number of uses. Replace the cable.
DSC is not properly connected OR either DSC or BIS engine may be faulty.
Make sure that the DSC is properly connected to the BIS
Engine. If INOP persists, replace DSC with a known good one of the same type.
If INOP persists replace BIS engine.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
DSC is not supported by the BIS engine or new DSC connected to an old BIS engine. A software upgrade may be required. Contact your service personnel.
Electrocautery used during self-test OR malfunction in the
DSC hardware.
Make sure not to use electrocautery during the self-test procedure. Disconnect and reconnect the DSC to the BIS engine. If the INOP persists, replace the DSC or contact your service personnel.
DSC update currently being carried out. This INOP will disappear when the DSC update is finished. Do not disconnect the DSC during the update. No action is needed.
One or more electrodes are not connected to the semi-reusable sensor cable. Check all electrode connections.
BIS engine not connected OR Module Cable defective.
Make sure that the Module Cable is properly connected. If
INOP persists, replace the Module Cable.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
BIS engine software is not supported. A software upgrade may be required. Contact your service personnel.
MP20/30 - BIS engine not supported.
Malfunction in the BIS engine hardware. Disconnect and reconnect the BIS engine. If the INOP persists, replace BIS engine.
52
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
BIS EQUIP MALF
INOP tone
BIS HIGH IMPEDANCE
INOP tone may sound
BIS IMPEDANCE CHCK
INOP tone may sound
BIS ISOELECTRC EEG
BIS LEAD OFF
INOP tone may sound
BIS OVERCURRENT
INOP tone
BIS SENSOR DISCONN
INOP tone
BIS SENSOR INCOMPT
INOP tone
BIS SENSOR MALFUNC
INOP tone
BIS SENSOR USAGE
INOP tone
Source
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
BIS
What to do
There is a malfunction in the BIS hardware. Unplug and replug the BIS module. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Impedance of one or more electrode(s) is above the valid range, most often caused by bad skin preparation. Check the sensor montage and press the electrode pads firmly. If this INOP persists, replace the sensor(s) in question using correct skin preparation.
If INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The Cyclic Impedance check is running. It will stop automatically if all impedances are within the valid range. If any electrodes do not pass the impedance test, check the sensor montage and press the electrode pads firmly.
To manually stop the Cyclic Impedance Check, select
Cyclic Check Off
in the
Setup BIS
menu.
No discernible EEG activity is detected for longer than one minute.
Check the patient. Check that the electrodes are properly connected.
One or more electrodes have no skin contact and therefore impedances cannot be measured. Check the sensor montage and press the electrode pads firmly.
If this INOP persists, replace the sensor(s) in question, using correct skin preparation.
Unplug and replug the BIS module or, f or the MP20/MP30, disconnect and reconnect the BISx from the Interface board. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The sensor is not properly connected to the patient interface cable (PIC) and/or the PIC is not properly connected to the
DSC or BISx, or the sensor or PIC or DSC or BISx may be faulty.
Check all the connections.
Disconnect and reconnect the sensor, PIC, DSC, BISx.
If the INOP persists, replace the sensor.
If the INOP persists, replace PIC. If INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
Unsupported sensor connected or sensor type unknown or not supported by your software revision. Replace the sensor, using only Philips supported sensors.
Malfunction in the sensor hardware, most often caused by liquids permeating into the connectors OR patient interface cable (PIC) or DSC or BISx may be faulty.
Replace the sensor. Manually initiate a Cyclic Impedance
Check. Make sure all electrodes pass the test. Make sure that the both sides of the PIC connector (between PIC and sensor) are dry. If you are not sure that the connector is dry, replace the
PIC until it has dried. If this INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Excessive sensor usage. Replace sensor.
A Cyclic Impedance Check will start automatically.
53
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
BIS SQI < 15%
(INOP tone)
OR
BIS SQI < 50%
(no INOP tone)
BIS UNPLUGGED
INOP tone
BISx DISCONNECTED
INOP tone
BISx INCOMPATIBLE
INOP tone
BISx MALFUNCTION
INOP tone
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG
CANNOT ANALYZE QT
CANNOT ANALYZE ST
CCI NO BSA
CCI numeric unavailable
INOP tone
CCO BAD PRESS SIGN
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
CCO NO <Pressure label>
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone may sound
Source
BIS
BIS
What to do
If the signal quality is below 50%, BIS numerics cannot be reliably derived.
If the signal quality is below 15%, no BIS numerics can be derived.
This may occur as a result of artifacts such as those generated from motion or the presence of electrocautery devices. Make sure the sensor is properly attached to the patient. Manually initiate a Cyclic Impedance Check. Make sure all electrodes pass the test. Make sure the patient is completely relaxed (even small motions of the facial muscles affect the signal quality).
Plug in the BIS module. Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
BIS
BIS
BIS
ECG/
Arrhythmia
QT
ST
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
The BISx is not connected to the BIS module or the BIS interface board. Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
The BISx software is not compatible with the BIS module or with the MP20/MP30 monitor software. A software upgrade may be required. Contact your service personnel.
The BISx is faulty. Disconnect and reconnect it to the module or BIS interface board. If the INOP persists, replace the BISx.
MP20/MP30 - Malfunction on interface board. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The arrhythmia algorithm cannot reliably analyze the ECG data. Check the ECG signal quality of the selected primary and secondary leads. If necessary, improve lead position or reduce patient motion.
If you have arrhythmia analysis on, and you are not getting a reliable HR because the signal is below a minimum amplitude, unstable, or contains artifact, and you have tried to improve the system performance by choosing another lead and changing electrodes, you should consider turning arrhythmia analysis off.
The QT algorithm cannot generate a valid QT value for more than 10 minutes, or 1 minute in the initial phase.
The ST algorithm cannot generate a valid ST value. Possible causes are large variations in the measured ST values for consecutive beats, or ventricular paced beats. Review the ECG signal quality and the ST measurement points.
If the patient has a ventricular pacemaker, ST analysis is not possible.
CCI cannot be calculated because the patient's body surface area is unknown. Enter the patient weight and height to provide the BSA for CCI calculation.
The arterial pressure wave can currently not be used for pulse contour calculation for CCO or CCI measurement. Possible causes are air bubbles in the tubing or a physiological condition, for example severe arrhythmia.
CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure chosen in the
Setup CCO
menu under
CCO From
matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for
CCO measurement. A VueLink pressure cannot be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART, BAP, FAP, or UAP.
54
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
CCO NO CALIBRATION
numeric is replaced by -?-
CCO NO PRESS
at Information Center
CCO NOT SUPPORTED
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Source
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
What to do
The CCO measurement is currently not calibrated.
CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure chosen in the
Setup CCO
menu under
CCO From
matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for
CCO measurement. A VueLink pressure cannot be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART, BAP, FAP, or UAP.
A catheter for transpulmonary C.O. measurements has been unplugged and replaced with a Right Heart C.O. catheter, or the measurement mode has been changed manually. Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
The measured CCO or CCI value is not within the specified range for CCO/CCI measurement.
CCO/CCI OVERRANGE
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
CCO <Pressure label>
INVALID
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone may sound
CCO PRESS INVALID
at Information Center
CCO PRESS OVERRANG
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
CCO PULSE OVERRANG
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
CCO/Tbl NO TRANSD
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
CCO RECALIBRATE
numeric is replaced by -?-
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
C.O.
The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for
CCO is available but currently invalid. Make sure the pressure transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for
CCO is available but currently invalid. Make sure the pressure transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
The mean value of the arterial pressure values used for pulse contour calculation for CCO is below 0 mmHg or above 300 mmHg.
The pulse rate of the pressure used for pulse contour calculation for CCO is below 30 bpm or above 240 bpm.
No transducer attached to the module or catheter disconnected.
Charge BATT1/BATT2 now
INOP tone
CHARGER MALFUNC
INOP tone, battery LED may flash
Check Alarm Lamps
INOP tone.
CHECK BATT TEMP
INOP tone
Check DrugSettings
INOP tone
Check ECG Settings
INOP tone
C.O.
Batteries
Batteries
Monitor
Battery
The most recent CCO or CCI calibration was made over 8 hours ago. You should recalibrate CCO or CCI with transpulmonary C.O. measurements at least every 8 hours or when the hemodynamic condition of the patient has changed.
Battery must be charged. Connect the monitor to mains power or exchange the battery.
There is a problem with the battery charger in the monitor.
Connect the monitor to mains power and contact your service personnel.
Perform a visual check of the alarm lamp to establish whether there is a problem. Contact your service personnel to check the internal connections to the alarm lamps.
The temperature of one or both batteries is too high. Check that ventilation openings (if applicable) are not blocked and monitor is not exposed to heat.
Monitor There was a problem loading the drug settings. Check that the settings are complete and correct.
Telemetry Synchronization of ECG settings between the monitor and
Information Center has failed. Check that the ECG settings in use are appropriate.
55
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
!!CHECK ECG SOURCE
INOP tone
Check Flex Texts
INOP tone
CheckInternVoltage
at Information Center
Check Keyboard
INOP tone
Check Main Board 2
INOP tone.
Check Monitor Func
INOP tone.
Check Monitor Temp
INOP tone
Check Mouse Device
INOP tone.
Check MSL Voltage
INOP tone
Check Network Conf
INOP tone
Check Nurse Relay
INOP tone
!!Check Pairing
INOP tone
Check Screen Res
INOP tone
Check Settings
INOP tone
Check SpeedPoint
INOP tone.
Check SpO
2
T Settings
INOP tone
Source
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
What to do
The telemetry device and the monitor both have valid ECG signals. Unpair the telemetry device and the monitor if they are no longer used for the same patient.
Check the names of the monitor menus, for example the labels for screens, profiles, event or trend group names, before you resume monitoring. If they are unexpected, there may be a problem with the monitor software. Contact your service personnel.
Potential problem with alarm lamps, display or interfaces detected. Contact your service personnel. This INOP will appear on the monitor as Check Monitor Func.
Perform a visual and functional check of the keyboard. Contact your service personnel.
Monitor
Monitor
There is a problem with the second main board in the monitor.
Contact your service personnel.
Potential problem with alarm lamps, display or interfaces detected. Contact your service personnel. This INOP may appear on the Information Center as
CheckInternVoltage
.
Monitor
Monitor
The temperature inside the monitor is too high. Check that the monitor ventilation is not obstructed. If the situation continues, contact your service personnel.
Perform a visual and functional check of the mouse input device. Contact your service personnel.
There is a problem with the voltage of the Measurement Link
(MSL). Contact your service personnel.
Monitor/
Multi-
Measuremt
Module
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
The monitor is receiving network topology information from more than one source, e.g. the Database Server and an
Application Server. Contact your service personnel.
There is a problem with the connection to the nurse relay.
Contact your service personnel.
There is a problem with device pairing. Check that the monitor and telemetry device are correctly paired.
Monitor The Screen you have selected uses a resolution which is not supported by the display. The monitor will show a generic
Screen instead until you select a different Screen.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted from the Profile(s) to avoid this in future.
Monitor If this INOP appears, check the monitor and patient settings before you resume monitoring. If the settings are unexpected, there may be a problem with the monitor software. Contact your service personnel.
Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of the SpeedPoint input device. Contact your service personnel.
Telemetry Synchronization of SpO
2
T settings between the monitor and
Information Center has failed. Check that the SpO
2 in use are appropriate.
T settings
56
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
Check Touch Input
INOP tone
Check Waves
INOP tone
CHK ECG Sync Cable
INOP tone
Chk IndepDsp Cable
C.O.
DEACTIVATED
INOP tone.
C.O. EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
Source
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
CHK MSL Connection
INOP tone
C LEAD OFF
HR Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds. INOP tone.
Monitor
ECG
CO
2
AUTO ZERO
Numeric is replaced by a - ? if the Autozero lasts >15 sec, INOP tone sounds.
CO
2
CAL MODE
CO
2
numeric displays current CO value for accuracy check
2
CO
2
CAL RUNNING
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
CO
2
CHANGE SCALE
CO
2
CO
2
CO
CO
2
2
CO
2
CO
2
CHECK ADAPTER
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
CHECK CAL
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
DEACTIVATED
INOP tone.
CO
CO
2
2
C.O.
C.O.
What to do
Perform a visual and functional check of the touch input device. Contact your service personnel.
The options purchased with this monitor may not support the number of waves required to show the selected Screen, so some waves or high resolution trends are missing from the Screen.
Select a different Screen with fewer waves.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted from the Profile(s) to avoid this in future.
The ECG Sync is detecting an invalid signal, or the ECG Sync cable is disconnected.
The monitor cannot communicate with the D80 Intelligent
Display. Check the MSL coupling cable. The end with the grey connector must be connected to the Intelligent Display.
Check that the MSL connector or cable are properly connected. Check the cable and connector for damage.
The C electrode (AAMI: V electrode) has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
The automatic zero calibration is in progress. This typically takes 10 seconds. During this time the CO
2
values may not be updated, or they may be replaced by -?-. Wait until the zero calibration is complete to resume monitoring.
Currently no calibration is running. Accuracy can be checked by placing the transducer on the two cells of the calstick and starting calibration. To start monitoring, leave Cal. Mode.
Wait until calibration is finished.
The CO
2
wave is clipped. Select a more appropriate wave scale to display the whole wave.
Check that the sensor is connected to the airway adapter, clean the airway adapter, if necessary. Perform a zero calibration. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The CO
2
value is outside the measurement range. Perform an accuracy check for both calstick cells and, if necessary, recalibrate the transducer.
The CO
2
measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection window.
The Cardiac Output measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
There is a problem with the C.O. hardware. Contact your service personnel.
57
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
CO
2
EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
FAILED CAL
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
CO
2
NO SENSOR
Numeric is replaced by - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
NO TRANSDUC
Numeric is replaced by - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
NO TUBING
Numeric is replaced by - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
OCCLUSION
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
OVERRANGE
Numeric is replaced by - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
PUMP OFF
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -.
CO
2
PURGING
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
SENSOR WARMUP
Numeric is displayed with a - ? -
Microstream CO
2
Mainstream CO
2
: INOP tone.
: no INOP tone
C.O. UNPLUGGED
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
CO
2
UPDATE FW
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
WAIT CAL2
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
CO
2
ZERO FAILED
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone.
CO
2
ZERO REQUIRED
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
INOP tone
C.O.
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
Source
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
CO
2
What to do
The Measurement Extension is faulty. Unplug and replug the
Multi-Measurement Module with Extension. If you are using the mainstream method, unplug and replug the transducer or try another transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Make sure that the Cal cell was changed between CAL1 and
CAL2. Repeat the calibration. If the INOP reappears, try another transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
There is no CO
2 the CO
2 sensor connected. If you silence this INOP
measurement will be switched off.
There is no CO
2
transducer connected. If you replace the transducer, the new transducer must be calibrated. If you silence this INOP the CO
2
measurement will be switched off.
Either the sample line is disconnected, or an incorrect line is attached. Check the connection. If necessary, connect another sample line (Use only the approved accessories).
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
The sample line or exhaust tube is blocked. Check the tubing, then disconnect and reconnect the sample line. If the INOP persists, connect a new sample line.
The CO
2
value is higher than the measurement range. If you suspect a false high value, contact your service personnel.
The pump has been switched off for fifteen minutes. To switch it on again, select Pump On in the Setup CO
2
menu.
The Filterline is being purged to remove an occlusion in the line or airway adapter. If the occlusion is removed, the INOP will disappear. If not, the INOP
CO2 OCCLUSION
is displayed.
Wait until the sensor reaches operating temperature and the
INOP disappears.
Plug in the C.O. module. Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
The software in the Measurement Extension does not match the software in the MMS. Contact your service personnel.
Calibration on the first calstick cell is complete. Place the transducer on the other calstick cell and start the CAL2 calibration cycle.
An error occurred during the last zero calibration. Check the airway adapter and clean, if necessary. Perform another zero calibration. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Perform zero calibration for the CO
2
sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
58
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
CO
2
ZERO RUNNING
CPP CHK SOURCES
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
CPP CHK UNITS
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
!!/!!!CUFF NOT DEFLATED
Numeric is displayed with a - ? -
Severe yellow/red INOP tone.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
Source
CO
2
CPP
CPP
NBP
CVP
INOPS
ECG EQUIP MALF
Numeric is displayed with a - ? -
INOP tone.
ECG EQUIP MALF T
Numeric is displayed with a - ? -
INOP tone.
<ECG LEAD> LEAD OFF
Numeric is displayed with a - ? -
INOP tone.
PRESS
ECG
Monitor
ECG
ECG EL. NOISY <ECG LEAD>
ECG
ECG NOISY SIGN.
INOP tone.
EcgOut EQUIP MALF
INOP tone
EEG EQUIP MALFUNC
INOP tone
EEG IMPEDANCE HIGH
or
EEG1
and/or EEG2 IMPED.
HIGH
ECG
ECG
EEG
EEG
What to do
Wait until zero calibration is finished.
Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check the measurement sources.
The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
Remove the cuff from the patient. Make sure that the tubing is not kinked or twisted and that the correct patient category is selected. Try repeating the measurement.
You can silence the INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next NBP measurement is started or the Stop
All
SmartKey is selected.
[Adult or pediatric patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded
15mmHg (2kPa) for more than 3 minutes.
Neonatal patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 5mmHg
(0.7kPa) for more than 90 seconds.]
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Contact your service personnel.
The ECG hardware is faulty.
Contact your service personnel.
The ECG in the Telemetry device is faulty.
Not all the required leads for ECG monitoring are connected.
Check the ECG connections and make sure that the electrode indicated by <ECG lead> [RA, LA, LL, RL, V or C] electrodes is attached. In EASI mode, all 5 electrodes must be connected.
The ECG signal from the named ECG electrodes [RA, LA, LL,
RL, V (or C)] is noisy. Check the ECG connections and make sure that the electrode indicated is attached.
The ECG signal is too noisy. Check that the electrodes are properly placed and have not dried out. Remove any possible sources of signal noise (such as power cords) from the area around the cable and the patient.
The ECG signal may be saturated or overloaded.
Check that the ECG out cable is securely connected. Contact your service personnel.
The EEG hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
EEG<X> LEAD OFF <n>
[X = channel, n = electrode]
EEG<X> LEAD OFF
[X = channel] at Information Center
EEG
EEG
The signal electrode in one or both channels exceeds the userselected impedance limit, or the impedance of a single electrode exceeds the limit. Check the impedance. If the impedance is too high, reconnect the electrodes according to the EEG monitoring setup guidelines.If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Reconnect specified electrode.
One or more electrodes are not connected. Check in the EEG
Impedance/Montage
window on the monitor which electrode(s) are affected and reconnect the electrodes.
59
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
EEG<X> LEADS OFF
[X = channel]
EEG LINE NOISE
EEG 1
or 2 LINE NOISE
EEG MUSCLE NOISE
EEG 1
or 2 MUSCLE NOISE
EEG NO TRANSDUCER
INOP tone
EEG UNPLUGGED
INOP tone
EEG OVERRANGE
, or
EEG<X> OVERRANGE
FAP
INOPS
FMS UNPLUGGED
INOP tone.
FMS UNSUPPORTED
INOP tone.
IC1
/IC2 INOPS
ICP
INOPs
Indep.Dsp Malfunc.
Indep.Dsp NotSupp.
Source
EEG
EEG
EEG
EEG
EEG
EEG
PRESS
FMS
FMS
PRESS
PRESS
Display
Display
!!INSERT BATTERY
Severe yellow INOP tone.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
Intell.Dsp Malf.
INOP tone
Intell.Dsp Missing
Battery
Display
Display
Intell.Dsp Unsupp.
Display
Monitor
Internal.Comm.Malf
INOP tone
INVALID LEADSET
Telemetry
What to do
Two or more electrodes are not connected. Check in the EEG
Impedance/Montage
window which electrodes are affected and reconnect the electrodes.
Excessive line noise has been detected in either channel EEG1 or EEG2, or in both EEG channels.
Keep all cables together and away from metallic bodies, other cables & radiated fields.
Too much power above 30 Hz has been detected in channel
EEG1 or EEG2, or both.
Check the Electrode-to-Skin Impedance and reposition the electrode away from possible muscle activity, if necessary.
The trunk cable is disconnected from the EEG plug-in module.
Reconnect the trunk cable.Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
Plug in module. Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
Input signal is too high in one or both channels. This is usually caused by interfering signals such as line noise or electrosurgery. X denotes the EEG channel.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Make sure that the Flexible Module Rack is connected to the monitor. All FMS measurements are off while the FMS is unplugged.
The Flexible Module Rack is not supported by your monitor.
Contact your service personnel.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
A problem has occurred with the second main display. Contact your service personnel.
The monitor does not support a second main display. The monitor software is incompatible. Contact your service personnel.
X2/MP2 only: There is no battery in the battery compartment.
You cannot operate the monitor on AC mains while the battery compartment is open (not sealed with a battery). Load a battery immediately.
There is a problem with the Intelligent Display. Check the
MSL coupling cable then contact your service personnel.
The monitor has lost contact with the connected Intelligent
Display. Contact your service personnel.
The monitor does not support the connected Intelligent
Display. The monitor software is incompatible.
There is a problem with I2C Bus communication in the monitor. Contact your service personnel.
60
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
LA LEAD OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds; INOP tone.
LAP
INOPs
LEADSET UNPLUGGED
LEADS OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds; INOP tone.
LL LEAD OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds; INOP tone.
MCC Reversed
INOP tone
MCC Unsupported
INOP tone
Meas. DEACTIVATED
Measserv Unsupportd
INOP tone
MMS Ext. EQUIP MALF
INOP tone
MMS Ext. UNPLUGGED
INOP tone
MMS Ext. Unpowered
INOP tone
MMS Ext. Unsupported
INOP tone
MMS UNPLUGGED
INOP tone.
MMS UNSUPPORTED
INOP tone.
!!/!!!MORE BED ALARMS
At Information Center
MSL Power High
MSL Power Off
INOP tone.
Source What to do
ECG The LA electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New
Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
PRESS
Telemetry The leadset has been unplugged from the telemetry device.
ECG Check that all of the required ECG leads are attached, and that none of the electrodes have been displaced.
ECG
Monitor
Monitor
MMS
MMS
Extension
MMS
Extension
MMS
Extension
MMS
Extension
MMS
MMS
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
The LL electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New
Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
The MSL coupling cable is reversed. Connect the end with the grey connector to the Intelligent Display.
An MSL coupling cable has been connected to a device which does not support MSL coupling.
An X2 or MP5 has been connected to a host monitor
(companion mode) and all derived measurements have been deactivated and/or measurements with a label conflict. The measurements can only be reactivated by disconnecting the measurement device from the host monitor.
The Multi-Measurement module is not supported by the monitor. Contact your service personnel.
Loss of communication between the Multi-Measurement
Module and the MMS extension. Contact your service personnel.
The MMS extension has been disconnected from the Multi-
Measurement Module.
The MMS extension cannot operate while the Multi-
Measurement Module is running on battery power.
The MMS extensions not supported by your monitor. Contact your service personnel.
Make sure that the Multi-Measurement Module is connected to the monitor. All MMS measurements are off while the MMS is unplugged.
The Multi-measurement Module is not supported by your monitor. Contact your service personnel.
The monitor is associated with a telemetry device and is sending data to the Information Center via the telemetry device. There are currently more alarms at the bedside than can be transmitted to the Information Center.
The power consumption of the devices connected to the
Measurement Link (MSL) cable is too high. If this situation continues, the MSL will be switched off. Contact your service personnel.
The power consumption of the devices connected to the
Measurement Link (MSL) cable was too high for too long and the MSL has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
61
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
MSL Power Overload
INOP tone.
!!/!!!NBP CUFF OVERPRESS
Numeric displayed with -?- ;
Severe yellow/red INOP tone.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
NBP Deactivated
INOP tone.
NBP EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
NBP INTERRUPTED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
NBP MEASURE FAILED
Numeric may be displayed with a -?-
INOP tone.
No Central Monit.
INOP tone
NO ECG SOURCE
NO PPV FROM MeasSrv
at Information Center
NO PPV FROM <Device>
Source What to do
Monitor
NBP
NBP
The power consumption of the devices connected to the
Measurement Link (MSL) cable is much too high or there has been a short circuit. The MSL has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
The NBP cuff pressure exceeds the overpressure safety limits.
Remove the cuff from the patient. Make sure that the tubing is not kinked or twisted and that the correct patient category is selected. Try restarting the measurement.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop All
SmartKey is selected.
The NBP measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection window.
NBP
NBP
NBP
Monitor
Remove the cuff from the patient. The NBP hardware is faulty.
Contact your service personnel.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop All
SmartKey is selected.
Check the tubing and cuff for leakages or kinks. Check that you are using the correct cuff size and placement, and that the correct patient category is selected. Try restarting the measurement.
If the INOP occurs repeatedly, contact your service personnel.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop All
SmartKey is selected.
This INOP arises when the measurement needed longer than the maximum time for inflation, deflation or the total measurement.
Check that you are using the correct cuff size and placement, and that the correct patient category is selected. Try restarting the measurement.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop All
SmartKey is selected.
Check the condition and suitability of the patient for NBP monitoring. Use another cuff to continue measuring.
There is a problem with the communication to the network.
Central monitoring is currently not possible (no patient alarms or information). Check the connection. Contact your service personnel.
Telemetry A telemetry device is paired with the monitor but the
Information Center is not detecting a valid ECG signal from either of them.
MMS or
FMS
MMS or
FMS
The measurement device does not supply a beat-to-beat arterial pressure value. Contact your service personnel.
The measurement device does not supply a beat-to-beat arterial pressure value. Contact your service personnel.
62
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication Source What to do
No Tele Sett Sync
INOP tone
OUT OF AREA
P
/P1/P2/P3/P4 INOPS
PAP
INOPS
PPV BAD SIGNAL
at Information Center
Telemetry The MMS in use does not support synchronization of ECG and SpO
2
settings between the monitor and central station after a telemetry device has been paired. Use an MMS with revision E.0 or above.
Telemetry The telemetry device has left the access point coverage area.
PRESS
PRESS
PPV BAD <Pressure Label>
SIGNAL
PPV
PPV
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a pulsatile signal.
The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a pulsatile signal.
PPV CHK SOURCES
PPV
<Pressure label> ARTIFACT
Numeric questionable
<Pressure label>
DEACTIVATED
INOP tone
<Pressure label> EQUIP
MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is unplugged or switched off. When this INOP has displayed for 1 minute PPV will be switched off.
A non-physiological event is detected (for example, a flush or blood sample). A resulting high limit alarm will be suppressed.
A Pressure measurement label in the measurement device or extension has been deactivated, either by connecting a Temp transducer in the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a
Pressure transducer or reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
Contact your service personnel.
The pressure hardware is faulty.
<Pressure label> NO
TRANSDUCER
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
PRESS Make sure that the pressure transducer is connected to the measurement device or module.
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
<Pressure label> NOISY
SIGNAL
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Pressure label> NON-
PULSATILE
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Pressure label>
OVERRANGE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Pressure label> REDUCE
SIZE
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the pulse source. It occurs when the pulse detector finds a pulse rate above 350bpm. This is usually caused by movement artifact or electrical interference.
This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the pulse source. It occurs when the pulse rate being measured is less than 25 beats per minute or the amplitude is less than three mmHg.
Check the catheter and connections to the patient.
Make sure that the measurement has been properly prepared and zeroed, and that the transducer is level with the heart. If this INOP persists, try another transducer.
Possible causes are a measured pressure outside the allowed pressure range, or a broken wire to the transducer.
Increase the scale for the pressure wave.
63
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
<Pressure label>
UNPLUGGED
INOP tone.
Source
PRESS
What to do
A Pressure measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
Perform a zero and check the calibration of the transducer.
<Pressure label>
ZERO+CHECK CAL
Numeric is replaced by -?-
PRESS
<pTemp label> CHECK PROBE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
Predictive
Temp
Check that the probe holder is correctly installed and that a compatible probe is in use. If the INOP does not clear, remove the probe from the holder then replace it. If the INOP still does not clear, disconnect and reconnect the probe.
The Predictive temperature has been deactivated.
<pTemp label> DEACTIVATED
INOP tone.
<pTemp label> EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
<pTemp label> INCOMPAT.
Predictive
Temp
<pTemp label> MEAS FAILED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
Predictive
Temp
The Predictive Temperature hardware is defective. Contact your service personnel.
The Predictive Temperature version is not supported by the monitor.
The ambient temperature is outside the specified range (10 to
40 °C /50 to 104 °F). Bring the temperature into range to continue monitoring. If the INOP does not clear, disconnect and reconnect the probe.
Connect a probe to the Predictive temperature unit.
<pTemp label> NO PROBE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<pTemp label> OVERRANGE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<pTemp label> PROBE MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
pTaxil INOPS pToral INOPS pTrect INOPS
(!!)PW:Action Required
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
Predictive
Temp
Protocol
Watch
The temperature at the measurement site is out of range. Check that the probe is correctly located. If the INOP does not clear, disconnect and reconnect the probe.
The connected probe may be defective. Disconnect and reconnect the probe. If the INOP does not clear, try another probe.
See <pTemp label> INOPS
See <pTemp label> INOPS
See <pTemp label> INOPS
PW:Check Settings
PW in conflict
Protocol
Watch
Protocol
Watch
The protocol currently running requires a user response. Check which pop-up window is displayed and provide the appropriate response.
Contact your service personnel. Settings could not be loaded or interpreted correctly
There is a patient information mismatch which has not yet been resolved (>15 minutes).
64
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
RA LEAD OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
RAP INOPS
Rem.Alarmdev.Malf
INOP tone
!!/!!! REPLACE BATTERY T
Severe yellow/red INOP tone.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be paused or switched off.
RESP EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
RESP ERRATIC
Numeric is replaced by -?-
RESP
RESP
RESP LEADS OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
RL LEAD OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds; INOP tone.
Source What to do
ECG The RA electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New
Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
PRESS
Monitor There is a problem with the connection to the remote alert device. Contact your service personnel to check the remote alert device and its connections.
Telemetry The battery in the telemetry device is almost empty and must be replaced.
RESP
Contact your service personnel. The RESP hardware is faulty.
The monitor has detected too many artifacts in the measured
Resp signal. Check that the RA and LL electrodes are correctly attached and have not dried out.
Not all the required leads for Resp monitoring are attached.
Make sure that the RA and LL leads are attached.
Settings Malfunc.
INOP tone.
SOME ECG ALARMS OFF
Speaker Malfunct.
INOP tone
SPIRO MALFUNCTION
SPIRO INCOMPATIBLE
SPIRO UPGRADE
SPIRO CANNOT MEAS
SPIRO PURGE FAILED
SPIRO UNKN. SENSOR
SPIRO ALARMS SUPPR
SPIRO PURGING
SPIRO NO SENSOR
ECG The RL electrode has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New
Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
Monitor The monitor cannot use the predefined settings for monitoring. Contact your service personnel.
Arrhythmia This message appears (if configured to do so) when the on/off settings of the yellow arrhythmia alarms differ from the current
Profile.
Monitor Contact your service personnel to check the speaker and the connection to the speaker.
Spirometry Module failure detected. Contact your service personnel.
Spirometry Module revision not compatible with the host monitor software revision. Contact your service personnel.
Spirometry The module is running a firmware upgrade. Wait until upgrade is completed before resuming monitoring.
Spirometry Measurement is at its limit, e.g. ambient pressure out of range.
Spirometry The purge operation could not be completed successfully.
Check for kinked sensor tubings, hard occlusions and make sure that the pump is running and all valves are switching.
Spirometry An unknown sensor ID code was detected. Use only the sensors listed in the Accessories chapter.
Spirometry Alarming is suppressed for the spirometry module.
Spirometry A purge operation is in progress - no data update on the screen.
Wait until purge is complete.
Spirometry No sensor detected. Make sure the correct sensor is attached to the breathing circuit.
65
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication Source What to do
SPIRO NO BREATH
SPIRO GAS COMPENS?
SPIRO PATIENT CAT.
Δ
SpO
<SpO
2
2
CHK SOURCES
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Δ
SpO
2
CHK UNITS
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
<SpO
2
label> EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<SpO
2
label> ERRATIC
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
SpO
2
<SpO
2
label> EXTD. UPDATE
Label is displayed with a -?-
(questionable numeric)
SpO
2
<SpO
2
label> INTERFERNCE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
SpO
2
<SpO
2
label> DEACTIVATED
Label is displayed with a -?-
(questionable numeric)
<SpO
2
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<SpO
2
label> NON-PULSAT.
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<SpO
2
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<SpO
2
label> LOW PERF
label> NOISY SIGN.
label> NO SENSOR
LABEL> POOR SIGNAL
Label is displayed with a - ? -
(questionable numeric)
Spirometry No breath was detected for more than 25 seconds. Breath derived numerics are not available.
Spirometry Gas compensation is set to “gas analyzer” but not all gases necessary for compensation are measured by a gas monitor.
Some of the fall-back values provided by the user are used.
Measurement accuracy might be reduced.
Spirometry Mismatch of patient size configured in the host monitor and sensor type plugged into the module. Check the instructions on selecting the correct sensor in the Spirometry chapter.
SpO
2
Difference
SpO
2
Difference
SpO
2
Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
SpO
2
The SpO
2
measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears from the display. To switch the measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection window.
The MMS is faulty. Unplug and replug the MMS. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
SpO
SpO
SpO
SpO
SpO
2
2
2
2
2
Check the sensor placement. Try another adapter cable and sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The update period of displayed values is extended due to an
NBP measurement on the same limb or an excessively noisy signal.
There is too much interference, caused by a high level of ambient light and/or electrical interference. Cover the sensor to minimize ambient light. If the INOP persists, make sure that the sensor cable is not damaged or positioned too close to power cables.
Accuracy may be compromised due to very low perfusion.
Stimulate circulation at sensor site. If INOP persists, change the measurement site.
Excessive patient movement or electrical interference is causing irregular pulse patterns. Try to reduce patient movement or to relieve the cable strain on the sensor.
Check the perfusion at measurement site. If necessary, stimulate circulation or change measurement site. If the INOP is due to NBP measurement on the same limb, wait until the
NBP measurement is finished.
Make sure the SpO
2
sensor is connected. If the INOP persists, try another adapter cable and sensor. If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
The signal condition of the SpO
2
measurement is poor and measurement accuracy may be compromised.
66
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
SvO
2
CAL REQUIRED
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone may sound
SvO
2
CONFIGURATION
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
SvO
2
CONNCT OPTMOD
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
SvO
2
EQUIP MALF
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
Source
<SpO
2
LABEL> PULSE?
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
SpO
2
<SpO
2
LABEL> SEARCHING
Numeric unavailable
<SpO
2
LABEL> UNKN.SENSOR
Numeric is replaced by a - ? -
SpO
2
<SpO
2
label> SENSOR MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
SpO
2
SpO
2
<SpO
2
LABEL> SENSOR OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
SpO
2
SpO
2
<SpO
2
LABEL> UNPLUGGED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
SvO
SvO
SvO
2
2
2
What to do
The detectable pulsations of the SpO
2 specified pulse rate range.
signal are outside the
SpO
2
is analyzing the patient signal to derive Pulse, SpO
2
and
Perf values. Please wait until the search analysis is complete.
The SpO
2
sensor or adapter cable is faulty. Try another adapter cable and sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
The SpO
2
sensor is not properly applied to the patient. Apply the sensor following the instructions supplied by the manufacturer.
The connected sensor or adapter cable is not supported by the
SpO
2
measurement. Use only specified sensors and cables.
An SpO
2
measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
The SpO
2
measurement is currently in UPGRADE mode.
Monitoring is not possible in this mode.
<SpO
2
LABEL> UPGRADE
Label is displayed with a -?-, numeric is unavailable
SpO
2
Sp - vO
2
CHK SOURCES
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Sp - vO
2
Sp - vO
2
CHK UNITS
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Sp - vO
2
SvO
2
CAL FAILED
SvO
2
numeric is displayed with ?
SvO
2
SvO
SvO
2
2
CAL MODE
numeric is replaced by -?-
SvO
SvO
2
2
Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
The calibration failed. Check the catheter-to-Optical-Module connection. Manually restart the calibration. Try another catheter and Optical Module. If the catheter is already inserted, perform an in-vivo calibration.
Pre-insertion calibration is complete, but the catheter tip is still inside the optical reference. The catheter is now ready for insertion.
There is no valid calibration data in the Optical Module.
Perform either a pre-insertion or an in-vivo calibration.
The Optical Module has been configured to SaO
2
Change to SvO2
in the
Setup SvO2
menu to reconfigure to SvO
2
Mode.
Mode. Use
The Optical Module was disconnected during data storage.
Reconnect the Optical Module for at least 20 seconds.
The SvO
2
Module or Optical Module is faulty. Unplug and replug the Optical Module and SvO
2
module. Exchange the modules. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
67
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
SvO
2
IN-VIVO CALIB
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
SvO
2
LIGHT INTENS
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?- or numeric is displayed with ?
INOP tone with -?- display
SvO
2
LOW LIGHT
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?- or numeric is displayed with ?
INOP tone may sound
SvO
2
NO OPTMOD
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
SvO
2
OPTMOD DEFECT
SvO
2
OPTMOD WARMUP
SvO
2
numeric is displayed with ?
SvO
2
PRE-INS CALIB
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
SvO
2
UNABL TO MEAS
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
SvO
2
UNPLUGGED
SvO
2
numeric is replaced by -?-.
INOP tone
SVR/SVRI CHK SOURCES
Numeric is replaced by -?-
SVR/SVRI CHK UNITS
Numeric is replaced by -?-
SVR/SVRI SET CVP USED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
T
/T1/T2/T3/T4 INOPs
Tamb
INOPs
Tart
INOPs
Tblood NO TRANSDUC
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone
Tblood OVERRANGE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Tcereb
INOPS
Tcore
INOPs
Source What to do
SvO
SvO
SvO
SvO
SvO
SvO
SvO
SvO
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The in-vivo calibration is not yet complete. Lab values must be stored to the Optical Module to complete the calibration.
Either continue with the next steps of the current calibration or recall the previous calibration.
The intensity changed considerably since the last light intensity calibration. This may indicate that the catheter tip is positioned against a blood vessel wall or that there is low blood flow.
Reposition the catheter and perform a light intensity calibration.
The optical signal levels are too low. Check that the catheter is either in the optical reference or inserted into the patient.
Check the catheter-to-Optical Module connection. If INOP persists, try another catheter and Optical Module.
Connect the Optical Module. If the INOP persists, try another
Optical Module. Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
The Optical Module memory is faulty, and calibration data cannot be stored for transport or during power failure. If this feature is needed, use another Optical Module.
The Optical Module has not yet reached the operating temperature. Wait a few minutes until warm-up is finished.
The pre-insertion calibration is running. This typically takes one minute. During this time SvO
2
alarms are switched off.
Wait until the calibration is complete.
The signal is out of the normal range, and no SvO
2
value can be derived. Perform an in-vivo calibration. If the INOP persists, try another Optical Module and catheter.
SvO
2
Measurement switched on and SvO
2 the rack.
module unplugged from
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
SVR/SVRI Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
SVR/SVRI The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
SVR/SVRI A CVP value is required for this calculation, but is not currently being measured. The monitor is using the CVP value preset in the
Setup SVR
menu.
TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
TEMP
TEMP
C.O.
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
No transducer attached to the module or catheter disconnected.
C.O.
TEMP
TEMP
Tblood out of range 17°C - 43°C.
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
68
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication Source tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
CAL FAILED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcGas
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
CAL REQUIRD
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcGas
What to do
A calibration failed. Check the cal. unit, gas pressure, and tubing connections, then restart the cal. If the cal. has failed more than once, remembrane the transducer and restart the calibration. If this INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
Calibration is required before applying the transducer to the patient.
Insert a membraned transducer into the cal. chamber on the module, connect the cal. unit to the cal. chamber, open the gas valve and start the calibration. If this INOP occurs during a calibration, there may be a module or transducer malfunction: contact your service personnel.
Wait until the tcpO
2
/tcpCO
2
calibration is finished.
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
CAL RUNNING
Numeric displays first -?- , then numeric is displayed with a ?
tcGas
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
CHECK TIME
tcGas Site Timer due to time out in 15 minutes or less.
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
CHANGE SITE
If Heat Switch Off is configured to Yes, numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone. tcGas
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcGas
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
NO TRANSDUC
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcGas
Site Timer has timed out. Change the application site to avoid skin burns. To reset the Site Timer, either calibrate and change the measurement site, or change the measurement site and reset the Site Timer manually by selecting the appropriate site time from the
Setup TCGas
menu.
There is a malfunction in the transducer or module. Connect another transducer. If this INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
No transducer is connected to the tcpO
2
/tcpCO
2
module.
Silencing the alarm switches off the measurement.
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
STABILIZING
Numeric is displayed with a ?
tcGas
tcpO
2
(or tcpCO
2 or tcGas)
UNPLUGGED
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcGas
TELE CONFIG UNSUPP
INOP tone
Monitor
TELE DISCONNECTED
INOP tone
TELE EQUIP MALF
INOP tone
The transducer has not yet reached the selected temperature and/or skin hyperemization is not yet finished. This INOP will disappear within three minutes.
The measurement is switched on but the module is unplugged.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
Telemetry device not supported (companion mode)
Telemetry The cable between the telemetry device and the monitor is disconnected
Monitor The telemetry device has a malfunction. Disconnect and reconnect the telemetry device. If the INOP reappears, replace the telemetry device.
!!/!!! TELE INOP
Severe yellow/red INOP tone.
Telemetry Check for further details at the Information Center or in the
Telemetry Data window on the monitor.
TELE UNSUPPORTED
INOP tone
<
Δ
Temp> CHK SOURCES
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Monitor
TEMP
Difference
This telemetry device is not supported for direct connection to the monitor.
Not all measurements or values required to perform the calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
69
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
INOP Message, Indication
<
Δ
Temp> CHK UNITS
Numeric is replaced by -?-
<Temp label> DEACTIVATED
INOP tone
Source
TEMP
Difference
TEMP
TEMP
What to do
The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this calculation. Check the unit settings.
A Temp measurement label in the measurement device has been deactivated, either by connecting a Pressure transducer in the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a Temp transducer or reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
Contact your service personnel.
The temperature hardware is faulty.
<Temp label> EQUIP MALF
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Temp label> NO
TRANSDUCER
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Temp label> UNPLUGGED
INOP tone
TEMP
TEMP
Make sure the TEMP probe is connected to the MMS or module.
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
TEMP
A Temp measurement label has been deactivated, either by unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
Try changing the application site of the transducer.
[The temperature is less than -1
°
C, or greater than 45
°
C.]
<Temp label> OVERRANGE
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
Tesoph
INOPS
TimeExpired:<
timer label>
INOP tone
Tnaso
INOPS
Trect
INOPS
Tskin
INOPS
Ttymp
INOPS
Tven
INOPS
Tvesic
INOPS
UAP
INOPS
Unsupported LAN
INOP tone
User I/F Malfunct
.
INOP tone.
UVP
INOPS
V LEAD OFF
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 seconds; INOP tone.
TEMP
Monitor
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
TEMP
PRESS
Monitor
Monitor
PRESS
ECG
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
The time has expired for the timer indicated in the INOP text.
Clearing the timer clears the INOP.
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
There is a problem with the communication to the network and central monitoring is currently not possible. Check the connection.If the INOP persists, switch off the monitor and contact your service personnel.
Perform a visual and functional check of all the monitor input devices. Contact your service personnel.
See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
The V electrode (IEC: C electrode) has become detached from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select
New Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
70
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
INOP Message, Indication
<VueLink option> CHK
CABLE
INOP tone.
<VueLink option> CHK
CONF.
INOP tone.
VueLnk NO CONFIG
INOP tone.
VueLnk UNPLUGGED
INOP tone.
Source
VueLink
VueLink
<VueLink option> CHECK
SETUP
INOP tone.
VueLink
VueLnk EQUIP MALF
INOP tone.
VueLink
VueLink
VueLink
What to do
No cable or the wrong cable connected to the VueLink module, or incorrect device selected. Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
The wrong external device has been selected on the VueLink module, or the external device has not been correctly setup, or the wrong cable has been used to connect the device to the
VueLink module.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
No information was received from the external device. The device may be switched off or disconnected.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
Malfunction in the VueLink module. If this message appears repeatedly, the module must be replaced. Contact your service personnel.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
The VueLink module has not been configured during installation. The installation process should be completed by either your biomedical engineering department or the Philips service engineer.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
The VueLink module has been unplugged from the rack, or the whole rack has been disconnected. The measurement automatically disappears from the display. Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on the device category.
71
4 Patient Alarms and INOPs
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)
72
5
5
Managing Patients
Use the Patient Demographics window and its associated pop-up keys to admit, discharge, and transfer
(ADT) patients.
All patient demographic and ADT information is shared between the patient monitor and the
Information Center, for example, patients admitted to the monitor are automatically admitted to a connected Information Center.
Admitting a Patient
The monitor displays physiological data and stores it in the trends as soon as a patient is connected.
This lets you monitor a patient who is not yet admitted. It is however important to admit patients properly so that you can identify your patient on recordings, reports, and networked devices.
During admission you enter data that the monitor needs for safe and accurate operation. For example, the patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.
To admit a patient,
1
Select the patient name field or select the
Patient Demographics
window.
Admit/Dischrge
SmartKey to open the
SBed10 Adult
Doe, John
Patient Demographics
Last Name : Doe
First Name : John
MRN : 12345678
Patient
Cat.
Admit
Patient
: Adult
Transfer
Discharge
Patient
End
Case
73
5 Managing Patients
Admitting a Patient
2
Clear any previous patient data by selecting the
Dischrge Patient
or
End Case
pop-up key and then
Confirm
.
If you do not discharge the previous patient, you will not be able to distinguish data from the previous and current patients, for example, in the trend database.
Select Admit Patient.
3
4
Enter the patient information: select each field and use the on-screen keyboard or choose from the pop-up list of alternatives to input information.
–
Last name
: Enter the patient’s last name (family name), for example
Smith.
–
First name
: Enter the patient’s first name, for example
Joseph.
–
MRN
: Enter the patient’s medical record number (MRN), for example
12345678.
–
Patient Cat
: Choose the patient category, either Adult, Pediatric, or Neonatal.
–
Paced
: Choose Yes or No (You must use “Yes” if your patient has a pacemaker).
–
Height
: Enter the patient’s height.
–
Weight
: Enter the patient’s weight.
–
BSA
: The monitor calculates the body surface area automatically.
–
Date Of Birth
: Enter the patient’s date of birth. Enter this in the form dd/mm/yyyy.
–
Age
: The monitor calculates the patient age automatically.
–
Gender
: Choose Male or Female.
–
Notes
: Enter any extra information about the patient or treatment.
5
Select
Confirm.
The patient status changes to admitted.
Patient Category and Paced Status
The patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.
The paced setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Paced is set to No, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave.
WARNING Patient Category
and Paced status will always contain a value, regardless of whether the patient is fully admitted or not. If you do not specify settings for these fields, the monitor uses the default settings from the current profile, which might not be correct for your patient.
Patient category Changing the patient category may change the arrhythmia and NBP alarm limits.
Always check alarm limits to make sure that they are appropriate for your patient.
Paced status For paced patients, you must set
Paced
to Yes. If it is incorrectly set to No, the monitor could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm during asystole.
Admitting a Centrally-Monitored Patient
You can admit a patient at either the bedside or the Information Center. When you admit a patient, the patient’s name appears on the bedside monitor and the Information Center.
If you do not fill in all patient information required by the Information Center, the Information
Center may reject the admission. Complete all the required fields and try again to admit the patient.
74
Quick Admitting a Patient
5 Managing Patients
Quick Admitting a Patient
3
4
Use Quick Admit only if you do not have the time or information to fully admit a patient. Complete the rest of the patient demographic details later.
1
2
Select the
Quick Admit
SmartKey.
Enter the required data (MRN or Last Name depending on configuration) with the keyboard.
Select Enter.
In the confirmation window, select
Confirm
to discharge the previous patient (if confirmation is configured).
5
Check that patient category and paced status are correct for the new patient.
If the monitor is connected to an Information Center and only the MRN is entered, the patient name is set to - - - at the Information Center. Complete the rest of the demographic details as soon as possible to fully identify the patient on the network, on the monitor and on printed reports. To complete the details, select Admit
Patient
again and complete all required fields.
Editing Patient Information
To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, select the patient name field on the
Main Screen to open the
Patient Demographics
window, and make the required changes.
Discharging a Patient
You should always perform a discharge before starting monitoring for a new patient, even if your previous patient was not admitted. A discharge:
– clears the information in the Patient Demographics window
– erases all patient data (including trend data) from the monitor and Information Center. This ensures that data from a previous patient are not mixed with data from the new patient.
– resets patient category and paced settings to the settings defined in the default Profile
– resets all monitor and measurement settings as well as the active Screen to the settings defined in the default Profile
– discharges the patient from the Information Center.
When a patient is discharged from the monitor or from an Information Center, all patient data is deleted. Make sure that you have printed out any required reports before discharging. Check that a functioning central printer is available before you use End Case.
To discharge a patient,
1
Select the patient name field or select the
Admit/Dischrge
SmartKey to open the
Patient Demographics
window and associated pop-up keys.
2
Select the pop-up key for either:
– End Case - to print any configured end case reports or vital signs recording, discharge the patient and clear the patient database, then enter standby mode. If an End Case SmartKey is configured for your monitor, you can also select this instead and then confirm.
To see which end case reports are set up for your monitor, select Main Setup -> Reports ->
Auto Reports
. For each auto report, if End Case Report is set to On, this report will
75
5 Managing Patients
Transferring Patients be printed when you select End Case. See the section on AutoReports for information on setting up end case reports.
– Dischrge Patient - to discharge the patient without printing any reports.
New Patient Check
The monitor can be configured to ask you in certain situations:
• after a specified power-off period
• after a specified standby period
• when no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO
2
, NBP) have been measured for a specified period whether a new patient is now being monitored. The pop-up window is entitled Is this a new
Patient?
. The monitor offers a Yes key to discharge the previous patient and begin monitoring a new patient and a No key to continue monitoring with the current patient data and settings.
The time periods for the three conditions can be configured independently.
Transferring Patients
To save you from having to enter the same patient data multiple times and enable patient transfer without loss of data, patient demographic information is shared between patient monitors and
Information Centers.
Transferring a Centrally-Monitored Patient with the Monitor
Scenario: A centrally-monitored patient is moved with the monitor to another monitoring location on the same Information Center database server without interrupting the collection of patient trend information.
1
Select the patient name field or select the
Admit/Dischrge
SmartKey to open the
Patient Demographics
window, then select the Transfer pop-up key. If the patient is not admitted or not monitored by an Information Center, the Transfer key is inactive
(“grayed-out”).
This step preserves the patient’s demographic data during the transfer.
2
At the new location, connect the monitor to the network (only needed for wired networks). If the
monitor detects a patient conflict, the patient selection window will be displayed. See “Resolving
Patient Information Mismatch” on page 77.
Verify that the settings for patient category and paced mode are correct.
3
If you accidentally transfer a patient, use
Re-admit
to restore this patient’s data to the Information
Center. If you are not connected to the network, select
Clear Transfer
to leave transfer mode. The patient data remains in the monitor.
Data Exchange Between Information Centers
You can transfer demographic data and trend data from one IIC to another by selecting Transfer on the patient monitor. Trend data is not shared between Information Centers and monitors.
76
Transferring Patients
5 Managing Patients
Resolving Patient Information Mismatch
When you connect a monitor to the network, the monitor compares patient category, paced status, and a unique patient identification number that is internally stored in the monitor. The monitor indicates a mismatch if the information is not identical.
WARNING
When a monitor is connected to an Information Center by the wireless IntelliVue Instrument
Telemetry interface, the patient data will automatically be merged in the case of a transfer. This means there is no patient discharge at the monitor and settings and trend data will be retained. You will see a message on the monitor and the Patient Demographics window will automatically appear so that you can check the data and change it if necessary.
Manually Resolving Patient Mismatch
The source of the patient mismatch is indicated by question marks (???) and displayed in the status line at the bottom of the screen (Patient???, Patient Category??? or Paced???).
The Patient Selection window automatically opens so you can decide which patient data to use. You do not have to resolve the mismatch immediately, but the indicators remain until you do.
After you resolve the mismatch, the monitor displays a confirmation window that explains the consequences of your choice, telling you where the patient will be continued/discontinued. Confirm your choice. The monitor automatically displays the Patient Demographics window after confirmation. Verify that the settings shown are correct for the patient.
Gender, date of birth, height, weight, and nursing notes do not generate a mismatch. If these fields are different on different devices, the monitor resolves them itself. For example, it may take date of birth from the Information Center, whilst taking gender from the monitor. Always check the Patient
Demographics after combining patients, to ensure that you are satisfied with the results. Change them if necessary.
WARNING After resolving a patient mismatch, check that the monitor settings (especially patient category, paced status and alarm limits) are correct for the patient.
77
5 Managing Patients
Transferring Patients
Patient Mismatch - If One Set of Patient Data is Correct
♦
If there is a mismatch between an
Information Center and a monitor, choose the data set you want to continue using for this patient, either:
Continue Central: to continue with the patient demographics from the
Information Center, discharge the patient in the monitor, and use the default monitor profile.
Continue Monitor: to continue with the patient in the monitor and discharge the patient in the
Information Center, permanently deleting all data in the Information
Center.
Patient Selection
Last name
First name
MRN
Patient Cat Adult
Paced
Central
DOE
JOHN
1234HG9556
No
Continue
Central
Continue
Monitor
New
Monitor
MILLER
Neo
Yes
Patient
Same
Patient
78
6
6
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT
Monitoring
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the monitor as a waveform and a numeric. This section also tells you about arrhythmia monitoring (see
page 94), ST monitoring (see page 104) and QT monitoring (see page 114).
Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement
4
5
Good electrode-to-skin contact is important for a good ECG signal, as the skin is a poor conductor of electricity.
1
2
Select sites with intact skin, without impairment of any kind.
Clip or shave hair from sites as necessary.
3
Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water, leaving no soap residue.
We do not recommend using ether or pure alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the resistance.
Dry skin thoroughly.
Gently abrade the skin using ECG skin preparation paper to remove dead skin cells to improve the conductivity of the electrode site.
Connecting ECG Cables
1
2
Attach the clips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them. If you are not using pre-gelled electrodes, apply electrode gel to the electrodes before placement.
Place the electrodes on the patient according to the lead placement you have chosen.
79
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads
ECG Connector
CAUTION
3
4
Attach the electrode cable to the patient cable.
Plug the patient cable into the white ECG connector on the monitor. An ECG waveform and numeric appears on the monitor display.
To protect the monitor from damage during defibrillation, for accurate ECG information and to protect against noise and other interference, use only ECG electrodes and cables specified by Philips.
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads
The monitor uses the primary and secondary lead to compute HR and to analyze and detect cardiac arrhythmias. They are also available for recordings and for display on the Information Center.
The secondary lead setting is used only if your monitor is configured for multi-lead (instead of singlelead) arrhythmia analysis. It determines which additional lead will be used for arrhythmia analysis.
You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that has the following characteristics:
• the QRS should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic
• the QRS should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV
To select a lead as primary or secondary lead:
♦
In the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Primary
or
Secondary
, then select the appropriate lead. You can assign any available lead whether it is currently displayed or not.
Checking Paced Status
It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG.
♦
To change the paced status in the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Paced
to toggle between
Yes
or
No
.
WARNING
Pace pulse rejection must be switched on for paced patients by setting “Paced” to Yes. Switching pace pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in pace pulses being counted as regular QRS complexes, which could prevent an asystole event from being detected. When changing profiles, and at admission/discharge, always check that paced status is correct for the patient.
80
Understanding the ECG Display
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Some pace pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS complex, and could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect cardiac arrest or some arrhythmias.
Keep pacemaker patients under close observation.
Understanding the ECG Display
Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
1 mV calibration bar
Lead label
Pace pulse markers
Pacer spikes of the displayed wave
M
EASI
ECG Filter label
EASI lead placement label
Paced Rhythm
Current heart rate
Current heart rate alarm limits
HR bpm
ECG numeric: This is derived from the monitored ECG.
Pace pulse markers: These are shown if the
Paced
status has been set to
Yes
, the pacer spikes are not configured to have a fixed size, and the patient has a paced signal.
Pacer Spikes: The pacer spikes are shown in white, unless the ECG wave is white, then they will be green. If the pacer spikes have been configured to have a fixed size, they will be displayed in the background as a dotted line.
Pacer spikes configured to have a fixed size
Defibrillator synchronization marks: If an HP/Agilent/Philips defibrillator is connected, the synchronization marks (vertical lines on the ECG wave) are shown on the ECG wave. The synchronization marks will be shown in yellow, unless the ECG wave is yellow, then they will be green.
ST numerics in ECG wave: ST numerics can be configured to show underneath the ECG wave on the bottom left.
Monitoring Paced Patients
An ECG optimized for monitoring a paced patient should look like this:
Normal Beats Pace Pulses/Beats
81
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave
You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that has these characteristics:
• the normal QRS should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic. For paced patients, the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace pulses.
• the QRS should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and the T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV.
For ease of identification on the screen, the pacer spikes can be configured to have a fixed size. They are then shown in the background as a dotted lines. The length of the dotted line is fixed to the wave channel height and is independent of the actual pacer amplitude.
Setting the Paced Status (Pace Pulse Rejection)
♦
In the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Paced
to toggle between
Yes
and
No
.
You can also change the paced status in the Patient Demographics window.
Paced
When
Paced
is set to
Yes
:
– Pace Pulse Rejection is switched on. This means that pacemaker pulses are not counted as extra QRS complexes.
Non-Paced
– pace pulse marks are shown on the ECG wave as a small dash (only when the pacer spikes are not configured to have a fixed size)
– the paced symbol is displayed under the HR label.
When
Paced
is set to
No
, pacer spikes are not shown in the ECG wave. Be aware that switching pace pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in pace pulses being counted as regular QRS complexes, which could prevent an asystole event from being detected.
Avoiding Pace Pulse Repolarization Tails
Some unipolar pacemakers display pace pulses with repolarization tails. These tails may be counted as
QRSs in the event of cardiac arrest or other arrhythmias.
If you note a visible repolarization tail, choose a lead that decreases the size of the repolarization tail.
Repolarization tail
(note width)
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave
If any of the displayed ECG waves is too small or clipped, you can change the size of one or all of the
ECG waves on the screen.
Changing the adjustment factor only changes the visual appearance of the ECG wave on the screen. It does not affect the ECG signal analyzed by the monitor.
82
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Comparing the wave size to the 1 mV calibration bar on the ECG wave segment can help you to get an idea of the true ECG signal strength. If you choose a fixed adjustment factor, the 1 mV calibration bar will be the same size for all the displayed ECG waves. If you choose AutoSize, the calibration bar may be a different size for each wave.
To Change the Size of an Individual ECG Wave
1
Select the wave segment you want to change. This calls up the lead menu for this segment.
2
In the lead menu, select
Size Up
to increase wave size or
Size Down
to decrease the size.
Selecting
AutoSize
lets the monitor choose the optimal adjustment factor for all displayed ECG waves.
To Change the Size of all the ECG Waves
To change the size of all the ECG waves on the screen by a fixed adjustment factor,
1
In the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Adjust Size
.
2
Select the required adjustment factor from the line of pop-up keys.
–
Size x0.5
to halve the wave size
–
Size x1
to display the wave without zoom
–
Size x2
to double the wave size
–
Size x4:
to multiply the wave size by four
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone
The QRS tone is derived from either the HR or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source. The QRS volume can be set from 0 to 10 (0 means off).
♦
To change the QRS volume, in the
Setup ECG
appropriate volume from the pop-up list.
menu select
QRS Volume
and then select the
Changing the ECG Filter Settings
The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. An abbreviation indicating the filter type is shown underneath the lead label on the monitor display. Filter settings do not affect ST measurement.
♦
To change the filter setting, in the appropriate setting.
Setup ECG
menu, select
Filter
and then select the
–
Monitor
: Use under normal measurement conditions.
–
Filter
: The filter reduces interference to the signal. It should be used if the signal is distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency interference usually leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the Filter reduces artifacts and interference from electro-surgical units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting
Filter
may suppress the QRS complexes too much and thus interfere with the clinical
83
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6-lead placement) evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor. This does not affect the ECG analysis performed by the monitor.
If
AutoFilter
is set to
On
in Configuration Mode, the filter setting will automatically be set to
Filter
if electromagnetic interference is detected.
–
Diag
(Diagnostic): Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segments are visible.
The setting
Diag
selects the highest available ECG bandwidth which is 0.05 to 150 Hz for the
Adult, Pedi and Neo patient category. The term “diagnostic” relates only to the ECG bandwidth requirements for diagnostic electrocardiographic devices as outlined in the ANSI/AAMI standard
EC11-1991.
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6lead placement)
The two chest leads for the 6-lead placement can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions.
Select the positions you have used in the
Setup ECG
menu, so that the chest leads will be correctly labeled.
1
2
In the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Va Lead
.
Select the position used from the list.
3
Select
Vb Lead
and select the position used from the list
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement
You must enable either standard lead placement or EASI lead placement.
♦
In the
Setup ECG
menu, select
Placement
and then
Standard
or
EASI
.
EASI
is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and
EASI
is marked on any printouts.
See the section on EASI ECG Lead Placement for electrode placement diagrams.
About ECG Leads
To make it possible to compare measured ECG signals, the electrodes (or lead sets) are placed in standardized positions, forming so-called “leads.” To obtain ECG signals optimized for use in diagnosis and patient management in different care environments, different lead sets in varying lead placements can be used. You can use either standard lead placements or EASI lead placements with this monitor.
When placing electrodes, choose a flat, non-muscular site where the signal will not be interfered with by either movement or bones. Correct lead placement is always important for accurate diagnosis.
Especially in the precordial leads, which are close to the heart, QRS morphology can be greatly altered if an electrode is moved away from its correct location.
84
ECG Lead Fallback
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ECG Leads Monitored
If you are using these leads are available:
I, II, III
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V and MCL
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, Va, Vb
Resp is measured between electrodes:
RA and LL a 3-electrode set a 5-electrode set a 6-electrode set
RA and LL
RA and LL a 10-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 RA and LL an EASI 5-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 I and A
Changing Lead Sets
To change the ECG lead set,
1
2
Remove the electrodes and then replace them as required.
If the new lead set has more leads than the previous, the monitor automatically recognizes the new lead placement. If the new lead set has fewer leads, then you must select
New Lead Setup
in the
Setup ECG
menu. If you remove electrodes and do not select
New Lead Setup
, the monitor will issue a Lead Off INOP message. Select
New Lead Setup
and the INOP message will disappear.
ECG Lead Fallback
If fallback is configured on and there is a leads off INOP in the primary lead (and in the secondary lead, if you are using multi-lead monitoring) for longer than 10 seconds, and if another lead is available, this available lead automatically becomes the primary lead. This is known as lead fallback.
When the Leads Off condition is corrected, the leads are automatically switched back.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
ECG Lead Placements
The labels and colors of the ECG electrodes differ according to the standards that apply for your hospital. The electrode placement illustrations in this chapter use the AAMI labels and colors.
Electrode labels
AAMI EASI IEC
RA I
LA S
LL A
RL N
V E
V1
V2
C
C1
C2
R
L
F
N
Electrode colors
AAMI
White
Black
Red
Green
Brown
Brown/Red
Brown/Yellow
IEC
Red
Yellow
Green
Black
White
White/Red
White/Yellow
85
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ECG Lead Placements
Electrode labels
AAMI
V3
V4
V5
V6
EASI IEC
C3
C4
C5
C6
Standard 3-Lead Placement
Electrode colors
AAMI
Brown/Green
Brown/Blue
Brown/Orange
Brown/Violet
RA
LA
IEC
White/Green
White/Brown
White/Black
White/Violet
RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder
LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder
LL placement: on the left lower abdomen
LL
Standard 5-Lead Placement
RA
II aVR
V
I aV
L aV
F
III
LA
RA placement:
directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder
LA placement:
directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder
RL placement:
on the right lower abdomen
LL placement:
on the left lower abdomen
V placement:
on the chest, the position depends on your required lead selection
RL
LL
86
ECG Lead Placements
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
6-Lead Placement
For a 6-lead placement use the positions from the 5-lead diagram above but with two chest leads. The two chest leads, Va and Vb, can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions shown in the chest electrode diagram below. The Va and Vb lead positions chosen must be selected in the ECG Setup
Menu to ensure correct labeling.
Chest Electrode Placement
For accurate chest electrode placement and measurement, it is important to locate the fourth intercostal space.
1
2
Locate the second intercostal space by first palpating the Angle of Lewis (the little bony protuberance where the body of the sternum joins the manubrium). This rise in the sternum is where the second rib is attached, and the space just below this is the second intercostal space.
Palpate and count down the chest until you locate the fourth intercostal space.
Angle of
Lewis
2
3
4
V4R
V3R
V1
VE
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
V1 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the right sternal border
V2 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the left sternal border
V3 placement: midway between the
V2 and V4 electrode positions
V4 placement: on the fifth intercostal space at the left midclavicular line
V5 placement: on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
V3R to V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left
VE placement: over the xiphoid process
V7 placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space
V7R placement: on posterior chest at the right posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space
87
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ECG Lead Placements
10-Lead Placement
When monitoring 12-leads of ECG, using a 10-Electrode Lead Placement, it is important to correctly place electrodes and to label all 12-lead ECG reports with the correct lead placement.
Conventional 12-Lead ECG
RA
V1 - V6
LA
In conventional 12-Lead ECG using 10 electrodes, an electrode is placed on the right arm, left arm, right leg, and left leg. Six V- electrodes are placed on the chest. The right leg electrode is the reference electrode.
Limb electrodes:
– Place arm electrodes on the inside of each arm, between the wrist and the elbow.
– Place leg electrodes inside of each calf, between the knee and the ankle.
Chest electrodes:
V1 - on the 4th intercostal space at the right sternal border
V2 - on the 4th intercostal space at the left sternal border
V3 - midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions
V4 - on the 5th intercostal space at the left midclavicular line
V5 - on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
V6 - on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position
RL
LL
88
Capture 12-Lead
Modified 12-Lead ECG
Angle of Lewis
RA
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
LA
V1 - V6
If your institution uses modified 10
Lead ECG electrode placement (the
Mason-Likar Lead System), place the four limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower abdomen.
The six V electrodes are placed on the chest in the same position as the conventional 12-lead placement.
RL LL
Choosing Standard or Modified Electrode Placement
If your institution uses modified 10 Lead ECG electrode placement (the Mason-Likar Lead System), you must switch
ModLdPlcmt
to
On
in the monitor. To do this,
♦ in the
Setup ECG
menu, select
ModLdPlcmt
to toggle between
On
and
Off
.
– When
ModLdPlcmt
is set to
On
, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled
12 Lead ECG Report
(Mason-Likar)
, and captured 12-lead ECGs will be labelled
Mason-Likar
to the right of the bandwidth annotation at the Information Center.
– When
ModLdPlcmt
is set to
Off
, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled
12 Lead ECG
Report
, and captured 12-lead ECGs will not be annotated at the Information Center.
WARNING Do not use ECG analysis interpretation statements and measurements for 12-lead ECGs obtained using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement.This may lead to misdiagnosis since the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement does not look the same as the conventional 12-lead
ECG and may mask inferior infarction due to calculated axis, R, P and T wave magnitudes shifts and
ST slope.
Do not export 12-lead ECGs obtained using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement.
Captured 12-Lead ECGs using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement exported from the Information Center are not annotated with the Mason-Likar label.
Capture 12-Lead
If the monitor is connected to an Information Center via a wired network, the
Capture 12-Lead
SmartKey may be configured. Selecting this exports 12-Lead ECG information to the Information
Center for analysis. For details see the Instructions for Use supplied with the Information Center.
89
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
EASI ECG Lead Placement
EASI ECG Lead Placement
Using a standard 5-electrode set in EASI lead placement you can monitor up to 12 standard ECG leads simultaneously and continuously at the bedside. EASI provides a monitoring method for trending ST segment changes that can provide an early indication of ischemia.
WARNING
EASI-derived 12-lead ECGs and their measurements are approximations to conventional 12-lead
ECGs. As the 12-lead ECG derived with EASI is not exactly identical to the 12-lead conventional
ECG obtained from an electrocardiograph, it should not be used for diagnostic interpretations.
Respiratory monitoring is also possible with the EASI placement; respiration is measured between the I and A electrodes.
Place the electrodes as accurately as possible to obtain the best quality EASI measurements.
When EASI lead placement is selected,
EASI
is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and
EASI
is marked on any recorder strips and printouts.
When EASI lead placement is selected,
EASI
is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and
EASI
is marked on any printouts.
EASI Monitoring During INOP Conditions If one of the derived EASI leads has an INOP condition (for example,
LEAD OFF
), a flat line is displayed. After 10 seconds, the directly acquired
EASI AI, AS, or ES lead (depending on which is available) is displayed with the corresponding lead label. This causes an arrhythmia relearn.
4
3
1
2
EASI Electrode Placement
1
E (V) on the lower sternum at the level of the fifth intercostal space
2
A (LL)
3
S (LA) on the left midaxillary line at the same level as the E electrode on the upper sternum
4
I (RA)
5
N on the right midaxillary line at the same level as the E electrode reference electrode - can be anywhere, usually below the sixth rib on the right hip
5
90
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview
The ECG and arrhythmia alarms available depend on which measurements are switched on, and the arrhythmia option enabled for your monitor.
• Cardiotach alarms are available when HR is on and the active alarm source is ECG, but arrhythmia is switched off
• Basic arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on
• Advanced arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on and the Advanced
Arrhythmia option has been enabled for your monitor
Cardiotach Alarms
***Asystole
***Ventricular Fibrillation/
Tachycardia
***Extreme Bradycardia
***Extreme Tachycardia
**High heart rate
**Low heart rate
Additional Alarms with Basic
Arrhythmia Option
Additional Alarms with
Enhanced Arrhythmia
Option
***Ventricular Tachycardia
**Pacer Not Capture
**Pacer Not Pacing
**Frequent PVCs (PVC > limit/ min)
**Supraventricular Tach
**Missed Beat
**Pause
**Irregular HR
**Ventricular Rhythm
**Run PVCs High
**Pair PVCs
**R-on-T PVCs
**Ventricular bigeminy
**Ventricular trigeminy
**Nonsustained V-Tach
**Multiform PVCs
91
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Using ECG Alarms
Using ECG Alarms
ECG alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits changed just like other measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms section. Special alarm features which apply only to
ECG are described here.
Extreme Alarm Limits
The extreme rate alarms, Extreme Tachy and Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm source, either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value (the
Δ value) to the high and low alarm limits.
Extreme
Brady Limit
Low
Limit
High
Limit
Extreme
Tachy Limit
Δ Extreme Brady
Δ Extreme Tachy
You need to know which value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦
To see the extreme rate alarms set for your monitor, in the
Setup ECG
menu, see the menu items
Δ
ExtrTachy
and
Δ
ExtrBrady
.
ECG Alarms Off Disabled
Be aware that your hospital department may have decided to disable the setting ECG Alarms Off in the monitor’s Configuration Mode. In this case, HR alarms cannot be switched off in Monitoring
Mode. If you try to switch off the HR alarms, you will see the message
To activate enter
Config and enable Alarms Off
.
HR Alarms When Arrhythmia Analysis is Switched Off
When arrhythmia analysis is switched off, only these HR-related alarms will be detected:
• the asystole alarm
• the ventricular fibrillation/tachycardia alarm
• the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms
• the high heart rate and low heart rate alarms.
Enhanced Asystole Detection
In order to improve alarming on asystole under certain conditions, you can set
Asystole
Detection
in Configuration Mode to
Enhanced
. In enhanced mode an asystole alarm will be suppressed for up to five seconds if a valid beat-to-beat Pulse is detected from a Pressure.
92
ECG Safety Information
ECG Safety Information
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
CAUTION
Interference from instruments near the patient and ESU interference can cause problems with the
ECG wave. See the monitor specifications for more information.
WARNING
Defibrillation and Electrosurgery: Do not touch the patient, or table, or instruments, during defibrillation.
After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct electrodes are used and applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
ECG cables can be damaged when connected to a patient during defibrillation. Check cables for functionality before using them again.
According to AAMI specifications the peak of the synchronized defibrillator discharge should be delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R wave. The signal at the ECG output on the IntelliVue patient monitors is delayed by a maximum of 30 ms. Your biomedical engineer should verify that your
ECG/Defibrillator combination does not exceed the recommended maximum delay of 60 ms.
When using electrosurgical (ES) equipment, never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of the ES device, as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.
General: When you are connecting the electrodes or the patient cable, make sure that the connectors never come into contact with other conductive parts, or with earth. In particular, make sure that all of the ECG electrodes are attached to the patient, to prevent them from contacting conductive parts or earth.
During surgery: Use the appropriate orange electrode ECG safety cable, or lead cable with an orange connector, for measuring ECG in the operating room. These cables have extra circuitry to protect the patient from burns during cautery, and they decrease electrical interference. This also reduces the hazard of burns in case of a defective neutral electrode at the HF device. These cables cannot be used for measuring respiration.
Pacemaker failure: During complete heart block or pacemaker failure to pace/capture, tall P-waves
(greater than 1/5 of the average R-wave height) may be erroneously counted by the monitor, resulting in missed detection of cardiac arrest.
Patients exhibiting intrinsic rhythm: When monitoring paced patients who exhibit only intrinsic rhythm, the monitor may erroneously count pace pulses as QRS complexes when the algorithm first encounters them, resulting in missed detection of cardiac arrest.
The risk of missing cardiac arrest may be reduced by monitoring these patients with low heart rate limit at or slightly above the basic/demand pacemaker rate. A low heart rate alarm alerts you when the patient’s heart rate drops to a level where pacing is needed. Proper detection and classification of the paced rhythm can then be determined.
Filtered ECG signal from external instruments: Instruments such as defibrillators or telemetry units produce a filtered ECG signal. When this signal is used as an input to the bedside monitor, it is filtered again. If this twice-filtered signal is passed to the arrhythmia algorithm, it may cause the algorithm to fail to detect pace pulses, pacemaker non-capture, or asystole, thus compromising paced patient monitoring performance.
93
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
About Arrhythmia Monitoring
External pacing electrodes: When a pacemaker with external pacing electrodes is being used on a patient, arrhythmia monitoring is severely compromised due to the high energy level in the pacer pulse.
This may result in the arrhythmia algorithm’s failure to detect pacemaker noncapture or asystole.
Fusion beat pacemakers: Pacemakers that create fusion beats (pace pulse on top of the QRS complex) cannot be detected by the monitor’s QRS detector.
Rate adaptive pacemakers: Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Volume may occasionally react on the Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination of the Resp value and execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp measurement can prevent this.
About Arrhythmia Monitoring
Arrhythmia analysis provides information on your patient’s condition, including heart rate, PVC rate, rhythm, and ectopics. The monitor uses the user-selected primary and secondary ECG leads for singlelead or multi-lead arrhythmia analysis. During arrhythmia analysis, the monitor continuously
• optimizes ECG signal quality. This is important for arrhythmia analysis. The monitor continuously filters the ECG signal to remove baseline wander, muscle artifact, and signal irregularities. Also, if the Patient Paced status is set to Yes, pace pulses are filtered out to avoid processing them as QRS beats.
• detects beats, for example, QRS complexes, identifying them for further analysis.
• measures signal features such as R-wave height, width, and timing.
• creates beat templates, and classifies and labels beats to aid in rhythm analysis and alarm detection.
• examines the ECG signal for ventricular fibrillation, asystole, and noise.
Arrhythmia Options
Your monitor has either the basic or the enhanced arrhythmia option. Both options provide rhythm and ectopic status messages and beat labelling. The number of rhythms being classified, events being detected, and alarms generated differs according to the option. The alarms available with the different
options are listed in the section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 91, the rhythm and
ectopic messages detected are listed in “Arrhythmia Status Messages” on page 97.
Where Can I Find More Information?
See the Application Notes on ST and Arrhythmia supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed information on the arrhythmia algorithm and its clinical application.
94
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off
1
2
In the
Setup Arrhy
menu, select
Arrhythmia
to toggle between
On
and
Off
.
Select the
Confirm
pop-up key which appears at the bottom of the screen.
Be aware that when arrhythmia analysis is switched off,
– the message
Arrhythmia Off
appears beside the ECG wave, if configured to do so
– only the HR-related alarms are detected (the asystole alarm, the ventricular fibrillation/ tachycardia alarm, the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms, the high heart rate and low heart rate alarms)
– HR High and HR Low alarms behave like normal yellow alarms, no timeout periods are active.
Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring
It is important to select a suitable lead for arrhythmia monitoring.
Guidelines for non-paced patients are:
– QRS should be tall and narrow (recommended amplitude > 0.5 mV)
– R-Wave should be above or below the baseline (but not bi-phasic)
– T-wave should be smaller than 1/3 R-wave height
– the P-wave should be smaller than 1/5 R-wave height.
For paced patients, in addition to the above, the pace pulse should be:
– not wider than the normal QRS
– the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace pulses
– large enough to be detected, with no re-polarization.
To prevent detection of P-waves or baseline noises as QRS complexes, the minimum detection level for
QRS complexes is set at 0.15 mV, according to AAMI-EC 13 specifications. Adjusting the ECG wave size on the monitor display (gain adjustment) does not affect the ECG signal which is used for arrhythmia analysis. If the ECG signal is too small, you may get false alarms for pause or asystole.
Aberrantly-Conducted Beats
As P-waves are not analyzed, it is difficult and sometimes impossible for the monitor to distinguish between an aberrantly-conducted supraventricular beat and a ventricular beat. If the aberrant beat resembles a ventricular beat, it is classified as ventricular. You should always select a lead where the aberrantly-conducted beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these ‘normal beats’. Instead of trying to select two leads with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.
Atrial Fibrillation and Flutter
Since P-waves are not analyzed, it is not possible to discriminate atrial rhythms. If there is constant variance in the R-R interval, the rhythm is classified as Irregular. It is extremely important for accurate analysis of the rhythm to have p-waves with an amplitude of less than 1/5 the height of the R-wave or
< 0.15 mV. If the p-waves are larger than this, they may be counted as QRS complexes.
95
96
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display
Intermittent Bundle Branch Block
Bundle branch and the other fascicular blocks create a challenge for the arrhythmia algorithm. If the
QRS during the block changes considerably from the learned normal, the blocked beat may be incorrectly classified as ventricular, causing false PVC alarms. You should always select a lead where the bundle branch block beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these ‘normal beats’. Instead of trying to select two leads with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display
Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.
II
M
Beat label
P
1mV
P
Pace pulse marks
P
Delayed
Rhythm status message
Paced Rhythm
Pair PVCs
PVC Numeric
HR Numeric
PVC
HR
2
75
Ectopic status message
Delayed arrhythmia wave
Viewing Arrhythmia Waves
♦
To review arrhythmia beat labels, in the
Setup Arrhy
menu, select
Annotate Arrhy
.
♦
The wave showing the primary ECG lead will be delayed by six seconds and shown on a grey background. Beat labels will be annotated above the ECG wave and
Delayed
will be written beside it.
To return to the normal ECG primary lead display, select
Annotate Arrhy
again.
Arrhythmia Beat Labels
Arrhythmia beat labels tell you how the monitor is classifying beats.
N
= Normal
V
= Ventricular Ectopic
S
= Supra-ventricular Premature
P
= Paced
'
= Pacer spike
“ = Biventricular Pacer Spike
L
= Learning patient's ECG
A
= Artifact (noisy episode)
?
= Insufficient information to classify beats
I
= Inoperative condition (e.g., LEADS OFF)
M
= Pause or missed beat
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Arrhythmia Status Messages
The monitor displays two types of status messages:
• Rhythm Status Messages -- to indicate the patient’s rhythm.
• Ectopic Status Messages -- to indicate the presence of ectopic beats.
These status messages are shown on the right hand side of the primary ECG wave. They are updated every second, with the exception of the Sinus and Supraventricular (SV) rhythm messages.
The Sinus and SV rhythm messages are updated based on the current heart rate, taking into account the patient category (adult, pediatric, or neonatal). For the message to change from one rhythm status to another, the HR must be in the new range for five beats.
If you have basic arrhythmia capability, you will get only messages for the alarms provided with this level.
Rhythm Status Messages
The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.
Rhythm Status Message Description B or E
ASYSTOLE
VENT FIB/TACH
V-TACH
SUST V-TACH
VENT RHYTHM
VENT BIGEMINY
VENT TRIGEMINY
PACED RHYTHM
IRREGULAR HR
No QRS for 4 consecutive seconds in absence of vent fib or chaotic signal
A fibrillatory wave for 4 consecutive seconds
B, E
B, E
A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tach Heart
Rate Limit
B, E
Ventricular tachycardia rhythm for more than 15 seconds
A dominant rhythm of adjacent PVCs and a HR
≤
the V-Tach HR
Limit
E
E
A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V
A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, V
A dominant rhythm of paced beats
Consistently irregular rhythm
A dominant rhythm of SV beats preceded by P-waves
E
E
B, E
E
B, E
SINUS BRADY
SINUS RHYTHM
SINUS TACHY
SV BRADY
SV RHYTHM
SV TACHY
A dominant rhythm of SV beats not preceded by P-waves
UNKNOWN ECG RHYTHM
Rhythm cannot be determined
LEARNING ECG
Algorithm is learning the ECG beat morphology
LEARNING RHYTHM
Algorithm is learning the rhythm of the classified beats
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG
ECG signal is predominantly invalid and therefore cannot be analyzed
B, E
B, E
B, E
B, E
B, E
97
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Arrhythmia Relearning
Ectopic Status Messages
The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.
Ectopic Status Message Explanation B or E
(No message displayed) No ectopic activity within the last minute
RUN PVCs
PAIR PVCs
More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute
Pair PVCs within the last minute
PACER NOT CAPT
PACER NOT PACE
PAUSE
Pause with pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last minute
E
E
B, E
Pause without pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last minute B, E
No beat detected for 1.75 x average R-R interval for HR <120, or
No beat for 1 second with HR >120 (non-paced patient only), or
No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.
E
R-ON-T PVCs
MULTIFORM PVCs
FREQUENT SVPBs
SVPBs
SV BEATS
PACED BEATS
R-ON-T detected within the last minute
Multiform PVCs detected within the last minute
SVPB count within last minute is greater than 5
1-5 SVPBs in the last minute with a sinus rhythm and no Vs
SV count within last minute and rhythm status is PACED
Paced beat count within last minute and rhythm status is NOT
PACED
E
E
E
E
B, E
B, E
Arrhythmia Relearning
During a learning phase:
• Alarm timeout periods are cleared
• Stored arrhythmia templates are cleared
•
Asystole, Vfib, and HR alarms (when there are enough beats to compute the HR) are active. No other alarms are active.
Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually
1
To initiate relearning manually, in the
Setup Arrhy
menu, select
Relearn Arrhy
.
– While the monitor is learning, the delayed arrhythmia wave displays the beat label
L
and the rhythm status message
LEARNING ECG
.
– Next, the monitor determines the dominant rhythm. The beats are labeled
N
, and the rhythm status message changes to
LEARNING RHYTHM
.
2
3
After relearning is complete, you should check the delayed arrhythmia wave to ensure that the algorithm is labeling the beats correctly.
If beats are still not classified correctly, check that the ECG is optimized for arrhythmia monitoring. You may need to select a different lead or change the electrodes or electrode positions if there is excessive noise, unstable voltage, low amplitude, or large P- or T-waves.
98
Arrhythmia Alarms
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Automatic Arrhythmia Relearn
Arrhythmia relearning is initiated automatically whenever:
• ECG monitoring is switched on
• The ECG Lead or Lead Label of the primary/secondary lead is changed manually, or when fallback occurs
• A
Leads Off
INOP condition (that has been active for > 60 seconds) ends.
If you are monitoring multi-lead arrhythmia and there is a change in one lead only, relearning happens only in the affected lead. During this learning phase, the system will continue monitoring using the other lead. Therefore, the delayed arrhythmia wave is not labeled
L
and there is no
LEARNING ECG
rhythm status message. In addition, alarm timeout periods are maintained, stored arrhythmia templates are maintained for the operative lead, and all alarms switched on are active.
Arrhythmia Relearn and Lead Fallback
Lead fallback triggers an automatic arrhythmia relearn.
WARNING
If arrhythmia learning takes place during ventricular rhythm, the ectopics may be incorrectly learned as the normal QRS complex. This may result in missed detection of subsequent events of V-Tach and V-
Fib.
For this reason you should:
• take care to initiate arrhythmia relearning only during periods of predominantly normal rhythm and when the ECG signal is relatively noise-free
• be aware that arrhythmia relearning can happen automatically
• respond to any INOP messages (for example, if you are prompted to reconnect electrodes)
• be aware that a disconnected EASI electrode triggers an arrhythmia relearn on all leads
• always ensure that the arrhythmia algorithm is labeling beats correctly.
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off and the settings changed just like other measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms section. Special alarm features which apply only to arrhythmia are described here.
The different alarms detected and generated by the monitor depend on the level of arrhythmia analysis that is enabled. For a complete list of arrhythmia alarms and INOPs, see the Alarms chapter.
The monitor detects arrhythmia alarm conditions by comparing ECG data to a set of pre-defined criteria. An alarm can be triggered by a rate exceeding a threshold (for example, HR >xx), an abnormal rhythm (for example, Ventricular Bigeminy), or an ectopic event (for example, Pair PVCs).
99
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Arrhythmia Alarms
Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms
Yellow arrhythmia alarms are short yellow alarms specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions.
Depending on your monitor and Information Center configuration, they may be shown with one or two stars.
WARNING
When arrhythmia analysis is on, all yellow alarms connected with ECG are short (one-star). This means that the yellow alarm lamp and the tones are active for a six seconds only, after which the blinking numeric and the alarm message remain for up to three minutes. Red alarms behave as usual.
Arrhythmia Alarms and Latching
When using arrhythmia analysis,
Visual Latching
and
Audible Latching
should be on for red alarms, or at least
Visual Latching
should be on. Because of the transient nature of arrhythmia alarms, many arrhythmia conditions may go unnoticed if alarm latching is off. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Switching Individual Arrhythmia Alarms On and Off
Some arrhythmia alarms can be individually switched on or off. They are:
Pacer not capture, Pacer not pace, Non-Sustain VT, Vent Rhythm, Run PVCs, Pair PVCs, R-on-T
PVCs, V.Bigeminy, V.Trigeminy, Multif.PVCs, Pause, SVT, Irregular HR, Missed Beat, PVCs/min.
♦
To switch individual alarms on or off, in the
Setup Arrhythmia
menu, select the alarm from the list to toggle between
On
and
Off
. The monitor displays the INOP message SOME ECG
ALRMS OFF if configured.
Switching All Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms On or Off
All yellow arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off together. To do this,
♦
In the
Setup Arrhythmia
menu, select
All Yellow Off
or
All Yellow On
.
Adjusting the Arrhythmia Alarm Limits
Some arrhythmia alarms have limits which can be individually adjusted. They are:
1
2
Vtach HR, Vtach Run, PVCs/min, Vent Rhythm, SVT HR, SVT Run, Asystole Thresh., Pause
Threshold.
To adjust alarm limits, in the
Setup Arrhythmia
menu, select the alarm to be adjusted.
Select the appropriate setting from the pop-up list.
Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods
Normally, an arrhythmia alarm is announced when an alarm condition is detected. However, there are certain situations that can inhibit the audible and visible indications of the alarm even though the alarm condition was detected. These include:
• if a more serious alarm condition is active in the same chain
• if a timeout period is in effect for a particular alarm
• if a timeout period is in effect for a higher alarm in that chain.
100
Arrhythmia Alarms
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
What is a Timeout Period?
Timeout periods are automatically started when a yellow arrhythmia alarm is detected. During this period, the same alarm condition will not generate another alarm. Alarm conditions further down the same arrhythmia alarm chain will also not generate an alarm, but alarms further up the chain will: see
“Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining” on page 102).
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
♦
To view the timeout period configured for your monitor, in the the menu items
TimeOut 1st
and
TimeOut 2nd
.
Setup Arrhythmia
menu, see
♦
To reset the timeout period, press the
Alarms
key and then reselect it.
Resetting the Timeout Period
Switching alarms off and then on again cancels all visual and audible indicators and resets the timeout periods.
Silencing an alarm cancels all visual and audible indicators, if the alarm condition is no longer present.
How are Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms Indicated?
When a yellow arrhythmia alarm is generated, it triggers visual and audible indicators. Yellow arrhythmia alarms are always set to latch visually for three minutes. Depending on the alarm condition, audible and visual alarm indicators will appear as follows:
Alarm Condition
Single alarm instance Non-sustained
V-tach
Continuous alarm condition HR LOW
Same intermittent alarm condition
Example
Pair of PVCs
Audible Indicators
Short yellow alarm tone sounds ...
Visual Indicators
Alarm message displayed ...
when alarm condition is initially detected when alarm condition is initially detected and - as an alarm reminder - every time the configured time out period has expired each time the alarm condition is detected, provided that the configured timeout period has expired for 3 minutes (latching time) until the alarm condition stops, plus a maximum of three minutes latching time
If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition still exists, the visual indicators continue until the condition stops. You will get an alarm reminder e very time the configured time out period has expired.
If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition has stopped, the visual indicators are immediately cleared. Silencing an alarm does not reset its time out period, so you will not get a realarm for the same condition or lower on the chain until the time out expires.
101
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining
When arrhythmia analysis is switched on, multiple alarm conditions may be present. Announcing all of the detected alarm conditions would be confusing, and might hide a more serious condition. For this reason, arrhythmia alarms are prioritized in three alarm “chains”: PVC Alarms; Beat Detection Alarms, and Rate Alarms.
Only the highest priority alarm condition in each chain is announced. Lower priority alarms in the same chain will not be announced while an alarm is active or during the configured timeout period. If alarm conditions of equal severity from different chains are detected, the alarm condition that occurred most recently is announced. The exception is Irregular HR, which only occurs if no other alarms are occurring.
See “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 91 for information on which alarms are included
in the different arrhythmia options. See “Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods” on page 100 for an
explanation of how alarm timeouts work.
Red Arrhythmia Alarms
Asystole
PVC Alarms Chain
Non-sustain VT/
Vent Rhythm
Run PVCs
Pair PVCs
R-on-T PVCs
Vent Bigeminy
Vent Trigeminy
PVCs > xx/min
Multiform PVCs
Vent Fib/Tach
V-Tach
Extreme Tachy/Extreme Brady
Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms
Beat Detection Alarms Chain
Rate Alarms Chain
Pause
Pacer Not Captured/
Pacer Not Pacing/
Missed Beat
SVT
HR High/ HR Low
Irregular HR
(occurs only if no other arrhythmia alarms are present)
First level timeout period
(
TimeOut
1st
)
Second level timeout period
(
TimeOut
2nd
)
– If there is an active Vent Bigeminy alarm, a PVCs > xx/min will not be triggered because it is lower on the same chain. However, a high HR alarm will become active because it is on a different chain.
– Higher priority alarms supersede previous alarms. For example, if a Vent Trigeminy alarm is active and a Pair PVCs occurs, the Pair alarm will be activated.
102
Arrhythmia Alarms
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Understanding PVC-Related Alarms
PVC-related alarms are detected on the basis of the current ventricular heart rate and the number of consecutive PVCs counted (referred to as PVC Runs). Changing one alarm limit automatically changes linked alarm limits.
Example: This diagram illustrates the conditions under which PVC alarms would be generated if the
Vent Rhythm Run limit is set to 12, the V-Tach Run Limit is set to eight, and the V-Tach HR Limit is set to 100.
V-Tach Run Limit
100
**Pair
PVCs
PVC =
2
** Non-Sustain
VT
PVC Run < 8
HR > 100
***V-Tach
PVC Run
HR > 100
≥
8
V-Tach Heart
Rate Limit
** Run PVCs
PVC Run > 2 but
≤
12
HR
≤
100
** Vent Rhythm
PVC Run > 12
HR
≤
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Number of Consecutive PVCs (PVC Run)
Ventricular Rhythm
Run Limit
You will see that
• if both the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit and the V-Tach Run Limit are exceeded, a red V-Tach alarm is generated
• if the ventricular heart rate exceeds the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit but not the V-Tach Run Limit, a yellow Non-Sustain VT alarm is generated.
103
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
About ST Monitoring
About ST Monitoring
The monitor performs ST segment analysis on normal and atrially paced beats and calculates ST segment elevations and depressions. This information can be displayed in the form of ST numerics and snippets on the monitor.
All available leads can be monitored continuously. The ECG waveform does not need to be displayed on the monitor for ST Segment analysis.
ST analysis is always performed using a dedicated filter which ensures diagnostic quality. If you are monitoring ECG using an ECG filter mode other than Diagnostic, the ST segment of the ECG wave may look different from the ST segment of the ST snippet for the same wave. For diagnostic evaluation of the ST segment, always switch to Diagnostic filter mode or use the ST snippet.
WARNING
Some clinical conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable ST monitoring, for example:
• if you are unable to get a lead that is not noisy
• if arrhythmias such as atrial fib/flutter are present, which may cause an irregular baseline
• if the patient is continuously ventricularly paced
• if the patient has left bundle branch block.
You should consider switching ST monitoring off if these conditions are present.
This monitor provides ST level change information; the clinical significance of the ST level change information should be determined by a physician.
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for use with neonatal and pediatric patients. For this reason, the recommended - and default - setting for
ST monitoring in neonatal and pediatric modes is
ST Analysis: Off
.
Switching ST On and Off
♦
To switch all ST monitoring on or off, in the
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
ST Analysis
to toggle between
On
and
Off
.
Selecting Leads for ST Analysis
You select which leads to use for ST analysis in the
Setup ST Analysis
menu.
To see the current list of leads selected for ST analysis:
1
Enter the
Setup ST Analysis
menu.
2
Select
Setup ST Leads
. This opens the
Setup ST Leads
pop-up window. Leads chosen for
ST monitoring are listed here. There are two pop-up keys at the bottom of the screen:
Add Delete
If all leads are already selected, the
Add
pop-up key is disabled.
To choose a lead for ST monitoring:
1
Select the
Add
key at the bottom of the
Setup ST Leads
window. This opens the
Choices
pop-up window.
104
Understanding the ST Display and Windows
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
2
Choose a lead from the list for ST monitoring. This closes the
Choices
window and adds the selected lead to the list of chosen leads.
To disable ST monitoring for a lead:
1
2
Choose a lead from the list in the
Setup ST Leads
window.
Select the
Delete
key. This removes this lead from the list.
Understanding the ST Display and Windows
Your monitor screen may be configured to look slightly different from the illustrations.
ST Numerics Up to 12 ST numerics plus the
ST index can be displayed on the monitor
Current HR alarm limits
Current heart rate screen. They can be configured to show beside the measurement numerics, beside the ECG wave, or beside the ST snippet.
A positive ST value indicates ST segment elevation; a negative value indicates depression.
ST numerics
ST-II 1.2
ST-V 2.5
ST-aVR -3.0
ST numerics are displayed in the order in which you select ST leads for analysis. If there is additional space in the field assigned to ST numerics, the monitor will display extra numerics in the order in which they appear in the
Setup ST Analysis
->
Setup ST Leads
list. Any ST leads switched on for analysis that do not fit in the assigned numerics field are shown in succession in place of the last ST numeric.
ST Index The ST index numeric (
STindx
) is the sum of the absolute values for the ST leads V2, V5, aVF. Because it is based on absolute values, it is always a positive number. If you haven’t selected one of the leads V2, V5, and aVF for ST analysis, the STindx numeric will display a question mark “?”.
♦
To switch the ST index numeric on or off for display, in the
ST-Index
to toggle between
On
and
Off
.
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
ST Snippets ST snippets show a one second wave segment for each measured ST lead. The most recent snippet is drawn in the same color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the stored baseline snippet, drawn in a different color. The comparison shows any deviation in the measurement since the baseline snippet was stored, for example as a result of a procedure carried out on the patient.
The information is updated once per minute.
You can see ST snippets in the
Adjust ST Points
window or the
ST Baseline
window.
ST Baseline Window The ST Baseline Window shows an ST snippet drawn on a grid. The current
ST numeric and the ST numeric stored with the baseline are shown, as well as the difference between these two numerics.
A “?” in front of the difference numeric indicates that the ST measurement points were adjusted since the baseline snippet was stored.
♦
To view the
ST Baseline
window, select the ST numerics, then
ST Baseline
.
105
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Updating ST Baseline Snippets
ST label and numeric
Baseline ST numeric and difference since baseline was stored
1mV calibration bar
Current snippet
ST baseline
ST-II
-0.3
0.8
?-1.1
1mv
ST Baseline
ST Baseline from 04 Apr 07 9:38
Timestamp of most recently stored baseline snippet
1sec
Updating ST Baseline Snippets
ST analysis requires valid samples to measure and store a snippet. ST Snippets and ST values are updated every minute. If there is artifact in the signal, it may take longer for an ST snippet and an ST value to appear.
The first baseline is stored automatically after ST monitoring is started, or when a new patient is admitted. To update ST baselines,
1
Select the ST numerics then
ST Baseline
to open the
ST Baseline
window.
2
In the
ST Baseline
window, select
Update Baseline
to store all current snippets as baselines.
This deletes all previously-stored baselines.
About the ST Measurement Points
The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the ISO point and the ST point, as shown in the diagram below. The isoelectric (ISO) point provides the baseline, the ST point is at the midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is where the QRS complex changes its slope; as it is a fixed distance away from the ST point, it can be useful to help you position the ST point correctly.
106
About the ST Measurement Points
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
R-wave peak at 0 msec
J point, for example, 48 msec
T
P
Difference = ST value
Isoelectric point set to -80 msec
Q
S
ST measurement point, for example, J + 60 msec
CAUTION
The ST measurement points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring, and if the patient's heart rate or ECG morphology changes significantly, as this may affect the size of the QT interval and thus the placement of the ST point. Artifactual ST segment depression or elevation may occur if the isoelectric point or the ST point is incorrectly set.
Always ensure that ST measurement points are appropriate for your patient.
Adjusting ST Measurement Points
Depending on your monitor’s configuration, the ST point can be positioned either
• relative to the J-point.
In the
Adjust ST Points
window, the pop-up keys ISO Point, J Point and ST Point are visible and can be adjusted. or
• directly by selecting a numeric value for the ST point.
In the
Adjust ST Points
window, you can adjust the ISO and ST point.
The
ST Uses
setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
To adjust the ST measurement points,
1
2
In the
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
Adjust ST Points
to open the
Adjust ST
Points
window. Alternatively, you can use the
Adjust ST Points
pop-up key in the
ST
Baseline
window.
Select a suitable ECG lead for ST measurement, with a visible J-point and a visible P wave. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the ST snippets for the other ECG leads.
3
Select the ST point you need to adjust by touching the appropriate point on the screen. The current choice is highlighted (ISO point -80 in the screen example).
107
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ST label and the ST numeric that would apply using the current points
1mV calibration bar
ST-I
0.1
Cursors for adjusting ST points
About the ST Measurement Points
Adjust ST Points
1mv
ST Points adjusted at 04 Apr 07 11:38
1sec
Highlighted ST point
Update
Apply
Changes
ISO
The ISO-point cursor positions the isoelectric point relative to the R-wave peak. The relation is shown beside the ISO-point in milliseconds. Position the
ISO-point in the middle of the flattest part of the baseline (between the P and
Q waves or in front of the P wave).
The J-point cursor positions the J-point relative to the R-wave peak. It helps you to correctly position the ST-point. Position the J-point at the end of the
QRS complex and the beginning of the ST segment.
The J-point cursor is not available if your monitor is configured to let you set the ST point directly.
4
5
To position the ST-point relative to the J-point: select either
J + 60
or
J + 80
. Select
J Point
and use the arrow keys to move the J-Point and position the ST-point at the midpoint of the ST segment.
To position the ST-point directly: select
ST Point
and use the left and right arrow keys to position the ST point at the midpoint of the ST segment.
Select the
Apply Changes
pop-up key to activate the new ST measurement points and recalculate all ST values.
The most recent ST Points adjustment time is displayed in the
Adjust ST Points
window.
This information is cleared when a patient is discharged or when a new Profile is loaded into the monitor.
To update the ST snippet shown in the
Adjust ST Points
window, select the
Update
pop-up key.
108
ST Alarms
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
ST Alarms
ST alarms are yellow alarms. Each ST lead has its own alarm limit. ST alarms are triggered when an ST value exceeds its alarm limit for more than one minute. Switching ST alarms off switches off alarms for all ST leads.
If more than one ST measurement is in alarm, the monitor only displays the alarm message of the ST lead which is currently furthest from its set alarm limits.
Single- or Multi-lead ST Alarming
Be aware that if multi-lead ST alarming is switched on, only alarms involving more than one ST lead will be announced.
To choose individual or multi-lead ST alarming,
♦
In the
Setup ST Analysis
Multi ST
.
menu, select
ST Alarm Mode
and select either
Single ST
or
Changing ST Alarm Limits
The monitor can detect alarms on each ST lead separately, so you can set high and low ST alarm limits individually for each ST lead. You can also set separate alarm limits for single-lead and multi-lead ST monitoring. Set the high and low alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical condition, unit protocols, physician orders or medication specified limits. A good guideline is + 1.0 mm or - 1.0 mm from the patients's ST, or follow your hospital protocol.
1
2
In the
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
ST Alarm Mode
and select
Single ST
or
Multi
ST
.
Select the alarm to be adjusted.
3
Select the appropriate setting.
Viewing ST Maps
The monitor can derive a multi-axis portrait (map) from the ST analysis to help you detect changes in
ST values. It displays two planes obtained from a multilead ECG in a multi-axis diagram, where each axis represents a lead. The ST value at the J point is given. The position of the axes within the diagram correspond to the placement of the ECG leads. Each ST value is assigned to either a limb lead, or to a chest lead. Every axis shows the polarity of the lead it represents. By joining adjacent ST values, the monitor obtains the ST map. The contour line, and the map shading, is shown in the same color as the
ECG parameter.
Current View
In current view, the monitor displays an ST map that corresponds to the current ST values. Three or more leads per plane are necessary to display a map.
The left of the following diagram shows leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, and aVF on the limb leads. On the right, the V-leads (V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6) are on the chest leads.
109
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
SBed10 Adult
ST-II HIGH
ST Map (Current)
Limb Leads Chest Leads
Size
Up
Size
Down
Show
Baseline
Show
Values
Trend
View
Select
Interval
If an ST lead is switched off, its axis is not shown in the map.
Viewing ST Maps
ST map
ST label and polarity of corresponding lead
Scroll to view more pop-up keys
If a lead is in INOP (the value is being measured but is invalid or unavailable because, for example, the corresponding ECG electrode is unplugged), the area formed by the remaining ST leads is left open.
If there is insufficient information (for example, there are less than three chest leads) for a second ST map to be displayed, the currently available ST values are displayed in place of the second ST map.
Limb Leads
ST-I
ST-II
ST-aVR
ST-aVL
ST-aVF
110
Viewing ST Maps
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Additionally, when both ST maps are displayed, you can view the currently available ST values in the
ST Map window (Current or Trend) at any time. To do this, select the
Show Values
pop-up key.
The ST values are shown in place of the second ST map, and the pop-up key text changes to
Hide
Values
. Select the
Hide Values
pop-up key and the display shows both ST maps again.
SBed10
Adult
ST-II HIGH
ST Map (Current)
Limb Leads
ST-I
ST-II
ST-VI
ST-V2
ST-V3
ST-V4
ST-V5
ST-V6
ST-aVF
Size
Up
Size
Down
Show
Baseline
Hide
Values
ST values are shown where the
STmap for the chest leads is normally displayed.
Select the
Show Values
pop-up key to see the current ST values.
Select
Hide Values
and the display shows both ST maps again.
Trend View
In trend view, you can see up to four trended ST maps, and the current ST map, simultaneously. You can configure the time interval between trended samples. The most recent map is shown in the same color as the parameter itself. Past values change from white through dark gray. In the diagram below, the time interval between trends is 12 seconds. The first trended sample is white and is 12 seconds old.
The second trended sample corresponds to the ST values 24 seconds ago and so forth. The ST values on the diagrams show the current ST values.
If a lead is turned off, its axis is no longer shown. This has no impact on the presentation of trended values that were recorded while the lead was still on. In the diagram below, lead V4 was switched off 20 seconds ago. The current ST values and the first trended value reflect this change in the lead setup. All other maps are displayed the way in which they were recorded.
SBed10
Adult
ST-II HIGH
ST Map (Trend)
Limb Leads
Chest Leads
5 min
Size
Up
Size
Down
Show
Baseline
Show
Values
Current
View
Select
Interval
trending interval
Scroll to view more pop-up keys
111
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Viewing ST Maps
In this diagram, V4 was either temporarily switched off, or in INOP, for around 30 seconds. No data was recorded. Consequently, the affected maps are not closed.
Viewing an ST Map
To display an ST map,
♦
In the
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
ST Map
.
Working in the ST Map Task Window
You may need to activate the ST map task window to see all the data, and to access the pop-up keys.
Select the map view on screen to activate its task window. Once you activate it, you can perform the tasks detailed here.
Switching Between ST Map Views
To switch between views,
♦
Select
Current View
or
Trend View
to toggle between views.
If your trend view is empty, you need to adjust the priority of this measurement in the trending
priority list. See “Trend Priority” on page 163.
Displaying an ST Reference Baseline
You can display an ST reference baseline for the current view, or for the trended view. The baseline is shown in yellow. However, if the ECG color is yellow, the baseline is shown in green. Use this baseline to detect ST changes. The baseline is derived automatically whenever the monitor relearns arrhythmia and also on user request.
♦
Select
Show Baseline
/
Hide Baseline
to toggle between baseline display on and off.
Updating an ST Map Reference Baseline
To update the baseline,
♦
In the
Setup ST Analysis
menu, select
ST Baseline -> Update baseline
.
Changing the Scale of the ST Map
To change scale,
♦
Select
Size Up
or
Size Down
to alter the size at which monitor displays the map.
Changing the Trending Interval
To determine how frequently the monitor displays a trended sample,
112
Viewing ST Maps
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
1
2
In Trend view, select
Select Interval
.
Select the required interval from the menu. The interval ranges between 12 seconds to 30 minutes.
Printing an ST Map Report
To print the most recently viewed (current or trend) window,
1
2
Select
Main Setup
- >
Reports
.
Select
ST Map
.
3
Press
.
113
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
The QT interval is defined as the time between the beginning of the Q-wave and the end of the
T-wave. It measures the total duration of the depolarization (QRS duration) and repolarization (ST-T) phases of the ventricular action potential. QT interval monitoring can assist in the detection of prolonged QT interval syndrome.
R
T
P
Q
S
QT interval
The QT interval has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten the QT interval and slower heart rates prolong the QT interval. Therefore there are several formulas used to correct the QT interval for heart rate. The heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as QTc. The monitor uses as a default the Bazett correction formula and the alternative Fridericia formula can be selected in
Configuration Mode.
For QT interval monitoring to be effective, basic or enhanced arrhythmia monitoring should be turned on.
QT Measurement Algorithm
The QT values are updated every five minutes except in the initial phase (first five minutes) where they are updated once per minute. Normal or atrial paced beats and beats with a similar morphology are averaged to form a representative waveform for further processing. Normal beats followed by a premature QRS will be excluded from the measurements to prevent the premature beat from obscuring the end of the T-wave. If the algorithm cannot form a representative waveform, for example because the morphology of the beats is too varied, a
Cannot Analyze QT
INOP will be generated after 10 minutes. This is also the case if normal beats have been falsely labelled so that the algorithm does not have enough valid beats to make QT measurements. No QT value is calculated if the QT-HR is
>150 bpm (Adult) or >180 bpm (Pedi/Neo).
Because of the different algorithm approaches, a QT/QTc measurement from a diagnostic 12-lead program may differ from the realtime measurement on the monitor.
Where Can I Find More Information?
See the Application Note on QT/QTc Interval Monitoring and the QT Interval Monitoring Quick
Guide supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed information on the QT algorithm and performance.
114
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
Indications For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
Of special concern for QT monitoring is the administration of QT prolonging drugs to patients identified with risk factors for Torsade de Pointe. Females, older patients and patients with bradycardia, impaired left ventricular function (ischemia, left ventricular hypertrophy), hypokalemia and hypomagnesemia are in this increased risk category.
Limitations For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring
Some conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable QT monitoring, for example:
• the T-wave is very flat
• T-waves are not well defined due to atrial flutter or atrial fibrillation
• the end of the T-wave is difficult to define because of the presence of U-waves
• a high heart rate causes the P-wave to encroach on the end of the previous T-wave
• noise or high QRS morphology variation
For these cases you should select a lead with a good T-wave amplitude and no visible flutter activity, and without a predominant U-wave or P-wave.
Some conditions such as left or right bundle branch block or hypertrophy can lead to a widened QRS complex. If a long QTc is observed you should verify it to ensure that it is not caused by QRS widening.
Because normal beats followed by ventricular beats are not included in the analysis, no QT measurement will be generated in the presence of a bigeminy rhythm.
If the heart rate is extremely high (over 150 bpm for adults and over 180 bpm for pediatrics and neonates) QT will not be measured.
When the heart rate changes, it can take several minutes for the QT interval to stabilize. For reliable
QTc calculation it is important to avoid a region where the heart rate is changing.
WARNING
QT/QTc measurements should always be verified by a qualified clinician.
Selecting The QT Leads
For QT Monitoring you can select one of the following three modes:
• All Leads mode - all available leads (I, II, III, V, MCL, V1 - V6) are used to produce a global QT measurement. For EASI lead placement, directly acquired AI, AS and ES leads are used.
• Primary-Lead mode - the primary lead will be used for QT measurement. If the original primary lead becomes unavailable or is changed, QT measurement will continue with the new primary lead.
• Single-Lead mode - a single lead selected from all available leads (except the augmented leads) will be used for QT measurement. QT measurement will stop if the selected lead becomes unavailable.
To select the mode,
1
Select the QT numeric to enter the
Setup QT Analysis
window.
2
Select QT Lead and select
All
,
Primary Lead
or one of the available single leads.
When using the All Leads mode, make sure when you compare QT values that they are based on the same set of leads.
115
6 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring
QT Alarms
Changing the lead(s) used for QT measurements will not cause the baseline to be reset.
QT Alarms
There are two QT alarms, QTc high limit alarm and
ΔQTc high alarm. The QTc high limit alarm is generated when the QTc value exceeds the set limit for more than 5 minutes. The
ΔQTc alarm is generated when the difference between the current value and the baseline value exceeds the set limit for more than 5 minutes.
The
Cannot Analyze QT
INOP and the
?
will be displayed when no QT measurement could be calculated for 10 minutes. Up to this time the previous valid value will be displayed.
Switching Individual QTc Alarms On and Off
Each QTc alarm can be switched off individually.
♦
To switch an alarm on or off, in the
Setup QT Analysis
menu, select
QTc Alarm
or
Δ
QTc
Alarm
to toggle between
On
and
Off
.
Changing QTc Alarm Limits
Set the high alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical condition, unit protocols, physician orders or medication specified limits.
1
2
3
In the
Setup QT Analysis
menu, select
High Limit
.
Select the appropriate setting.
Select
Δ
High Limit
.
4
Select the appropriate setting.
Setting The QT Baseline
In order to quantify changes in the QTc value, you can set a QTc baseline. For example to assess the effect of medication on the QT interval you can set the current value as the baseline before you begin medication. This baseline will then be used to calculate the
ΔQTc value.
To set the baseline,
♦
In the
Setup QT Analysis
menu, select
Set QT Baseline
and set the value.
If no baseline has been set for this patient, the first five minute value after the start of monitoring is automatically set as baseline. If you set a new baseline the previous baseline is discarded. As the
ΔQTc alarm is based on the difference between the baseline and the current value, setting an inappropriate new baseline may prevent a
ΔQTc alarm from being generated. Discharging a patient clears the baseline.
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off
♦
To switch all QT monitoring on or off, in the
Setup QT Analysis
menu, select
QT Analys.
to switch between On and Off.
116
7
7
Monitoring Pulse Rate
The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the heart in beats per minute (bpm). You can display a pulse from any measured SpO
2
signal (pleth wave), or any arterial pressure (P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, UAP, FAP, BAP: see the pressure section for an explanation of the pressure labels). The displayed pulse numeric is labeled and color-coded to match its source wave. If the pulse numeric is not displayed, see the
Setup Pulse
menu to check whether it is switched on.
Entering the Setup Pulse Menu
If a pulse numeric is displayed on the screen, select it to enter the
Setup Pulse (Pulse Source)
menu. If no pulse numeric is visible, in the
Setup SpO
2
menu or a
Setup
arterial pressure menu, select
Pulse
(Pulse Source).
System Pulse Source
The currently selected system pulse source is shown in the setup menus of the pulse source measurements. The pulse rate chosen as system pulse:
• is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select pulse as the active alarm source
• is sent via the network to the Information Center, if available
• is trended in the HighRes Trends and stored in the monitor’s databases.
To define which pulse rate is used as system pulse,
1
In the
Setup Pulse
menu, select
SystemPulse
.
2
Select one of the SpO
2
or arterial pressure labels from the pop-up list, or select Auto.
If you select Auto, the monitor automatically chooses a pulse rate to be used as system pulse. It looks through the list from top to bottom and activates the first pulse rate that is switched on and available.
If your selected pulse source measurement becomes unavailable or is switched off, the monitor will use the next measurement from the list as system pulse until the selected pulse source measurement becomes available again.
117
7 Monitoring Pulse Rate
Switching Pulse On and Off
Switching Pulse On and Off
To switch a particular pulse numeric on or off, enter the Setup Pulse menu via the measurement setup menu or wave menu of the pulse source. For example, to switch an SpO
2
pulse numeric on or off,
1
Enter the Setup Pulse menu by selecting the Pulse numeric or by selecting Pulse in the
Setup SpO2
menu.
2
In the Setup Pulse menu, select Pulse (Pulse Source) to toggle between On and
Off
.
Using Pulse Alarms
You can change pulse rate alarm limits in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu which can be accessed from the Setup Pulse menu or the Setup ECG menu by selecting AlarmSrc (xxx) where xxx is the current alarm source. Changing the alarm limits for a specific Pulse numeric changes the alarm limits for all pulse rate alarms and heart rate alarms.
Pulse alarms are only generated when the active alarm source is set to Pulse, a pulse source is set as system pulse and pulse alarms are switched on.
Selecting the Active Alarm Source: ECG or Pulse?
In most cases the HR and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source, select
AlarmSrc
in the
ECG/Pulse
Alarms menu, then select
• ECG: if you want the HR to be the alarm source for HR/Pulse.
• Pulse: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm your choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse as the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off.
• Auto: If the AlarmSrc is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG measurement as the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one
ECG lead can be measured without an INOP condition.
The monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source if:
– a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured and
– a Pulse source is switched on and available,
The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse. While
Pulse is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses HR as alarm source.
Note: If ECG is switched off, the monitor will always change to Pulse as alarm source, if a Pulse is available. One exception to this rule can arise when you have a telemetry device paired with your monitor. The monitor ECG is then deactivated but the monitor may be configured to allow only ECG as the active alarm source. In this case the monitor will not switch to Pulse as alarm source and Pulse will not be available as a selection in the
ECG/Pulse
Alarms menu.
118
Using Pulse Alarms
7 Monitoring Pulse Rate
WARNING
Selecting Pulse as the active alarm source for HR/Pulse switches off the arrhythmia alarms listed in the
section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 91, and the heart rate alarms. This is
indicated by the message All ECG Alarms Off (unless this has been configured off for your monitor), and the crossed-out alarm symbol beside the ECG heart rate numeric.
High and low pulse rate and extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms from pulse are active.
Alarm Source Selection Disabled
If Alarm Source Selection is disabled, you cannot change the alarm source. If you try to change the source, the monitor displays the message
To activate enter Config and enable
AlarmSourceSel
. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Changing HR/Pulse Alarm Limits
As Pulse and HR share the same high and low alarm limits, if you change the alarm limit in the
Setup Pulse
menu, the high or low alarm limits for HR in the
Setup ECG
menu change automatically, and vice versa. The only exceptions are caused by a low limit clamp for each measurement: the lowest value for Pulse when derived from SpO
2
Pressure 25 bpm.
is 30 bpm; for HR 15 bpm, and for
Extreme Alarm Limits
The extreme rate alarms, Extreme Tachy and Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm source, either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value to the high and low alarm limits. You need to know what value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦
To see the values added to the high and low limit alarms to create the extreme rate alarms for your monitor, in the Setup ECG menu, see the menu items Extr.Tachy and Extr.Brady.
QRS Tone
The active alarm source is also used as a source for the QRS tone. You can change the tone volume in the
Setup SpO2
and
Setup ECG
menus and the QRS tone modulation in the
Setup SpO2
menu.
119
7 Monitoring Pulse Rate
Using Pulse Alarms
120
8
8
Monitoring Respiration Rate
(Resp)
For the respiratory measurement (Resp), the monitor measures the thoracic impedance between two
ECG electrodes on the patient’s chest. Changes in the impedance due to thoracic movement produce the Resp waveform on the monitor screen. The monitor counts the waveform cycles to calculate the respiration rate (RR).
Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp
Correct patient skin preparation techniques for electrode placement are important for Resp measurement: you will find this information in the chapter on ECG.
The Resp measurement uses the standard ECG cable sets and lead placements. You can use any of the different types of ECG cable sets - 3-lead, 5-lead, 6-lead or 10-lead, using either standard or EASI™ placement - to measure Resp, as long as you use ICU ECG cables.
The Resp signal is always measured between two of the ECG electrodes. If you are using standard ECG electrode placement, Resp is measured between the RA and LL electrodes. If you are using EASI™
ECG electrode placement, Resp is measured between the I and A electrodes.
Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp
If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize placement of the two electrodes between which Resp will be measured for some patients. Repositioning
ECG electrodes from standard positions, especially when you are using EASI™ ECG electrode placement, results in changes in the ECG waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia interpretation.
Cardiac Overlay
Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp electrodes pick up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrode placement can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory electrodes. This is particularly important for neonates.
121
Understanding the Resp Display
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
Lateral Chest Expansion
Some patients, especially neonates, expand their chests laterally. In these cases it is best to place the two respiratory electrodes in the right midaxillary and left lateral chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of breathing movement to optimize the respiratory wave.
Abdominal Breathing
Some patients with restricted chest movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion to optimize the respiratory wave.
Understanding the Resp Display
The Resp measurement is displayed on the monitor as a continuous wave and a numeric respiration rate. If the detected respiration rate is close to the heart rate, this is indicated by the text
HR = RR
next to the respiration wave if you are in manual monitoring mode. Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.
1 Ohm calibration bar
Manually-set Resp detection level
Resp numeric and label
Resp
RR
22
1 Ohm
Changing Resp Detection Modes
The Resp detection level can be set either automatically or manually.
♦
To change the resp detection mode, in the between the settings.
Setup Resp
menu, select
Auto/Man
to toggle
Auto Detection Mode
In Auto Detection Mode, the monitor adjusts the detection level automatically, depending on the wave height and the presence of cardiac artifact. Note that in Auto Detection Mode,
• the detection level (a dotted line) is not displayed on the waveform,
122
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
• the algorithm expects a heart rate and therefore needs at least 3 electrodes attached to the patient. If you are monitoring respiration with only two electrodes, the detection algorithm becomes less sensitive which may result in reduced breath detection performance.
Use Auto Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate is not close to the heart rate
• breathing is spontaneous, with or without continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP)
• patients are ventilated, except patients with Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation (IMV).
Manual Detection Mode
In Manual Detection Mode you must set the Resp detection level.
♦
In the
Setup Resp
menu, select
Manual Up
or
Manual Down
. Use the dotted detection level line in the Resp waveform to determine when the desired level is reached.
Once set, the detection level will not adapt automatically to different respiration depths. It is important to remember that if the depth of breathing changes, you may need to change the detection level.
Use Manual Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate and the heart rate are close.
• patients have Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation.
• respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.
Resp Detection Modes and Cardiac Overlay
In Auto Detection Mode: If you are monitoring Resp and the ECG is switched off, the monitor cannot compare the ECG and Resp rates to detect cardiac overlay. The respiration detection level is automatically set higher to prevent the detection of cardiac overlay as respiration.
In Manual Detection Mode: Cardiac overlay can in certain situations trigger the respiration counter.
This may lead to a false indication of a high respiration rate or an undetected apnea condition. If you suspect that cardiac overlay is being registered as breathing activity, raise the detection level above the zone of cardiac overlay. If the Resp wave is so small that raising the detection level is not possible, you
may need to optimize the electrode placement as described in the section ”Lateral Chest Expansion”.
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave
WARNING
When monitoring in Manual Detection Mode, make sure to check the respiration detection level after you have increased or decreased the size of the respiration wave.
♦
In the
Setup Resp
menu, select
Size Up
to increase the size of the wave or
Size Down
to decrease it.
123
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave
Resp waveforms are usually viewed at a slower speed than other waveforms. For this reason, the Resp measurement has its own speed control and is not affected by the wave speed settings of the other measurements.
♦
Select the Resp wave to enter the
Resp Wave
menu, then select
Change Speed
. Choose the required speed from the pop-up list. This defines the speed at which the wave is drawn across the screen in millimeters per second (mm/s).
Using Resp Alarms
Resp alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits can be changed just like other measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms chapter.
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The apnea alarm delay time defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the indication of the apnea alarm.
1
2
In the
Setup Resp
menu, select
Select the appropriate setting.
Apnea
Time
.
Resp Safety Information
WARNING
Respiration detection level If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection mode, it may not be possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection level too low, the monitor is more likely to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the case of apnea.
Apnea The respiration measurement does not recognize obstructive and mixed apneas — it only indicates an alarm when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath.
The safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea, particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.
Interference If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated
Immunity 3V/m), field strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various frequencies. Therefore it is recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity to the respiration measurement unit.
Resp Accessories To monitor respiration, use only the non-OR ECG accessories listed in the Resp section of the accessories chapter. You cannot measure respiration if you are using an orange OR ECG cable set. This is because of the higher internal impedance of the OR cable set, required for use if electro-surgery is being performed.
124
Resp Safety Information
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
Rate adaptive pacemakers: Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Volume may occasionally react on the Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination of the Resp value and execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp measurement can prevent this.
125
8 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)
Resp Safety Information
126
9
9
Monitoring SpO
2
Philips pulse oximetry uses a motion-tolerant signal processing algorithm, based on Fourier artefact suppression technology (FAST). It provides four measurements:
• Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO
2
) - percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin (functional arterial oxygen saturation).
• Pleth waveform - visual indication of patient’s pulse.
• Pulse rate (derived from pleth wave) - detected pulsations per minute.
• Perfusion indicator - numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial pulsation.
The monitors are also compatible with SpO
2 technologies from other manufacturers. Please refer to the instructions for use provided with these devices for further information.
SpO
2
Sensors
Familiarize yourself with the instructions for use supplied with your sensor before using it. In particular, check that the sensor being used is appropriate for your patient category and application site.
CAUTION
Do not use OxiCliq disposable sensors in a high humidity environment, such as in neonatal incubators or in the presence of fluids, which may contaminate sensor and electrical connections causing unreliable or intermittent measurements. Do not use disposable sensors on patients who have allergic reactions to the adhesive.
Applying the Sensor
1
2
3
Follow the SpO
2
sensor’s instructions for use, adhering to all warnings and cautions.
Remove colored nail polish from the application site.
Apply the sensor to the patient. The application site should match the sensor size so that the sensor can neither fall off, nor apply excessive pressure. When using the M1195A Infant Finger Sensor, select a finger or toe with a diameter of between 7 and 8 mm (0.27” and 0.31”). When applying a
M1193A neonatal sensor do not overtighten the strap.
127
9 Monitoring SpO
2
Connecting SpO
2
Cables
4
Check that the light emitter and the photodetector are directly opposite each other. All light from the emitter must pass through the patient’s tissue.
WARNING
Loose Sensor: If a sensor is too loose, it might compromise the optical alignment or fall off. If it is too tight, for example because the application site is too large or becomes too large due to edema, excessive pressure may be applied. This can result in venous congestion distal from the application site, leading to interstitial edema, hypoxemia and tissue malnutrition. Skin irritations or lacerations may occur as a result of the sensor being attached to one location for too long. To avoid skin irritations and lacerations, periodically inspect the sensor application site and change the application site at least every four hours.
Venous Pulsation: Do not apply sensor too tightly as this results in venous pulsation which may severely obstruct circulation and lead to inaccurate measurements.
Ambient Temperature: At elevated ambient temperatures be careful with measurement sites that are not well perfused, because this can cause severe burns after prolonged application. All listed sensors operate without risk of exceeding 41
°
C on the skin if the initial skin temperature does not exceed
35
°
C.
Extremities to Avoid: Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, or intravascular venous infusion line.
Connecting SpO
2
Cables
♦
Connect the sensor cable to the color-coded socket on the monitor. You can connect some Philips sensors directly to the monitor. For other sensors, use the corresponding adapter cable.
CAUTION
Extension cables: Do not use more than one extension cable (M1941A). Do not use an extension cable with Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates “long” cable version).
Electrical Interference: Position the sensor cable and connector away from power cables, to avoid electrical interference.
Humidity: For neonatal patients, make sure that all sensor connectors and adapter cable connectors are outside the incubator. The humid atmosphere inside can cause inaccurate measurements.
Measuring SpO
2
1
2
Select the correct patient category setting (adult/pediatric and neonatal), as this is used to optimize the calculation of the SpO
2
and pulse numerics.
During measurement, ensure that the application site:
– has a pulsatile flow, ideally with a perfusion indicator value above 1.0.
– has not changed in its thickness (for example, due to edema), causing an improper fit of the sensor.
128
Assessing a Suspicious SpO
2
Reading
9 Monitoring SpO
2
WARNING
Inspect the application site every two to three hours to ensure skin quality and correct optical alignment. If the skin quality changes, move the sensor to another site. Change the application site at least every four hours.
CAUTION
Injected dyes such as methylene blue, or intravascular dyshemoglobins such as methemoglobin and carboxyhemoglobin may lead to inaccurate measurements.
Interference can be caused by:
• High levels of ambient light or strobe lights or flashing lights (such as fire alarm lamps). (Hint: cover application site with opaque material.)
• Electromagnetic interference.
• Excessive patient movement and vibration.
Assessing a Suspicious SpO
2
Reading
Traditionally, pulse rate from SpO
2
was compared with heart rate from ECG to confirm the validity of the SpO
2
reading. With newer algorithms, such as FAST-SpO because the correct calculation of SpO
2
2
, this is no longer a valid criteria
is not directly linked to the correct detection of each pulse.
When pulse rate is very low, or strong arrhythmia is present, the SpO
2
/Pleth pulse rate may differ from the heart rate calculated from ECG but this does not indicate an inaccurate SpO
2
value.
If you doubt the measured SpO
2
, use the pleth wave and perfusion indicator instead to assess the signal quality.
N O T E
With pulse oximetry, sensor movement, ambient light (especially strobe lights or flashing lights) or electromagnetic interference can give unexpected intermittent readings when the sensor is not attached to a patient. Especially bandage-type sensor designs are sensitive to minimal sensor movement that might occur when the sensor is dangling.
129
9 Monitoring SpO
2
Understanding SpO
2
Alarms
Understanding SpO
2
Alarms
This refers to SpO
2
specific alarms. See the Alarms section for general alarm information. SpO
2
offers high and low limit alarms, and a high priority desat alarm. You cannot set the low alarm limit below the desat alarm limit.
CAUTION
If you measure SpO
2
on a limb that has an inflated NBP cuff, a non-pulsatile SpO
2
INOP can occur.
If the monitor is configured to suppress this alarm there may be a delay of up to 60 seconds in indicating critical patient status, such as sudden pulse loss or hypoxia.
Alarm Delays
There is a delay between a physiological event at the measurement site and the corresponding alarm at the monitor. This delay has two components:
• The time between the occurrence of the physiological event and when this event is represented by the displayed numerical values. This delay depends on the algorithmic processing and the configured averaging time. The longer the averaging time configured, the longer the time needed until the numerical values reflect the physiological event.
• The time between the displayed numerical values crossing an alarm limit and the alarm indication on the monitor. This delay is the combination of the configured alarm delay time plus the general
system delay time (see “Monitor Performance Specifications” on page 221).
Adjusting the Alarm Limits
In the Setup SpO
2
menu:
• Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the high alarm limit from the popup list that opens.
• Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
WARNING
High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a consideration do NOT set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the alarm off.
Adjusting the Desat Limit Alarm
The Desat alarm is a high priority (red) alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in oxygen saturation.
1
2
In the
Setup SpO
2
menu, select
DesatLimit
.
Adjust the limit.
130
Pleth Wave
9 Monitoring SpO
2
Pleth Wave
The Pleth wave is autoscaled to maximum display size. It decreases only when the signal quality becomes marginal. It is NOT directly proportional to the pulse volume. If you need an indication of change in pulse volume, use the perfusion indicator.
minimum size for reliable SpO
2
value
Perfusion Numeric
The perfusion numeric (Perf) gives a value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by the pulsating arterial blood flow.
As pulse oximetry is based on the pulsatile nature of the signal, you can also use the perfusion numeric as a quality indicator for the SpO
2
measurement. Above 1 is optimal, between 0.3-1 is acceptable.
Below 0.3 is marginal; reposition the sensor or find a better site.
Perfusion Change indicator
The perfusion change indicator is a graphic symbol which shows the change in the perfusion value, relative to a reference value which you can set.
To set the current perfusion value as the reference value:
♦
In the Setup SpO2 menu, select Set Perf Ref..
When a reference value has been set, the perfusion change indicator is displayed next to the perfusion numeric.
Perfusion change indicator
Setting SpO
2
/Pleth as Pulse Source
1
2
In the
Setup SpO2
menu, select
Pulse (SpO
2
)
to enter the
Setup Pulse
menu.
In the
Setup Pulse
menu, select
SystemPls
and select
SpO
2
from the pop-up list.
131
9 Monitoring SpO
2
Setting Up Tone Modulation
Setting Up Tone Modulation
If tone modulation is on, the QRS tone pitch lowers when the SpO
2
level drops. Remember, the QRS tone is derived from either heart rate or pulse depending on which is currently selected as the active alarm source.
♦
In the
Setup SpO
2
menu
,
select
Tone Mod.
to toggle between
Yes
(for on) and
No
(for off ).
Tone modulation is licensed under US patent US 4,653,498 from Nellcor Puritan Bennett
Incorporated, a Tyco Healthcare company.
Setting the QRS Volume
♦
In the
Setup SpO
2
menu, select
QRS Volume
and set the appropriate QRS tone volume.
132
10
10
Monitoring NBP
This monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring NBP. In adult and pediatric mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the American National
Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements
(depending on the configuration) in a representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference, the fifth Korotkoff sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-
1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial measurements in a representative patient population.
The NBP measurement is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery and during the discharge of a cardiac defibrillator according to IEC 601-2-30:1999/EN 60601-2-30:2000.
A physician must determine the clinical significance of the NBP information.
Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement
Oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the occluding cuff as the cuff deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse breaks through the occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase in amplitude, reach a maximum (which approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish.
Studies show that, especially in critical cases (arrhythmia, vasoconstriction, hypertension, shock), oscillometric devices are more accurate and consistent than devices using other noninvasive measuring techniques.
WARNING
Patient Category: Select the correct patient category setting for your patient. Do not apply the higher adult inflation, overpressure limits and measurement duration to neonatal patients.
Intravenous infusion: Do not use the NBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial catheter in place. This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff inflation.
Skin Damage: Do not measure NBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin damage has occurred or is expected.
Unattended measurement: Use clinical judgement to decide whether to perform frequent unattended blood pressure measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.
133
10 Monitoring NBP
Preparing to Measure NBP
CAUTION
If you spill liquid onto the equipment or accessories, particularly if there is a chance that it can get inside the tubing or the measurement device, contact your service personnel.
Measurement Limitations
Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 300 bpm, or if the patient is on a heart-lung machine.
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible:
• if a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect
• with cardiac arrhythmias
• with excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions
• with rapid blood pressure changes
• with severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries
• with obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the artery
• on an edematous extremity.
Measurement Methods
There are three methods of measuring NBP:
• Manual - measurement on demand.
• Auto - continually repeated measurements (between one and 120 minute adjustable interval).
• Sequence - up to four measurement cycles which will run consecutively, with number of measurements and interval between them configurable for each cycle.
• STAT - rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then the monitor returns to the previous mode. Use only on supervised patients.
Reference Method
The NBP measurement reference method can be Auscultatory (manual cuff) or Invasive (intraarterial). For further information, see the Application Note on NBP supplied on the monitor documentation CD-ROM.
In Adult and Pediatric mode to check the current setting, select Main Setup -> Measurements
-> NBP, and check whether the Reference setting is set to Auscult. or Invasive. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
In Neonatal mode, to comply with safety standards, invasive is always used as the reference method.
This setting cannot be changed and is not visible in any operating mode.
Preparing to Measure NBP
1
Connect the cuff to the air tubing.
134
Preparing to Measure NBP
10 Monitoring NBP
2
3
4
Plug the air tubing into the red NBP connector. Avoid compression or restriction of pressure tubes.
Air must pass unrestricted through the tubing.
Make sure that you are using a Philips-approved correct sized cuff and that the bladder inside the cover is not folded or twisted.
A wrong cuff size, and a folded or twisted bladder, can cause inaccurate measurements. The width of the cuff should be in the range from 37% to 47% of the limb circumference. The inflatable part of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 80% of the limb.
Apply the cuff to a limb at the same level as the patient’s heart. If it is not, you must use the measurement correction formula to correct the measurement.
The marking on the cuff must match the artery location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of the extremities. Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the extremity of the cuffed limb for normal color, warmth and sensitivity. If the skin quality changes, or if the extremity circulation is being affected, move the cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements immediately. Check more frequently when making automatic or stat measurements.
Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level
To correct the measurement if the limb is not at heart level, to the displayed value add 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each centimeter higher or add 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch higher.
deduct 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each centimeter lower or deduct 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch lower.
Understanding the NBP Numerics
Alarm source
Measurement Mode
Sys.
NBP mmHg
Auto
Auto
60min
17:15
Mean
120
90
Timestamp/
Timer
Alarm limits Systolic
Diastolic
Mean pressure
Depending on the NBP numeric size, not all elements may be visible. Your monitor may be configured to display only the systolic and diastolic values.
Alarm Sources if you have parallel alarm sources, the sources are displayed instead of the alarm limits.
NBP Timestamp depending on the configured NBP Time setting, the time shown beside the NBP numeric can be:
– Meas Time: the time of the most recent NBP measurement, or
– Next Meas: the time until the next measurement in an automatic series, displayed with a graphic representation of the remaining time, as shown here.
135
10 Monitoring NBP
Starting and Stopping Measurements
During measurements the cuff pressure is displayed instead of the units and the repeat time. An early systolic value gives you a preliminary indication of the systolic blood pressure during measurement.
Starting and Stopping Measurements
Use the Setup menu or SmartKeys to start and stop measurements.
CAUTION
Use clinical judgement to decide whether to perform repeated series of STAT measurements because of the risk of purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in the limb with the cuff.
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition
Time
1
2
In the
Setup NBP
menu, select
Auto/Man
and select
Auto
from the pop-up menu.
For an automatic measurement, select
Repeat
and set the time interval between two measurements.
Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The
Sequence
1
2
3
4
In the
Setup NBP
menu, select
Auto/Man
and select
Sequence
from the pop-up menu.
Select Setup Sequence to open the Setup NBP Sequence window.
Up to four measurement cycles can be setup which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can set the number of measurements and the interval between them. If you want to run less than four cycles in a sequence, you can set the number of measurements for one or more cycles to Off.
Select each sequence in turn and select the number of measurements and the time interval between the measurements.
To have measurements continue after the sequence, set the number of measurements for your last cycle to Continuous and this cycle will run indefinitely.
CAUTION
Be aware that, if none of the cycles are set to Continuous, NBP monitoring will end after the last measurement of the cycle.
When the NBP measurement mode is set to Sequence, the repetition time for Auto mode cannot be changed.
Choosing the NBP Alarm Source
You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in parallel. Only one alarm is given, with the priority of mean, systolic, diastolic.
In the
Setup NBP
menu, select
Al. from
and choose from:
136
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off
10 Monitoring NBP
Menu option Pressure value monitored
Sys.
Dia.
Mean
Sys&Dia
Dia&Mean
Sys&Mean
S&D&M systolic diastolic mean systolic and diastolic in parallel diastolic and mean in parallel systolic and mean in parallel all three pressures in parallel
If mean is not selected as alarm source (Sys, Dia, or Sys&Dia selected), but the monitor can only derive a mean value, mean alarms will nevertheless be announced using the most recent mean alarm limits.
When no value can be derived an NBP MEASURE FAILED INOP will be displayed.
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off
In the process of making the NBP measurement, a pulse value can be derived and displayed. The pulse value is displayed together with the time the measurement was made. After one hour the value becomes invalid. There are no alarms associated with pulse from NBP.
To switch the display of the pulse value on or off:
♦
In the
NBP Setup
menu select Pulse (NBP).
Pulse from NBP
NBP
Sys.
Pulse Auto
Assisting Venous Puncture
You can use the NBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure. The cuff deflates automatically after a set time (adult/pediatric 170 seconds, neonatal 85 seconds) if you do not deflate it.
1
2
In the
NBP Setup
menu select
VeniPuncture
.
Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
3
Reselect
VeniPuncture
to deflate the cuff.
During measurement, the NBP display shows the inflation pressure of the cuff and the remaining time in venous puncture mode.
137
10 Monitoring NBP
Calibrating NBP
Cuff pressure
NBP
Venous puncture measurement mode
Time left in venous puncture mode
(60)
VP
01:45
Calibrating NBP
NBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure transducers must be verified and calibrated, if necessary, at least once every two years by a qualified service professional. See the Service Guide for details.
138
11
11
Monitoring Temperature
WARNING
Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor is running on battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the external power supply (M8023A).
You can measure temperature using the built-in temperature measurement (optional), or one of the
MMS extensions.
Temp measurement automatically switches on when you connect a probe. You can switch the measurement off manually.
Making a Temp Measurement
1
2
3
Select the correct type and size of probe for your patient.
If you are using a disposable probe, connect the probe to the temperature cable.
Plug the probe or temperature cable into the temperature connector socket.
Temp connector socket
4
5
6
Apply the probe to the patient. You are advised to use a protective rubber cover on rectal probes.
Select an appropriate temperature label.
Check that the alarm settings (on or off, high and low limits) are appropriate for this patient and this type of temperature measurement.
139
11 Monitoring Temperature
Calculating Temp Difference
WARNING
Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.
Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring
Tell the monitor which temperature you want to monitor by selecting its temperature label. The label is a unique identifier for each type of temperature. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that label’s stored color and alarm settings.
1
2
In the
Setup <Temp>
menu, select
Label.
Select the appropriate label from the list.
Temp
Tart
Tcore
Tesoph non-specific temperature label.
arterial temperature core temperature esophageal temperature
Trect
Tskin
Tven
Tnaso rectal temperature skin temperature venous temperature nasopharyngeal temperature
Extended Temperature Label Set
The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more information.
T1, T2, T3, T4
Tamb
Tcereb
Ttymp
Tvesic
Non-specific temperature labels ambient temperature cerebral temperature tympanic temperature vesical temperature
Calculating Temp Difference
The monitor can calculate and display the difference between two temperature values by subtracting the second value from the first. The difference is labeled
Δ
Temp
.
1
2
In the
Setup Main
menu, select
Measurements
.
In the
Setup
Δ
Temp
menu, select
First Temp
.
3
Label the measurement source as appropriate.
4
5
Select
Second Temp
.
Label the measurement source as appropriate.
140
12
12
Monitoring Invasive Pressure
WARNING
Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor is running on battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the external power supply (M8023A).
CAUTION
Do not use the MP2 in combination with other monitors using an M1006A pressure module and the
HP1290A pressure transducer. This may cause interference on the respiration or invasive pressure signals.
You can measure pressure using the monitor’s built-in pressure measurement (optional), or one of the
MMS extensions.
Setting up the Pressure Measurement
1
Plug in the pressure cable.
Pressure connector
2
3
Prepare the flush solution.
Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transducer and stopcocks are free of air bubbles.
141
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Setting up the Pressure Measurement
WARNING
If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air bubbles may lead to a wrong pressure reading.
4
5
6
Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.
If you are using an infusion pressure cuff with the pressure line, attach the pressure cuff to the fluid to be infused. Inflate it according to your standard hospital procedure, then start the infusion.
Position the transducer so that it is level with the heart, approximately at the level of the midaxillary line.
WARNING
If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP, IC1 or IC2) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the top of the patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values.
Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring
Tell the monitor which pressure you want to monitor by selecting its pressure label. The label is a unique identifier for each type of pressure. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that label’s stored settings, for example color, wave scale and alarm settings. The label also determines which algorithm is used to process the pressure signal, so an incorrect label can lead to incorrect pressure values.
1
2
In the
Setup
<
Press>
menu, select
Label
.
Select the appropriate label from the list.
Label
ABP
ART
Ao
CVP
ICP
LAP
Description
Arterial blood pressure
Arterial blood pressure (alternative)
Aortic pressure
Central venous pressure
Intracranial pressure
Left atrial pressure
Label Description
P
PAP
RAP
UAP
UVP
Non-specific pressure label
Pulmonary artery pressure
Right atrial pressure
Umbilical arterial pressure
Umbilical venous pressure
Extended Pressure Label Set
The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more information.
142
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Label Description
BAP
FAP
Brachial arterial pressure
Femoral arterial pressure
IC1, IC2
Alternative intracranial pressures
P1, P2, P3, P4
Alternative non-specific pressure labels
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer
To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in accordance with your hospital policy (at least once per day). You must perform a zero:
• when you use a new transducer or tubing
• every time you reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor
• if you think the monitor’s pressure readings are not correct.
Zeroing ICP (or IC1/IC2)
Your hospital guidelines may require you to zero the ICP transducer less frequently than other transducers, due to the need for aseptic conditions. When you zero an ICP transducer, the zero values are automatically stored and you will not be prompted to repeat the zero procedure.
If you want to simultaneously zero all pressures except ICP, disconnect the ICP transducer from the monitor while zeroing. Reconnecting the transducer recalls the stored values.
WARNING
If you select the label ICP (or IC1/IC2), the measurement device uses the most recently stored zero.
Therefore, make sure you zeroed the transducer correctly in accordance with the transducer manufacturer’s instructions and your hospital policy. When you use a transducer that you cannot rezero after placement, ensure that you keep the measuring device with the patient so that you are certain you have the correct zero data for this patient.
Determining a Pressure’s Most Recent Zero
The monitor displays the most recent zero on the status line. If this has “timed-out” after you have performed a zero, redisplay the information in the status line by entering the pressure’s setup menu.
Zeroing a Pressure Measurement
WARNING
Invasive pressure alarms (and pulse alarms, if derived from invasive pressure) are temporarily suppressed until 30 seconds after the transducer finishes zeroing.
1
2
3
Turn off the stopcock to the patient.
Vent the transducer to atmospheric pressure, to compensate for the static and atmospheric pressure exerted on the transducer.
In the setup menu for the pressure, select
Zero <Press>
.
143
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Adjusting the Calibration Factor
4
When you see the message <
Press> zero done at <date and time>
on the status line,
(for example,
ABP zero done at 13 Mar 02 23.35
) close the stopcock to atmospheric pressure, and open the stopcock to the patient.
Zeroing All Pressures Simultaneously
WARNING
Before zeroing all pressures, make sure that all pressure transducers are vented to atmospheric pressure.
If you are measuring pressures with more than one measuring device, using the
Zero
SmartKey to initiate the zeroing calls up a list of all active pressures. Select the pressure you want to zero or select
All Press
to zero all pressures simultaneously.
Troubleshooting the Zero
The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful zero:
Message Corrective Action can’t zero; equipment malf.
The hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
can’t zero; excessive offset
Make sure the transducer is vented to air and try again. If this fails, the hardware may be faulty. Replace the adapter cable and try again. If it fails, replace the transducer and try again. If it still fails, contact your service personnel.
can’t zero - unstable signal can’t zero - no transducer
Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again. If this fails, exchange the adapter cable and try again. If this fails, exchange the transducer.
Make sure that the transducer is vented to air, not to the patient, and try again.
can’t zero; pulsat. pressure unable to zero - timed out
Try pressing the Zero key again. If this fails, replace the transducer and adapter cable and contact your service personnel.
switch <Press> on first
Pressure measurement is switched off. To switch it on, in the Setup Pressure menu, select the pressure’s label.
Adjusting the Calibration Factor
Each time you use a reusable transducer, compare the calibration factor written on your transducer with the calibration factor shown on the monitor. To ensure accurate measurement, they must be the same.
1
2
In the
Setup <Press>
menu, select
Cal. Factor
.
If the value here does
not
match that on the transducer, select the corresponding value from the list now in accordance with your hospital’s procedure.
To confirm you want to use the new calibration factor, select the Confirm popup.
144
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only
Use this when you want to see only the mean pressure.
♦
In the pressure’s setup menu, select
Mean Only
.
Toggle between
On
to display mean pressure value only, and
Off
to display all pressure values (systolic, diastolic and mean).
Changing the Pressure Wave Scale
1
2
Select the label of the pressure wave whose scale you want to set to enter the Setup menu.
In the Setup
<Press>
menu, (for example
ABP
) select
Scale
.
3
Select a value from the pop-up list:
– a positive value sets the top gridline. The bottom gridline is set at zero.
– a negative value sets the bottom gridline. The middle gridline is set at zero.
Optimizing the Waveform
♦
In the
Setup <Press>
menu, select
Optimum Scale
to let the monitor select the best minimum and maximum scales for the current wave.
Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression
Some clinical procedures may affect blood pressure, for example, a flush procedure or a blood sample.
Your monitor may be configured to suppress these non-physiological artifacts for a specified duration
(Artifact Suppression is configured to 30, 60, or 90 seconds). During artifact suppression, the monitor shows the INOP message <Pressure label> ARTIFACT, and a question mark is shown beside the pressure numerics. Pressure alarms and the Pulse Non-Pulsatile INOP are suppressed during the configured period. The CPP high alarm is not suppressed.
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source
WARNING
Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.
You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in parallel. Only one alarm is given at a time, in this order of priority: mean, systolic, diastolic.
♦
In the
Setup <Press>
menu, select
Al. from
and choose the source.
Menu option
Sys.
Dia.
Mean
Pressure value monitored
systolic diastolic mean
145
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source
♦
Menu option
Sys&Dia
Dia&Mean
Sys&Mean
Sys&Dia&Mean
Select and set the
Pressure value monitored
systolic and diastolic in parallel diastolic and mean in parallel systolic and mean in parallel all three pressures in parallel
High Limit
and
Low Limit
for the pressure(s) you have selected.
Extreme Alarm Limits
The extreme pressure alarms, Extreme High and Extreme Low, can be made available for your monitor in Configuration Mode and are additional to the standard High and Low limit alarms. They are generated by the active pressure alarm source, and are setup in Configuration Mode by adding a set value (the
Δ value) to the high and low alarm limits. This value can be set for each pressure label individually.
Extreme
Low Limit
Low
Limit
High
Limit
Extreme
High Limit
Δ Extreme Low Δ Extreme High
You need to know which values have been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦
To see the extreme pressure alarms set for your monitor, in the
Setup <Press>
menu, see the menu items
Δ
Extr. High
and
Δ
Extr. Low
.
The extreme pressure alarms are high priority, red alarms, marked *** in the alarm message.
146
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6
Depending on your monitor’s configuration, you may be able to perform a calibration in monitoring mode. Perform a mercury calibration when you use a new transducer, and at regular intervals according to your hospital policy. You require:
• standard sphygmomanometer.
• sterile 10cc syringe with heparinised solution.
• 3-way stopcock.
• approximately 25cm of tubing.
Making the Pressure Calibration
WARNING
Never perform the invasive pressure calibration while a patient is being monitored.
1
2
Zero the transducer.
Connect the syringe and manometer.
a. Attach the tubing to the manometer.
b. Connect the 3-way stopcock to the stopcock that is not connected to the patient catheter when you measure a patient.
c. Attach the syringe to one port and the manometer tubing to the other port.
d. Open the port to the manometer.
tubing to manometer
Syringe with heparinised solution
Patient connection stoppered
Off
PRESS M1006A
T
PRESS ZERO
Pressure connector
12
PIN on monitor
3
4
Move the syringe barrel in and raise the mercury to 200mmHg (30kPa). 200mmHg is the recommended calibration pressure.
In the
Setup Pressure
menu, select
Cal. Press
.
147
12 Monitoring Invasive Pressure
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion
5
6
7
8
9
Select the calibration pressure from the list, for example 200 mmHg.
Select
Confirm
to recalculate the calibration factor using the applied pressure.
When the monitor displays <
Press> calibration done at <date and time>
, remove the manometer tubing, syringe and extra stopcock. We recommend you replace the transducer dome and tubing with sterile ones.
Label the transducer with the calibration factor shown in the
Cal. Factor
field in the pressure’s setup menu.
Reconnect the patient and start measuring again.
Troubleshooting the Pressure Calibration
The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful calibration.
Message can’t calibr.; equipmt malfunction can’t calibrate;out of range can’t calibr.; no transd.
can’t cal.; unstable signal can’t calibr.;do zero first
Corrective Action
Contact your service department. The pressure hardware is faulty.
Make sure that you have selected the value for Cal. Press that you are applying to the transducer, and repeat the calibration.
Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again.
Make sure there are no disturbances to the transducer, and repeat the calibration.
No valid zero. Zero the transducer.
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion
The monitor can calculate the difference between mean arterial pressure and the intracranial pressure.
The difference is labeled CPP.
1
2
In the
Main Setup
menu, select
Measurements
.
In the
Setup CPP
menu, select
ABP
,
ART
,
Ao
,
BAP
or
FAP
as the arterial pressure source.
148
13
13
Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
WARNING
• Measurements from an MMS extension connected to the monitor are not available when the monitor is running on battery power. They are only available when the monitor is powered by the external power supply (M8023A).
• Only one CO
2
measurement at a time is supported.
Use the CO
2 measurement to monitor the patient’s respiratory status and to control patient ventilation.
There are two methods for measuring carbon dioxide in the patient’s airway:
• Mainstream measurement uses a CO
2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted into the patient’s breathing system. This method is available using the monitor’s built-in CO
2
measurement
(optional), the M3014A Capnography Extension or the M3016A Mainstream Extension.
• Sidestream measurement takes a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample flow from the patient’s airway and analyzes it with a remote CO
2 sensor. You can measure sidestream CO
2
using the monitor’s built-in CO
2
measurement (optional) or using the M3014A Capnography Extension, or the M3015A Microstream CO
2
Extension.
In both cases, the measurement principle is infrared transmission, where the intensity of infrared light passing the respiratory gas is measured with a photo detector. As some of the infrared light is absorbed by the CO
2 molecules, the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the measured CO
2
.
When using a wet ventilator circuit, monitor mainstream CO
2
if available, in preference to sidestream
CO
2
.
The partial pressure is calculated from the gas concentration by multiplying the concentration value with the ambient pressure.
The measurement provides:
• a CO
2
waveform.
• an end tidal CO
2
(etCO
2
) value: the CO
2
value measured at the end of the expiration phase.
• an inspired minimum CO
2
(imCO
2
): the smallest value measured during inspiration.
• an airway respiration rate (awRR): the number of breaths per minute, calculated from the CO
2 waveform.
149
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Measuring CO
2
using the CO
2
Option or M3014A
Depending on the
Max Hold
setting configured for your monitor, the etCO
2 the highest CO
2
numeric shows either
value measured within the configured time period (
Max Hold
set to
10 sec
or
20 sec
) or the etCO
2
numeric shows breath-to-breath value (
Max Hold
set to
Off
).
Refer to your Gas Module Instructions for Use, if you are using a Gas Module to monitor CO
2
.
WARNING
Correlation: The etCO
2
readings do not always correlate closely with paCO
2
, especially in neonatal patients and patients with pulmonary disease, pulmonary embolism or inappropriate ventilation.
Pharmaceuticals in aerosols: Do not measure CO
2
in the presence of pharmaceuticals in aerosols.
Explosion Hazard: Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, such as a flammable anesthetic mixture with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide.Use of the devices in such an environment may present an explosion hazard.
Failure of operation: if the measurement or a sensor fails to respond as described, do not use it until the situation has been corrected by qualified personnel.
Low etCO
2
values: Leakages in the breathing system or sampling system may cause the displayed etCO
2
values to be significantly too low. Always connect all components securely and check for leaks according to standard clinical procedures. Displacement of the nasal or combined nasal oral cannulas can cause lower than actual etCO
2
readings. Even with combined nasal oral cannulas, the etCO readings may be slightly lower than actual in patients breathing through the mouth only.
2
Measuring CO
2
using the CO
2
Option or M3014A
The monitor (with the CO
2
option) or the M3014A Capnography Extension measures partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient’s expired gas using the mainstream method or the sidestream method.
The mainstream CO
2
measurement can be used, with appropriate accessories, with intubated adult, pediatric and neonatal patients. The sidestream CO
2
measurement can be used, with appropriate accessories, with intubated and nonintubated adult, pediatric, infant and neonatal patients. With intubated patients, a sample of the respiratory gas is drawn from the patient’s breathing circuit through an airway adapter and a gas sampling tube. With non-intubated patients, the gas sample is drawn through a nasal or oral-nasal cannula.
WARNING
Altitude Setting: The monitor is not equipped with automatic barometric pressure compensation.
Before the CO
2
measurement is used for the first time, the altitude must be set to the correct value. An incorrect altitude setting will result in incorrect CO
2
readings. The CO
2
readings will typically deviate
5% for every 1000m difference.
Electrical Shock Hazard: Do not open the monitor or measurement device. Contact with exposed electrical components may cause electrical shock. Always turn off and remove power before cleaning the sensor, monitor or measurement device. Do not use a damaged sensor or one with exposed electrical contacts. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO
2
You must perform a zero as described in this procedure each time you use a new airway adapter.
1
Attach the sensor connector to the CO
2
connector on the monitor (when the optional CO
2 measurement is integrated) or on the extension.
150
Measuring CO
2
using the CO
2
Option or M3014A
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
2
Wait 2 minutes, allowing the sensor to reach its operating temperature and a stable thermal condition.
3
Choose the appropriate airway adapter and connect it to the sensor head. The airway adapter clicks into place when seated correctly.
4
To zero the sensor:
– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO
2 including the ventilator, the patient’s breath and your own.
– in the setup menu for the CO
2
, select
Start Zero
Cal
.
– When you see the message
Zero done at <date and time>
on the status line, the zero calibration is finished and you can begin monitoring.
5
Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Y-section.
WARNING
To prevent stress on the endotrachial tube, support the sensor and airway adapter.
Position sensor cables and tubing carefully to avoid entanglement or potential strangulation. Do not apply excessive tension to any cable.
Replace the airway adapter, if excessive moisture or secretions are observed in the tubing or if the CO
2 waveform changes unexpectedly without a change in patient status.
To avoid infection, use only sterilized, disinfected or disposable airway adapters.
Inspect the airway adapters prior to use. Do not use if airway adapter appears to have been damaged or broken. Observe airway adapter color coding for patient population.
Preparing to Measure Sidestream CO
2
You must perform a zero as described in this procedure each time the ambient temperature changes more than 10 °C (for example during transport).
1
Plug the sensor cable into the monitor’s CO
2 two minutes warm up time
input connector. Allow the sensor
151
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Measuring CO
2
using the CO
2
Option or M3014A
2
Connect the cannula, airway adapter, or sample line as appropriate, to the sensor. It will click into place when seated correctly.
3
To zero the sensor:
– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO
2 including the ventilator, the patient’s breath and your own.
– In the setup menu for the CO
2
, select
Start Zero Cal
.
– When you see the message
Zero done at <date and time>
on the status line, the zero calibration is finished and you can begin monitoring.
4
For intubated patients requiring an airway adapter: Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Ysection.
For intubated patients with an integrated airway adapter in the breathing
circuit.: Connect the male luer connector on the straight sample line to the female port on the airway adapter.
For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal cannula onto the patient.
For patients prone to mouth breathing use an oral-nasal cannula. Trim the oral sampling tip if necessary to fit the patient. It should extend down past the teeth and be positioned in the mouth opening. Remove the cannula from the patient if the tip needs to be trimmed.
For nasal or oral-nasal cannulas with oxygen delivery, place the cannula on the patient as shown then attach the oxygen supply tubing to the oxygen delivery system and set the prescribed oxygen flow.
WARNING
Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor before inserting the airway adapter into the breathing circuit. In reverse, always remove the airway adapter from the breathing circuit before removing the sensor.
CAUTION
Always disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or sample line from the sensor when not in use.
152
Measuring Mainstream CO
2 using M3016A
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Using the Sidestream Sensor Holder
The holder delivered with the sensor can be used to clamp the sensor onto an IV pole or a shelf.
1
2
Push the sensor into the holder until it clicks into position.
Clamp the holder onto an IV pole, a shelf or another appropriate location.
To remove the sensor from the holder, release the clip and pull the sensor out of the holder.
clip
Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING
Anesthetics: When using the sidestream CO
2
measurement on patients who are receiving or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the sidestream sensor at the outlet connector.
Measuring Mainstream CO
2
using M3016A
The M3016A Mainstream CO
2
Extension measures partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient’s expired gas using the mainstream method. When using the appropriate accessories you can use the mainstream CO
2
measurement with ventilated adults, pediatric and neonatal patients.
WARNING
Infra-red radiation: Do not expose the airway adapter or M1460A transducer to infra-red radiation during use. This may cause incorrect readings.
Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO
2
1
2
Attach the transducer connector to the CO
2
connector on the M3016A extension.
Wait 20 minutes, allowing the transducer to reach its operating temperature and a stable thermal condition.
3
Perform an accuracy check and then, if necessary, calibrate the transducer.
Checking Transducer Accuracy
WARNING
Check transducer accuracy at least once a week or if you doubt the CO
2
readings.
1
2
In
Setup CO2
menu, select
Cal. Mode
to switch on calibration mode.
Look at the calibration value displayed in the
Setup CO2
menu next to Start Cal 1:. Is it the same as the value on the calstick? If not, calibrate the transducer now.
153
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Measuring Mainstream CO
2 using M3016A
3
4
5
Place the transducer on the low cell of the calstick (labelled 0.0 mmHg or “ZERO”). The reading on the screen should be zero within ±1 mmHg within one minute.
Place the transducer on the high cell of the calstick. The reading on the screen should be within ±1 mmHg of the value on the calstick within one minute.
If both readings are in range, you can leave calibration mode and begin monitoring. If either of the readings is out of range, calibrate the transducer.
Calibrating the Transducer
1
Check that the windows on the calstick are clean and clear.
2
Place the transducer on one of the calstick cells and select Start Cal 1.
3
4
5
6
Enter the calibration value printed on the calstick then press
Confirm
to start calibration.
When the message CO2 CAL 1 done;Start CAL 2 cal appears, put the transducer on the other cell and select Start Cal 2 then press
Confirm
.
When you see the message CO2 cal done; leave Cal. Mode, calibration is complete.
Select
Cal Mode
to switch calibration mode off. You cannot monitor in calibration mode.
Attaching and Removing the CO
2
Transducer
Airway Adapter
1
Open the latch and place the transducer onto the airway adapter.
Place the airway adapter in the patient’s breathing circuit between the endotracheal tube and the Ypiece. You may see the
CO2 SENSOR
WARM UP
message until the transducer reaches operating temperature. Wait until this disappears before starting the measurement.
CO
2
Transducer
154
Measuring Microstream CO
2
using M3015A
2
To remove the transducer from the airway adapter, open the latch and pull out the airway adapter.
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
WARNING
To prevent stress on the endotrachial tube, support the transducer and airway adapter.
To avoid infection, use only sterilized airway adapters.
Measuring Microstream CO
2
using M3015A
The M3015A Microstream CO
2
Extension measures the partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient’s expired gas using Microstream technology.
In intubated patients, a sample of the respiratory gas is drawn from the patient’s breathing circuit through an airway adapter and a gas sampling tube. In non-intubated patients, the gas sample is drawn through a nasal or oral-nasal cannula.
When using the appropriate accessories, you can use the Microstream CO
2
measurement with adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients.
The M3015A is equipped with an automatic barometric pressure compensation.
Preparing to Measure Microstream CO
2
Use appropriate accessories for:
• the patient type (adult, pediatric or neonatal),
• the ventilation situation (including humidification)
• the duration - short term use, up to 24 hours (typically OR), or long term use (typically ICU).
All accessories are for single patient use only.
Using Microstream Accessories
M3015A can be operated with the special Microstream accessories only. Refer to the instructions for use provided with the accessory.
155
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Setting up Mainstream and Sidestream CO
2
For intubated patient with non-humidified ventilation, you can use a Microstream FilterLine set. For humidified ventilation, use a FilterLine H Set.
For non-intubated patients, the gas sample is taken through a Nasal FilterLine, or a Smart CapnoLine
(which is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine). In parallel to the measurement of the CO
2
, oxygen (O
2
) may be delivered to the patient to support gas exchange. This is done by using an O
2 or a Smart CapnoLine O
2
(a combined oral-nasal O
2
/CO
2
FilterLine).
/CO
2
FilterLine,
Using the FilterLine and Airway Adapter
1
Attach the female Luer connector to the CO
2
inlet connector on the extension by pushing the socket cover down and screwing the connector into place.
2
3
Check that the FilterLine is not kinked.
Change the FilterLine if a “CO
2
OCCLUSION” INOP appears on the monitor or if the readings become extremely erratic.
Disconnect the FilterLine during suctioning and nebulizing therapies.
Check the table in the Microstream CO
2
Accessories section of the Accessories chapter for typical usage times for the different Microstream accessories.
CO
2
values for non-intubated patients using Microstream accessories will always tend to be lower than for intubated patients. If values appear extremely low, check whether the patient is breathing through the mouth or whether one nostril is blocked
Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING
Anesthetics: When using the Microstream CO
2
measurement on patients who are receiving or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia machine/ ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the MMS Extension at the outlet connector.
Suppressing Zero Calibration
To prevent an automatic zero calibration from being started in the next five minutes,
♦ in the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
SmartKey, if configured.
No Zero for 5 Min
, or select the
Suppress CO2 Zero
Selecting
No Zero for 5 Min
or selecting the
Suppress CO2 Zero
SmartKey again before the timer has timed out resets the timer to five minutes, unless an AutoZero became due during the previous suppression.
Setting up Mainstream and Sidestream CO
2
These tasks are common to all CO
2
measurements except where otherwise noted.
Adjusting the CO
2
Wave Scale
1
In the
CO
2
Wave
menu or the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
Scale
.
156
Setting up Mainstream and Sidestream CO
2
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
2
Choose a suitable scale range from the pop-up list.
Setting up CO
2
Corrections
Temperature, water vapor in the patient’s breath, barometric pressure, and the proportions of O
2,
N
2
O and Helium in the mixture all influence CO
2
absorption. If values seem inaccurately high or low, check that the monitor is using the appropriate corrections.
Correction
Altitude
(M3014A only)
O
2
(M3014A only)
Humidity
Altitude is set during installation. The monitor automatically applies an appropriate correction.
In the
Setup CO2
menu, select
Oxy. Corr.
and select a value between 0% and
100%, the default value is 16% (expired O
2
). If you are not measuring the expired O
2 estimate it by subtracting
5% from the inspired O
2
.
,
At installation, the monitor is configured to automatically apply either
Body Temperature
Pressure Saturated (BTPS) or Standard Temperature Pressure Dry (STPD). To see which, go to the
Setup CO2
menu, and scroll down to look at
HUM Corr..
N
2
O
(M3016A mainstream and M3015A microstream only)
In the
Setup CO2
menu, select
N2O Corr.
and turn on or off. If N
2 the ventilation gas mixture, you must turn this on.
O is present in
If the N
2
O correction is not available in the
Setup CO2
measurement in your MMS Extension does not require N with
Gas Corr.
(see below).
2 menu, the CO
2
O correction or it is setup
Gas
(M3014A only)
In the
Setup CO2
menu, select
Gas Corr.
and select Helium, N2O or turn off. If
Helium or N
2
O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must make the appropriate selection.
Agent
(M3014A only)
If the Gas correction is not available in the
Setup CO2
menu, the CO
2 in your MMS Extension does not require N
2 correction is setup with
N2O Corr.
(see above).
measurement
O or Helium correction or the N
2
O
In the
Setup CO2
menu, select
Agt. Corr.
and select the concentration of the anesthetic agent (between 0.0% and 20.0%). If an anesthetic agent is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must select the appropriate concentration.
Suppressing Sampling (not Mainstream CO
2
)
To temporarily stop sampling,
♦ in the
Setup CO
available.
2
menu, select
Pump 15min Off
or use the
CO2 Pump Off
SmartKey if
Selecting
Pump 15Min Off
again before fifteen minutes have passed resets the timer to fifteen minutes.
To re-start the pump,
♦ in the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
Pump On
.
157
13 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide
Setting up Mainstream and Sidestream CO
2
Changing CO
2
Alarms
This refers to CO
2
specific alarms. See the Alarms section for general alarm information.
You change CO
2
alarm settings in the
Setup CO
2
menu.
To switch
etCO
2
alarms on and off:
♦
Select
etCO
2
Alarms
and toggle between
On
and
Off
.
To change the
etCO
2
alarm limits:
• Touch the high limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the high alarm limit from the popup list that opens.
• Touch the low limit on the alarm limits menu button. Choose the low alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
To change the imCO
2
high limit:
♦
Select
imCO
2
High
and choose the high alarm limit from the pop-up list that opens.
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
This determines the time limit after which the monitor alarms if the patient stops breathing.
1
2
In the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
awRR
.
In
Setup awRR
menu, select
Apnea
.
3
Choose the apnea alarm delay time.
WARNING
Safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea, particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.
Prolonged delay: The selected apnea alarm delay may be prolonged by up to 17 seconds, if an apnea occurs during the automatic zero process. This applies to the Microstream (M3015A) measurement only.
Deriving Alarms From awRR
1
In the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
awRR
.
2
In the
Setup awRR
menu, select
Alarms
.
3
Choose
On
to derive alarms from the airway respiration signal or
Off
to disable them.
Changing awRR Alarm Limits
1
In the
Setup CO
2
menu, select
awRR
.
2
Select
High Limit
to set the upper alarm limit.
Select
Low Limit
to set the lower alarm limit.
3
Select the appropriate setting.
158
14
14
Trends
Trends are patient data collected over time and displayed in graphic or tabular form to give you a picture of how your patient’s condition is developing. Trend information is stored in the trends database for continuously-monitored measurements, such as ECG, as well as for aperiodicallymeasured parameters, such as Cardiac Output.
Viewing Trends
Trend information can be viewed embedded as a screen element on specially-designed Screens, or you can open a trend window over the current Screen.
♦
To view trends embedded as a screen element, enter the
Screen designed to show an embedded trend window.
Change Screen
window, then select a
♦
To open the tabular trends window, select
Main Setup
>
Trends
>
Vitals Trend
, or select the
Vitals Trend
SmartKey.
Vitals
Trend
♦
To open the graphic trends window over the current Screen, select
Main
Setup
>
Trends
>
Graph Trend
, or select the
Graph Trend
SmartKey.
The trend windows open displaying the most recent data and are updated as new data is stored. A timescale along the bottom of the screen shows you where you are in the trends database. The preview column on the right-hand side shows the
Graph
Trend
latest available measurement value. The preview column is updated every five minutes or whenever an
NBP or other aperiodic measurement is completed.
A question mark (?) beside a value means that the data may not be reliable, due perhaps to an INOP condition in the measurement.
Your monitor screen may look slightly different to the examples shown in this chapter.
Trends Pop-Up Keys
When you open the trends window, a selection of pop-up keys appears to let you navigate through the stored trend data and carry out trends-related tasks.
159
14 Trends
Viewing Trends
Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....
Select
Group
see a pop-up list of trend groups and select a group for viewing.
Select
Interval
see a pop-up list of available data resolution settings and select the level of detail shown in the trend view.
print a graphic trends report of the data in the current window. The report will use the current trend interval settings.
move the cursor one step to the left or right to navigate through the trends database timeline.
Vital
Signs
Graph
Trend
move the cursor one page to the left or right to navigate through the trends database timeline.
scroll up and down the screen to see measurement trends that do not fit in the current view.
open the current trend view in tabular form. The displayed time period and resolution stay the same.
open the current trend view in graphic form. The displayed time period and resolution stay the same.
Viewing Graphic Trends
Graphical Trends: Standard
HR
SpO
2
RR
4 Apr
Select
Interval
Scroll to view more pop-up keys
Select
Group
Vital
Signs
1
2
A cursor spanning all measurements in the trend group helps you to navigate through the trends database and shows you your current position in the database. When the cursor is moved across the time line, the values measured at the cursor time are shown in the right hand column.
In graphical trends, aperiodic measurement trends are shown as an asterisk, NBP has a special symbol.
To use the trend cursor to navigate in time through the trends database,
Select the graphical trend or the arrow pop-up keys to activate the cursor.
Use the arrow pop-up keys to move the trend cursor backwards and forwards in time, or
160
Setting Up Trends
3
Place the cursor at a specific time by touching the graph.
Viewing Vital Signs Trends
14 Trends
HR
SpO
2 etCO
2 imCO
2
RR awRR
Vital Signs: Standard
Aperiodic values are shown with a timestamp
Select
Interval
Scroll to view more pop-up keys
Select
Group
Graph
Trend
The currently-selected column is highlighted. The values can be configured to display in the same colors as the waves and numerics on the realtime display.
Any values available for display before the next scheduled update are shown in the right hand column, with a timestamp in brackets.
If more than one value is available for an aperiodic trend for a certain trend period, all measured values are stored in the database and the value closest to the timestamp is shown in the Vital Signs display marked with an arrow.
Setting Up Trends
Trends are set up in Configuration Mode. You can make temporary changes to trends settings such as trend groups, priorities, or scales in Monitoring Mode. The general settings for all Trends are under
Main Setup
->
Trends.
Settings for a single segment in graphical trends or for the corresponding trend group can be made more easily in that segment menu.
Making Segment Settings
The
Graphical Trends
window is divided into measurement segments, each of which has its own settings.
To enter the segment menu,
♦ select the left hand column of the segment, where the measurement label is displayed.
Expanded View
To expand the segment to fill the
Graphical Trends
window,
♦ in the
Segment
menu, select
Expand
to have that segment enlarged to fill the window.
161
14 Trends
Setting Up Trends
In the expanded view, you can also highlight a measurement to make it more easily visible (for example when multiple ST trends are in one segment). To highlight a measurement,
♦ in the
Segment
measurement.
menu, select
Highlight
repeatedly until the highlight is on the required
To return the segment to its original size,
♦ in the
Segment
menu, select
Expand
again.
Trend Scales for Segment Measurements
To change the trend scales for a measurement in the current segment:
1
2
In the segment menu, select the measurement label
Select
Upper
to change the upper limit of the scale or
Lower
to change the lower limit of the scale.
Optimum Scale
To have the monitor automatically select an optimum scale for viewing, based on current values,
♦ in the
Segment
menu, select
Optimum Scale
.
This scale change is temporary. When the graphical trend window is closed the scale reverts back to the setting in
Parameter Scales
.
To switch off automatic optimum scaling,
♦ in the
Segment
menu, select
Optimum Scale
again.
Trend Group
To add or remove measurements for this trend group or change the order of the existing measurements:
1
2
In the
Segment
menu, select
Change Group
Use the
Add
,
Change
,
Sort Up
and
Sort Down
popup keys to change or re-order the group as required.
No. of Segments
In an embedded graphical trend window, you can select the number of segments to be displayed in the
Segment
menu:
♦
In the
Segment
menu, select
No. of Segments
Trend Groups
The measurements grouped in trend groups define the trends displayed together in the Vital Signs or
Graphics Trends windows and printed in trends reports and recordings. The sequence of the measurements in the group defines the order in which they are displayed. Measurements listed between dotted line separators are displayed overlapping. The trend group
All
contains all available measurements, you cannot change the order or selection of this group.
To change the selection of measurements in a trend group, either use the
Change Group
setting in the
Segment
menu or:
162
Setting Up Trends
14 Trends
1
2
Select
Main Setup
->
Trends
->
Trend Groups
Select the Trend Group you want to change and use the pop-up keys to
Add
,
Change
, or
Delete
the selection of measurements trended.
To temporarily change the order in which the measurements are displayed in a group,
1
Select
Main Setup
->
Trends
->
Trend Groups
2
Select the Trend Group and then the measurement you want to move and use the Sort Up/Sort
Down pop-up keys.
Trend Interval
The trend interval defines the resolution of trend data shown on the Screen.
To set the trend resolution, in the Vital Signs or Graphical Trends window,
♦
Select the
Select Interval
pop-up key and then select the required interval from the list.
Trend Priority
The monitor stores trend information for all monitored measurements, if configured to do so. If your configuration restricts the number of measurements trended, you must choose which measurements will be included. A priority list is used to select the trended measurements.
To see the measurement priority list for trending,
1
2
In the
Main Setup
menu, select
Trends
.
Select
Trend Priority
.
To add measurements to the priority list,
1
Select the pop-up key
Add
and choose from the pop-up list of available measurements.
2
Use the
Sort Up
and
Sort Down
pop-up keys to change the priority order.
Trend Parameter Scales
Parameter scales define how the trend waveform will appear on the screen and in trend reports.
Separate scales can be set for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patient trends.
To change the trend parameter scales settings, either use the
Scale
setting in the
Segment
menu or:
1
In the
Main Setup
menu, select
Trends
.
2
3
Select
Parameter Scales
.
Select the measurement or parameter you want to change from the list.
4
5
Select the pop-up key
Change
to call up the
Scale
menu.
In the
Scale
menu, select the parameter label you want to define settings for. Select
Adult
,
Pedi
, and
Neo
and use the pop-up keypad to enter new upper and lower scale definitions.
Graphical Trend Presentation
Graphical trends and screen trends for measurements with compound values (for example ABP or
CO
2
) can be viewed in line or band form.
To change the presentation style,
1
Select
Main Setup
->
Trends
163
14 Trends
Documenting Trends
2
Select
Global Style
and choose
•
Line
to display the trends as a continuous line
•
Band
to fill the area between the trend lines, for example, between the systolic and diastolic pressures, with color.
240
This sample ABP trend shows the continuouslymeasured values for the systolic, diastolic and mean pressures displayed in band form.
ABP
50
Documenting Trends
To print a Vital Signs or Graphical Trends report,
♦ in the
Vital Signs
or
Graph Trends
window, select the pop-up key for the trend group currently on the monitor screen.
to print a report
Reports include the most recent information in the trends database and extend backwards in time according to the selected trend interval and your monitor’s configuration. Trends reports can be printed on central or local printers.
Trends Databases
The trend databases store information for up to 16 measurements for up to 48 hours.
The values in the trends database are stored as measured by the monitor, they are not averaged values.
The trend resolution defines how often a value is stored. In general, if more than one value is available for storage in the trends database, the most recent value is used. Some values in the trends are marked with arrows. This indicates that for this time period, more values were available and the most recent one is shown.
Example database configuration In this example, we see that the monitor stores the most recent data at the highest resolution, older data are stored at a lower resolution.
“4 hours @ 12 second resolution” means that the monitor stores trend data every 12 seconds, for the most recent four hours.
164
Screen Trends
14 Trends
- 48 hours
- 24 hours
- 4 hours now time
4 hours @12 second resolution
24 hours @ 1 minute resolution
48 hours @ 5 minute resolution
Aperiodic Trends Database
Aperiodic trends do not count toward the maximum number of trends allowed by the trend configuration. Trend data for aperiodic measurements is stored in a separate database and timestamped with the measurement time.
Trending Multiple-Value Measurements
Some measurements generate multiple values, for example invasive pressure measurements can provide systolic, diastolic, and mean values. These values are trended as separate measurements.
Screen Trends
Trends configured to display permanently on special monitor Screens are called screen trends. The selection and number of measurement waves in the Screen Trend segment depends on your monitor configuration. Screen trends are color-coded to match the measurement wave and numerics, and they can be viewed in graphical, tabular, or horizon format.
If you do not see screen trends on the monitor Screen, select a different Screen, one that is configured to show screen trends. Screen trends are only available on specially designed Screens.
Screen Trend information is taken from the Trends database. If you do not see a Screen Trend for a particular measurement on the Screen, check the trend priority list to ensure that this measurement is being trended.
165
14 Trends
Screen Trends
Measurement wave
HR
SBed9 Adult
SpO
2
ALARMS OFF
Perf
Arrhythmia Off
M
NBP
Sys.
NBPs
1mV
Auto 15 min
Temp
65 -60min
-30min
Measurement numerics
NBPs
65
-60min -30min
NBP graphical screen trend
ABP
240
50
Example of other graphical screen trends: ABP
Measurement wave
HR
SBed9 Adult
Pulse
ALARMS OFF
SpO
2
Arrhythmia Off
M
NBP
1mV
Auto 15 min
Temp
NBP
Sys.
Measurement numerics
Tabular trend
166
Screen Trends
14 Trends
Setting the Screen Trend Time
To set the
ScreenTrend Time
for all graphical and horizon screen trends (“global” trend time),
1
2
Select a screen trend then select
Setup Trend
, or select
Main Setup
->
Trends
.
Select
ScreenTrend Time
and select the required time: 30 minutes, one, two, four, eight, or twelve hours.
This is now the Global screen trend time and defines the period of trend information shown for all screen trends.
To set a different
ScreenTrend Time
for a screen trends or a group of aligned screen trends,
1
2
Select a screen trend
Select
Change TrendTime
3
Select the required trend time.
Selecting
Global
leaves the trend time set to the global screen trend time.
Changing the Selection of Screen Trends Displayed
1
Select the screen trend.
2
Select
Change Trend
and select the required trend from the list of available trends.
Select
Blank
to remove the selected trend from the Screen.
If you do not see
Change Trend
in the screen trend menu, the trend is aligned to display with the measurement wave. Changing the wave automatically changes the trend.
To display two or more screen trends overlapping,
1
Select the screen trend to open the screen trend menu,
2
Select
Change Trend
->
Add Trend
and select a screen trend from the pop-up list.
Activating the Cursor for Screen Trends
To activate the cursor for Screen Trends:
1
2
Select the screen trend.
Select
Activate Cursor
You can now use the arrow keys to move the cursor across the time line. The values measured at the cursor time are shown next to the cursor.
To de-activate the cursor,
♦
Press the
Main Screen
key.
Changing the Screen Trend View
♦
To switch between tabular, graphic and horizon views, select the screen trend then select
Change
View
and select the required view.
Tabular View
Aperiodic measurements such as NBP, can be viewed as a screen trend in tabular form. The measured values and their timestamps are shown, with the measurement label.
167
14 Trends
Screen Trends
NBP
Sys.
Horizon View
The horizon view presents trend information superimposed over a defined baseline or base range. This helps you visualize changes in your patient’s condition since the baseline was set.
The horizon view is made up of:
• a horizon, drawn in white, as a reference point or baseline to help you visualize
1 2
changes in your patient’s condition. The horizon can be set to represent your patient’s current
3
condition, or a target condition and can be a single value or a range.
• a graphical trend, displaying patient data for the set TrendTime (1).
• a trend indicator arrow, indicating how the patient trend has developed in the set time period
(10 minutes, 5 minutes or 2 minutes) (2).
• a deviation bar, showing how the currently measured value deviates from the set horizon (3). The height of the deviation bar is an indication of the extent of the change in your patient’s condition relative to the (horizon) baseline.
Your monitor may not be configured to show all elements of the screen trend horizon view.
Setting the Horizon
The horizon is the reference value to which deviations in the measurements are compared.
1
To set the horizon, select the horizon trend
2
Select
– Set High Horizon
to select the upper horizon value. If the high and low horizon values are the same, the horizon is a baseline - if the values are different the horizon is a range.
– Set Low Horizon
to select the lower horizon value.
–
Auto Horizon
to set the horizon for the selected horizon trend to the currently-measured value
–
Auto All
to reset the horizon for all horizon screen trends to the currently-measured values
–
Set Horizon
to set the horizon to a specific value from a pop-up list.
Setting the Horizon Trend Scale
The horizon trend scale is defined with respect to the horizon. If your horizon is set to 100 and you select 20 as the horizon scale delta, the upper limit of the horizon scale will be 120 and lower limit 80.
To set the horizon trend scale delta,
1
Select the horizon trend.
168
Screen Trends
14 Trends
2
Select
Set Scale Delta
and select a value to define the distance between the horizon and the upper and lower scale limits.
Be aware that changing the horizon trend scale can change the angle of the trend indicator, without the patient’s condition having changed.
If a measurement exceeds the outer limits of the scale, the wave will be clipped and you must either reset the horizon or the horizon trend scale to display the values outside the scale limits.
Setting the Time Period for the Trend Indicator Arrow
The time period for which the trend indicator arrow can be set in the Trends window.
1
2
Select
Main Setup
>
Trends
Select
HorizonArrowTime
.
3
Select 10, 5 or 2 minutes.
169
14 Trends
Screen Trends
170
15
15
Recording
Central
Recording
For central recording from the bedside, your monitor must be connected via a network to an
Information Center. You can use either the M1116B 2-Channel Recorder or the standalone M3160A
4-Channel Recorder. See the documentation supplied with the Information Center for information on the 4-Channel Recorder.
Starting and Stopping Recordings
The recordings pop-up keys let you start and stop recordings. Select the
Main Setup
SmartKey then select
Recordings
to call up the line of pop-up keys. Scroll right or left to see any pop-up keys not displayed.
Delayed
Recordng
RT A
Recordng
RT B
Recordng
Select
Waves
Setup
Recordng
Stop all
Recordng
Recording Without a Template
To record without a preconfigured template, selecting the waves you require,
1
2
Select the
Main Setup
SmartKey then select
Recordings.
Select the pop-up key
Select Waves
,
3
4
Use the pop-up keys to choose up to three measurement waves to be printed on the recording. If you want fewer than three waves on the recording, select the waves you want then select the
Continue
pop-up key.
Select one of the recording speed pop-up keys to set the required recording speed.
5
Select the
Start
pop-up key to start the recording.
Select Waves
recordings use default values for any recorder settings not defined: runtime is continuous, overlapping is set to non-overlapping.
171
15 Recording
Overview of Recording Types
Overview of Recording Types
Delayed
Type of recording manual
Recording
Destination
central
Information recorded
from the start trigger minus the delay time
Number of waves
up to 2
Speed
50, 25, 6.25 mm/sec
Runtime
N/A
Stops
automatically
Delay Time
10, 15 seconds
Overlap
N/A = not applicable
Off
On (up to 2 waves)
Alarm
automatic, triggered by defined alarm conditions central printer
Realtime (RT)
manual central from the start trigger minus the delay time up to 2
25 mm/sec
N/A automatically
10, 15 seconds
Off
On (up to 2 waves)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A from the start trigger up to 2
50, 25, 6.25 mm/sec continuously manually none
Off
On (up to 2 waves)
Creating and Changing Recordings Templates
1
2
To save you defining recording settings each time you start a recording, you can create templates for commonly-used types of recordings in the
Setup Recording
menu. You can create templates for one delayed recording, one alarm recording and two realtime recordings (
Realtime A
and
Realtime B
).
Changing recordings templates changes the settings that will be used each time a recording of this name is triggered.
Select the
Main Setup
SmartKey to call up the Main Setup menu.
Select
Recordings.
3
4
Select the
Setup Recording
pop-up key to enter the Setup Recordings menu.
Select the name of the template you want to create or change. Each recording name is linked to a recording type: delayed, alarm, and realtime. Recording names can be changed in the monitor’s
Configuration Mode.
5
Design the template by selecting each menu item and entering the information for the template.
•
Recorder
: choose which recorder the recording will print to (Central 2-Ch. or Central 4-Ch. recorder, or a printer (for realtime reports in alarm recording only)).
•
Channels 1 - 4
: choose which waveform to record in each channel.
In addition to the currently available waves, you can choose from several other settings which make an automatic allocation when the recording starts:
–
Alarm Par
will always record the measurement in alarm in the chosen recorder channel
–
Primary Lead
will always record the current primary lead in the chosen recorder channel
172
Recorder Status Messages
15 Recording
–
Secondary Lead
will always record the current secondary lead in the chosen recorder channel
•
Overlap
: define whether the recorded waveforms will be printed overlapping or beside each other.
•
Speed
: choose the recording print speed.
•
Delay Time
: Delayed recordings start documenting on the recorder strip from a pre-set time before the recording is started. This interval is called the “Delay Time” and can be set as specified in
the table on page 172. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
•
Runtime
: see how long this type of recording is configured to run. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode. Continuous recordings run indefinitely.
•
Central Config
- if available in the
General
menu, select this setting to use the recording settings made for the centrally-connected recorder.
Maintaining Recording Strips
Recording ink sometimes fades when covered with transparent tape. Avoid covering any part of a recording that is clinically relevant (annotation or waveforms) when taping a recording strip to a patient record or other patient documentation.
Recorder Status Messages
CAUTION
If no central recorder is available, alarm recordings may be lost. The message
no alarm recording available
will be displayed. This message is not shown if
Printer
is configured as the alarm recording destination.
Recorder Status Messages
<Recording name> running
Explanation
The named recording is currently running.
No alarm recording available
Central recorder out of paper
Central recorder door open
No recorder available. Alarm recordings will be lost.
Try configuring Printer as the alarm recording destination.
The named recorder is out of paper.
The door of the specified recorder is open.
173
15 Recording
Recorder Status Messages
174
16
16
Printing Patient Reports
Starting Report Printouts
Most patient reports can be printed by selecting Main Setup - > Reports (or the Reports
SmartKey) and then selecting the report name in the top half of the Reports menu. Report names are shown only for reports that have been correctly set up.
Data from the time of the print request is printed, even if the print job is delayed in the printer queue.
Depending on availability, reports can be printed on printers connected to the Information Center, an external PC-based print server or into the print database. Print jobs stored in the database are automatically printed when a print device with a matching paper size becomes available.
Print jobs in the print database are not deleted after a patient discharge. Always admit your patient so that reports can be clearly assigned to a patient.
Report types Report contents How to start printing reports
Vital Signs Report
Graphic Trends Report
ECG Reports
ST Map Report depends on selected trend group, data resolution, and period.
Depends on format selected
ST data in a transversal and/or horizontal multiaxis diagram,
In the Vital Signs window, select
In the Graphic Trends window, select
Select the
ECG Report
SmartKeys, if configured
In the ST Map window, select
.
Alarm Limits Report Graphic and numeric report of all current alarm limits
Realtime Reports
Battery Report
Patient data and numerics, and either: all displayed waves OR all measured waves OR all measured RT waves
Battery serial number, information on the currently-measured and potential charge status of the battery
In the
Alarm Limits
window, select
Limits
Select the configured
In the
Realtime Reports
SmartKey, if
Battery Status
window, select
Print Status
.
175
16 Printing Patient Reports
Stopping Reports Printouts
Stopping Reports Printouts
♦
To stop Reports printing, in the Reports menu, select
– Stop Report to stop the current print job
– Stop All Reports to cancel all queued report printouts
– Scheduled Rep. to toggle to Off and switch off scheduled reports.
Setting Up Reports
ECG report layout and Auto Reports settings must be defined in Configuration Mode.
The content you define in the individual Setup Reports menus will be used in all reports of this type: for example, if you set a print speed of 50 mm/sec in the ECG Reports menu, every ECG report will be printed at this speed, irrespective of format.
Setting Up ECG Reports
The settings you choose in the ECG Reports menu apply for all ECG reports printed. To set up
ECG Reports,
1
Select Main Setup -> Reports -> ECG Reports. Note the report layout configured for your monitor, either Internat. or Cabrera. This setting is inactive (“grayed-out”) in Monitoring Mode and can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
2
Select ECG Gain and set the required ECG Gain to define how ECG waves will appear on the
ECG report printouts.
3
4
Select Speed and select the report print speed.
Select Annotation and toggle to On if the printed ECG wave should be annotated with beat labels or not. See the chapter on ECG for a list of beat labels. Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients.
Setting Up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend Reports
The settings you choose in the Setup Vital Signs Report and Graphical Trend
Report
menus apply for all Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports printed.
To set up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports,
1
2
Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Vital Signs Rep. or Graph Trend Rep.
Select Trend Group and select the group you want to print on the report. The groups available depend on your monitor’s trend configuration.
3
4
Select Period and select the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the report. If
Automatic Period
is configured to
On
, all trend data for the current patient will be printed, irrespective which trend period is selected.
Select Interval (Vital Signs Reports only) and select the resolution of the trend data printed on the report,
176
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs
16 Printing Patient Reports
Setting Up Auto Reports
Auto Reports print automatically when a specified trigger occurs. There are two types of Auto Reports:
Scheduled Reports, which print at predefined intervals, and End Case Reports, which print when a patient is discharged using the End Case function. An Auto Report can be both a Scheduled Report and an End Case report.
To set up Auto Reports,
1
2
Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports and select the Auto Report you want to set up (A, B,
C, or D).
Select Report and assign a report type to the Auto Report.
3
Select End Case Report and toggle to On if you want the selected report to print automatically when you select End Case to discharge a patient.
Toggle End Case Report to Off if the report is a Scheduled Report only.
4
Select Scheduled Rep. and toggle to On if you want the selected report to print at predefined intervals, starting at a predefined time of day. The start time you set applies for every following day.
For example, if you set a start time of 07:00 and a repeat time of six hours, the first report will print at 07:00 every day, the next at 13:00 and so on.
– To set the time of day at which you want the report to print every day: select Start Hour and
Start Minute
and select the required time from the pop-up list
– To set the time interval in minutes between two scheduled reports: select Rep. Freq. (Hr) and Rep. Freq. (Min) and select the time interval from the pop-up list.
If you are setting up an end case report, these settings will be inactive (“grayed-out”).
Toggle Scheduled Rep. to Off if the report is an End Case Report only.
5
Repeat the procedure for all Auto Reports you want to set up.
All Auto Reports or Scheduled Reports set to On print automatically at the predefined trigger.
Be aware that the monitor’s memory for reports is limited. If the memory is full, Auto Reports cannot be printed and the information may be lost.
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs
To adjust the appearance of individual print jobs, in the Reports menu,
1
2
Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Reports to enter the Setup Reports menu.
Select Report and then select the report you want to set up.
177
16 Printing Patient Reports
Checking Printer Settings
3
4
5
Select Report Type and then select the reports template you want the report selected in Step 2 to use. The selection of templates listed depends on the report type selected.
Each template includes patient demographic data, and each Realtime Report also includes alarm and INOP information. In addition, the templates include:
Visible Waves:
all waves currently visible, in the order they appear on the screen.
All Waves
: all measured waves,
RT Waves
: all currently measured realtime waves, according to the monitor’s priority list.
Vital Signs
: trend information in tabular form.
Graph Trend
: trend information in graphic form.
ECG3X4
, ECG6X2, ECG12X1, ECG4X2, ECG8X1, ECG12X1(2P): ECG reports.
Alarm Limits
: a list of all currently set alarm limits.
Select Report Size to set the paper size to be used for the report: Unspecified to use the default size for the template chosen, Universal, A4, Letter, LrgUniversal, A3, or
Ledger
. The list of available sizes depends on the report type selected.
Select Orientation to set the orientation of the report printout: Unspec. to use the default size for the template chosen, Landscape or Portrait.
6
Select Target Device and choose which printer the print job will be sent to: Unspec. to use the default printer, or choose from the list of printer names defined at the Information Center or in the monitor’s Configuration Mode (for example, Remote 1 or Database).
Some settings may be inactive (“grayed-out”) in this menu for reports that can only be started in a special window.
Checking Printer Settings
The printer settings for your monitor are defined in Configuration Mode. The printer settings Paper
Size
, Resolution, Color Support, and Duplex Option for the active printer are visible but inactive (“grayed-out”) in the Setup Printers menu. When Print Database is selected as active printer only the Paper Size setting will be shown.
♦
To enter the Setup Printers menu, in the Reports menu, select Setup Printers.
Printing a Test Report
A test report can be printed in Configuration mode, refer to the Service Guide for details.
Switching Printers On Or Off for Reports
You can enable or disable printer status to switch individual printers on or off for report printouts.
1
In the Setup Printers menu, select Printer and then select the name of the device you want to switch on or off for Reports printing from the pop-up list.
2
Select Printer Status to toggle between the settings Enable and Disable. If you set this to Disable, no reports will be printed to the named printer.
If the monitor detects that no printer of a particular type is available, the Enable/Disable setting will automatically be set to Disable and “grayed out”.
178
Dashed Lines on Reports
Dashed Lines on Reports
16 Printing Patient Reports
If a section of a wave on a report is drawn with dashed lines, this tells you that a setting that affects the appearance of the wave on the screen was changed while the report was printing.
For example, if you change the wave scale while a report is printing, the wave scale and wave size are changed immediately on the monitor screen and on the report. To indicate that the scale information printed at the beginning of the report no longer matches the currently used scale, the wave will be printed using dashed lines, starting from the moment the change took place.
Some examples of settings that cause dashed lines in reports if changed during printing are: Filter mode, ECG lead placement, wave scale, measurement unit, paced/non-paced setting, and measurement mode. Note that as ECG waves are drawn with a fixed gain on reports (either 10 mm/ mV or 20 mm/mV), changing the ECG wave scale will not cause dashed-line reports.
To avoid dashed lines on reports, wait 15 seconds after changing a setting before you trigger a report.
Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports
If you send a report to be printed on a printer that is not available, for example, because it has run out of paper, this print job is suspended and stored in the monitor’s memory.
If the target device of this print job was set to Unspecified, the monitor will periodically try to resend the print job to the first printer listed in the Setup Printers menu under Printer that is set to Enabled and that has paper of the correct size.
To allow the report to print, you must either solve the problem with the target printer, or re-route the print job to another printer with paper of the correct size. To re-route a print job,
♦
Enable the new target printer by selecting it in the Setup Printers menu and toggling to
Enabled
. As the monitor tries to send the report to the printers in the order they are listed, you must make sure that all the printers above the new target printer are disabled.
If the target device of the print job was set to a specific printer, re-routing is not possible.
Checking Report Status
A list of all print requests which are waiting, printing or stored can be viewed in the Reports Job List.
To view the list,
♦ in the Reports menu, select Reports Job List.
The following information is displayed for each print request:
• Report title
• Patient name (except for system reports such as the battery status report)
• Request date and time
• Report paper format
• Job status: Preparing, Printing, Waiting, In Database, Retry, Cancelling, Error
179
16 Printing Patient Reports
Printer Status Messages
Individual reports can be deleted from the list with the Stop Report key, and all reports with the
Stop All Reports
key.
Printer Status Messages
Printer Status Message
Print job queued
<Printer name>
Print job can’t queue;queue full
Cancelling all print jobs
Possible causes and suggested action
The report has been placed in the queue for the named printer.
The printer queue is full and the monitor cannot accept another report request. Wait until some more reports have been printed, then try again,
OR
A report has been triggered that uses a paper size unavailable with the target printer. Try another printer, if available, or change the paper size of the print request.
Stop All Reports
has been selected in the
Report
menu, OR
The Operating Mode has been changed from Monitoring Mode to
Demonstration or Service Mode.
The current report is being cancelled as the result of a user request.
Cancelling the active print job
Deleted N print jobs;discharge
Deleted N print jobs; hotstart
Print failed;No report configurd
Printing on
<Printer name>
When a patient is discharged, all queued reports are cancelled except those stored in the print database. “
N
” is the number of reports cancelled.
The monitor has restarted and all report requests have been cancelled except those stored in the print database. “
N
” is the number of reports cancelled.
A report has been triggered which has not been correctly set up. Enter the setup menu for the report type to set up the report.
A report is in progress, or the monitor is waiting for the central printer to accept the print job.
180
Sample Report Printouts
16 Printing Patient Reports
Printer Status Message Possible causes and suggested action
NoPrinter <Printer name>;job susp
The chosen device is unavailable. Check that the printer is properly connected and that paper is available. The requested report will start printing when the printer becomes available.
Print Database full->job suspnd.
The requested report does not fit into the print database. You can select
another printer to print the report (see “Unavailable Printer: Re-routing
Reports” on page 179). Alternatively you can delete another report from
the Reports Job List (using the Stop report key) to create space for your report.
Job <Printer name> fail;
A report cannot be started on the requested printer.
One of three reasons will also be shown in the status message:
• data requisition error (data error) - an internal error has caused data required for the report to be unavailable, try starting the report again.
• printer unavailable (no printer)- make sure the printer is plugged in, switched on, and has paper loaded.
• data unavailable (no data) - the connected X2 or MP5 has been removed before the data for the report was transferred.
The report has been printed.
Print job on
<Printer name> done
Sample Report Printouts
Each report header contains the patient’s bed label, last name and first name, the patient ID, the date and time, and the name of the report. The report footer contains the hospital label and page number, and the last page contains a note to mark the report end.
The monitor may be configured to leave a space on the top left or right of the report printout to enable you to stick a patient address label on it. This setting is called the Addressograph and it can only be changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.
181
16 Printing Patient Reports
Sample Report Printouts
Alarm Limits Report
NBed6
Alarm Limits
HR
ST-I
ST-II
ST-III
ST-aVR
ST-aVL
Measurement labels, with alarms off symbol where alarms are switched off
ST-aVF
ST-V1
ST-V2
ST-V3
ST-V4
ST-V5
Doe, John
ST-V6
SpO2
NBPs
ABPs
RR
Apnea Time 20 sec
123456789-P1
19 Apr 07 15:59:37
Graphic view of current alarm limits in relation to currently monitored measurement value
Realtime Report
Patient demographic information, time stamp
NBed6
Realtime Report
Patient Cat.: Adult
Paced: No
Gender: Male
Active Alarms and INOPs, followed by vital signs
**ABPs HIGH
SpO2 NON-PULSAT.
HR
PVC
ST-I
ST-II
ST-III
60 bpm
0 /m
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
Measurement waves section
Doe, John
Date of Birth: 19 Nov 1963
Age: 43 years
Height: 69 in
ST-aVR
ST-aVL
ST-aVF
ST-V1
ST-V2
ST-V3
ST-V4
ST-V5
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
0.0 mm
-0.1 mm
0.0 mm
Patient Cat.: Adult
Paced: No
123456789-P1
19 Apr 07 15:59:54
ST-V6
SpO2
Pulse
Perf
NBP
Pulse
ABP
ST-V5
0.0 mm
-?- %
-?- bpm
-?-
119/81 (93) mmHg
0.0 mm
Bandwidth 0.5-40 Hz Non-Paced 10mm/mV 25mm/sec
182
Sample Report Printouts
ECG Reports
Patient information
Numeric block
Wave area
16 Printing Patient Reports
Below the header on ECG Reports, the numeric block shows the current HR, PVC, and ST values.
The wave area shows the printed waves for all available ECG leads. A 1 mV calibration bar is printed at the beginning of each wave. With the 3X4, 6X2, and 2X4 formats, a rhythm stripe prints a longer section of the ECG wave from the primary ECG lead for ECG rhythm evaluation. The ECG signal bandwidth, the patient’s paced status, the ECG gain, and the print speed are printed at the bottom of the wave area. Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients. Beat labels can be set to print on the rhythm stripe. The 12X1 (2P) format prints the report over two pages.
ECG Report type
12-Lead ECG
Multi-lead ECG
Available Formats
3X4 landscape
6X2 landscape
12X1 portrait
12X1 landscape
12X1 (2P) landscape
2X4 landscape
8X1 portrait
8X1 landscape
Other Reports
See the sections on Trends for other example reports.
Available Paper Sizes
A4, letter, A3, ledger
A4, letter, A3, ledger
A4 and letter only
A4, letter, A3, ledger
A4, letter (2 pages)
A4, letter, A3, ledger
A4 and letter only
A4, letter, A3, ledger
183
16 Printing Patient Reports
Sample Report Printouts
184
17
17
Care and Cleaning
Use only the Philips-approved substances and methods listed in this chapter to clean or disinfect your equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by using unapproved substances or methods.
Philips makes no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for controlling infection. Consult your hospital’s Infection Control Officer or Epidemiologist. For comprehensive details on cleaning agents and their efficacy refer to “Guidelines for Prevention of
Transmission of Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Hepatitis B Virus to Health Care and Public-
Safety Workers” issued by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service,
Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia, February 1989. See also any local policies that apply within your hospital, and country.
General Points
Keep your monitor, cables and accessories free of dust and dirt. After cleaning and disinfection, check the equipment carefully. Do not use if you see signs of deterioration or damage. If you need to return any equipment to Philips, decontaminate it first.
Observe the following general precautions:
• Always dilute according to the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible concentration.
• Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
• Do not immerse any part of the equipment or any accessories in liquid.
• Do not pour liquid onto the system.
• Never use abrasive material (such as steel wool or silver polish).
• Never use bleach.
WARNING
If you spill liquid on the equipment, battery, or accessories, or they are accidentally immersed in liquid, contact your service personnel or Philips service engineer. Do not operate the equipment before it has been tested and approved for further use.
185
17 Care and Cleaning
Cleaning the Monitor
Cleaning the Monitor
Clean with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm water (40°C/104°F maximum) and soap, a diluted non-caustic detergent, tenside, ammonia- or alcohol-based cleaning agent. Do not use strong solvents such as acetone or trichloroethylene.
Take extra care when cleaning the screen of the monitor because it is more sensitive to rough cleaning methods than the housing. Do not permit any liquid to enter the monitor case and avoid pouring it on the monitor while cleaning. Do not allow water or cleaning solution to enter the measurement connectors. Wipe around, not over, connector sockets.
CAUTION
To clean the touch-enabled display, disable the touch operation by switching off the monitor during the cleaning procedure, or by pressing and holding the Main Screen key for two seconds. Press the
Main Screen key again to re-enable touch operation.
Recommended cleaning agents are:
Tensides (dishwasher detergents)
Ammonias
Alcohol
Disinfecting the Monitor
Edisonite Schnellreiniger
®
, Alconox
®
Dilution of Ammonia <3%, Window cleaner
Ethanol 70%, Isopropanol 70%, Window cleaner
CAUTION
Solutions: Do not mix disinfecting solutions (such as bleach and ammonia) as hazardous gases may result.
Hospital policy: Disinfect the product as determined by your hospital’s policy, to avoid long term damage to the product.
Clean equipment before disinfecting. Recommended types of disinfecting agents are:
Base
Alcohol
Aldehyde
Approved Agents
Ethanol up to 70%
1- and 2- Propanol up to 70%
Glutaraldehyde up to 3.6%
Sterilizing the Monitor
Sterilization is not recommended for this monitor, related products, accessories or supplies unless otherwise indicated in the Instructions for Use that accompany the accessories and supplies.
186
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories
17 Care and Cleaning
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring
Accessories
To clean, disinfect and sterilize reusable transducers, sensors, cables, leads, and so forth, refer to the instructions delivered with the accessory.
187
17 Care and Cleaning
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories
188
18
18
Using Batteries
When monitoring a patient, one Philips M4607A rechargeable Lithium Ion battery must always be inserted into the battery compartment on the right side of the monitor. This applies even when you are running the monitor from the external power supply. The battery seals the battery compartment, thereby preventing the ingress of fluids or foreign bodies. A severe yellow INOP (!!INSERT
BATTERY
) will be issued if the monitor is connected to AC mains without a battery fully inserted in the battery compartment. This INOP will persist until a battery is loaded.
Battery compartment
To use the monitor with battery power, disconnect the MSL cable (connecting the external power supply) from the monitor.
You can switch between battery-powered and mains-powered (AC) operation without interrupting monitoring.
The battery recharges automatically when the monitor is connected to the external power supply
(M8023A).
189
18 Using Batteries
Battery Power Indicators
Battery Power Indicators
The battery LED and battery status information on the Main Screen, in combination with INOP messages and prompts, help you keep track of the battery power status. The indicators always show the remaining capacity in relation to the battery’s actual maximum capacity, which may lessen as the battery ages. You can see the actual capacity in the Battery Status window.
Battery LED
The battery LED on the front panel of the monitor is indicated by a battery symbol.
Battery LED
Battery LED Colors If the monitor is connected to the external power supply
(M8023A), this means
battery charging
If the monitor is running on battery power, this means
Yellow
Red, flashing
less than 10 minutes power remaining battery malfunction
Red, flashes intermittently
battery or charger malfunction
The battery LED is yellow during charging and switches off when the battery is charged.
Battery Status on the Main Screen
Battery status information can be configured to display permanently on all
Screens. It shows the status of the battery, with the battery power remaining and, when the battery is not charging, an estimate of the monitoring time this represents.
Battery power gauge: This shows the remaining battery power. It is divided into sections, each representing 20% of the total power. If three sections are filled, as in this example, this indicates that 60% battery power remains. If no battery is detected, a blank battery gauge marked with a flashing red X is displayed. If no data is available from the battery, a question mark is shown in the gauge.
190
Battery Power Indicators
18 Using Batteries
Battery status/malfunction indicator: Normal battery function is indicated by the battery power gauge, together with the remaining operating time, on the Main Screen. You are informed of problems or changes in the status of the battery by the battery status/malfunction indicator. This consists of a blank battery gauge containing a symbol. If the symbol is red, this indicates a critical situation. You can check the specific cause of the problem by looking at the symbol(s) displayed in the Battery
Status
Battery status indicator
!
Alternates with the battery gauge on the
Main Screen.
Check in the Battery Status window to see which status symbol is displayed to identify the cause.
Battery malfunction indicator
X
!
The red
!
flashes. Critical battery situation or malfunction. Check in the Battery Status window to see which malfunction indicator is displayed, or refer to the INOP, to identify the cause.
Indicator for missing battery
(flashing red X). An INOP is issued when the battery compartment is empty, and the monitor is connected to AC mains via the external power supply. This !!INSERT
BATTERY
INOP is suppressed for 15 seconds while the monitor is connected to AC mains power, allowing you sufficient time to load a new battery. After silencing, the INOP cycles every
10 seconds until a battery is loaded.
Monitoring Time Available: While the monitor is running on battery power, a time is displayed below the battery power gauge. No time is displayed when the monitor is running on AC mains power via the external power supply (M8023A). This is the estimated monitoring time available with the current battery power. Note that this time fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how many measurements you carry out), the age of the battery, and the remaining capacity of the battery.
Battery Status Window
♦
To access the Battery Status window and its associated pop-up keys, select the battery status information on the Screen, or select Main Setup -> Battery.
Battery Status
2:33 hrs
TimeToEmpty:
Capacity remaining fullCharge
[mAh]
[mAh]
Capacity, Remaining
tells you how much power is left in the battery.
Capacity, Full Charge
tells you how much power the battery can hold when fully charged.
191
18 Using Batteries
Checking Battery Charge
Time To Empty
tells you approximately how long you can continue to use the monitor with this battery. Note that this time fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how many measurements you carry out), the age of the battery, and the remaining capacity of the battery.
Time To Full
is shown in place of Time To Empty if the monitor is connected to mains power via the M8023A external power supply, and tells you how much time is left until the battery is charged to 90%. You can use the M8043A Smart Battery Charger to charge the batteries externally.
Battery status/malfunction symbols: If a problem is detected with the battery, an INOP may be issued, and the following symbols are displayed in the Battery Status window, where they may be accompanied by a battery status message providing more details. Messages appear in the line where
Time To Full/Time to Empty
is shown. Symbols indicating critical situations are colored red.
Battery status symbols
battery is empty
Battery malfunction symbols
(red) incompatible battery battery not charging as the temperature is above or below the specified range battery requires maintenance
(red) battery malfunction
(red) battery has no power left charging stopped to protect the battery (red) battery temperature too high
Printing Battery Reports
To print the information in the Battery Status window on a connected printer,
1
2
Select the battery status information on the Screen to open the Battery Status window
Select the Print Status pop-up key.
Checking Battery Charge
♦
♦
To check the charge status of a battery in a monitor, see the battery power gauge on the Screen or select Main Setup -> Battery to enter the Battery Status window.
To check the charge status of a battery that is not connected to a monitor or battery charger, press the black dot marked “PUSH” on the labeled side of the battery. The remaining charge is indicated by four LEDs on the electronic fuel gauge directly above the dot. Each LED represents 25% of charge. If all LEDs are lit, the battery is fully charged, if only one LED is lit, 25% or less charge is left.
192
Replacing a Battery
Replacing a Battery
To replace the battery,
1
Press the battery eject button. This releases the battery.
18 Using Batteries
Battery eject button
2
3
The INOP !!INSERT BATTERY is suppressed for 15 seconds, allowing you sufficient time to load a new battery.
Remove the battery from the compartment.
Slide the new battery into position with the contacts facing downwards. It should ‘click’ into position when it is fully inserted.
Click!
Optimizing Battery Performance
The performance of rechargeable batteries may deteriorate over time. Battery maintenance as recommended here can help to slow down this process.
193
18 Using Batteries
Optimizing Battery Performance
Display Brightness Setting
♦
In the Main Setup menu, select User Interface -> Brightness - > Optimum.
This selects a level of brightness suitable for most monitoring locations that uses less battery power than brighter settings.
Satisfy yourself that this level of brightness is suitable for your monitoring location.
Note that your monitor may be configured to dim or brighten the display brightness automatically when you disconnect from power, to suit the most common transport scenario
(“TransportBrightn” setting).
Charging a Battery
A battery can be charged in a monitor during monitoring. You can also use the M8043A Smart Battery
Charger to charge batteries.
1
2
Insert the battery into a monitor connected to the external power supply (M8023A).
Charge the battery until it is full, the battery LED goes out, and the battery power gauge is filled.
In certain situations, internal temperature conditions may mean that the battery will not charge. This is sometimes necessary to protect the battery from damage, and does not indicate a malfunction. In this case you must use the M8043A Smart Battery Charger to charge the battery.
Conditioning a Battery
You must condition a battery when its “battery requires maintenance” symbol shows on the Screen. Do not interrupt the charge or discharge cycle during conditioning.
CAUTION
Do not use a monitor being used to monitor patients to condition batteries. The monitor switches off automatically when there is no battery power left.
You can also use the M8043A Smart Battery Charger for external battery conditioning (requires adapter, order number 4512 610 17451). For details please see the Instructions for Use for the Smart
Battery Charger. Do not use any other battery chargers or conditioners.
To condition a battery using a monitor,
1
Insert the battery into a monitor connected to the external power supply.
2
Charge the battery until it is completely full. Open the Battery Status window and check that the Batt fully charged message is displayed.
3
4
Disconnect the monitor from mains power, and let the monitor run until there is no battery power left and the monitor switches itself off.
Reconnect the monitor to mains power and charge the battery until it is full for use or charge to
50% for storage.
Storing a Battery
A battery should not remain inside the monitor if it is not used for a longer period of time. Batteries should be charged to a maximum of 50% for storage.
194
Battery Safety Information
18 Using Batteries
N O T E
The battery will discharge over time if it is stored inside the monitor when not connected to AC power via the external power supply (M8023A). The reported values for “remaining capacity” and “runtime” will become less accurate when the battery is stored in this way for a longer period of time (that is, several weeks).
Battery Safety Information
WARNING
Use only Philips batteries part number M4607A. Use of a different battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
Do not open batteries, or dispose of them in fire, or cause them to short circuit. They may ignite, explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
Dispose of used batteries promptly and in an environmentally-responsible manner. Do not dispose of the battery in normal waste containers. Consult your hospital administrator to find out about local arrangements.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble, heat above 100
°
C (212
°
F) or incinerate the batteries, to avoid the risk of fire and burns. Keep batteries out of the reach of children and in their original package until you are ready to use them.
If battery leakage should occur, use caution in removing the battery. Avoid contact with skin. Refer to qualified service personnel.
195
18 Using Batteries
Battery Safety Information
196
19
19
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
WARNING
Schedule: Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution employing the use of this equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure and possible health hazards.
Contact: If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel, Philips, or your authorized supplier.
Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories
You should perform a visual inspection before every use, and in accordance with your hospital’s policy.
With the monitor switched off:
1
Examine unit exteriors for cleanliness and general physical condition. Make sure that the housings are not cracked or broken, that everything is present, that there are no spilled liquids and that there are no signs of abuse.
2
Inspect all accessories (cables, transducers, sensors and so forth). If any show signs of damage, do not use.
3
Switch the monitor on and make sure the backlight is bright enough. Check that screen is at its full brightness. If the brightness is not adequate, contact your service personnel or your supplier.
Inspecting the Cables and Cords
1
2
3
Examine all system cables, the power plug and cord for damage. Make sure that the prongs of the plug do not move in the casing. If damaged, replace it with an appropriate Philips power cord.
Inspect the patient cables, leads and their strain reliefs for general condition. Make sure there are no breaks in the insulation. Make sure that the connectors are properly engaged at each end to prevent rotation or other strain.
Apply the transducer or electrodes to the patient, and with the monitor switched on, flex the patient cables near each end to make sure that there are no intermittent faults.
197
19 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule
The following tasks are for Philips-qualified service professionals only. All maintenance tasks and performance tests are documented in detail in the service documentation supplied on the monitor documentation CD.
Ensure that these tasks are carried out as indicated by the monitor’s maintenance schedule, or as specified by local laws. Contact a Philips-qualified service provider if your monitor needs a safety or performance test. Clean and disinfect equipment to decontaminate it before testing or maintaining it.
Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency
Monitor Tests
Safety checks. Selected tests on the basis of IEC 60601-1
At least once every two years, or as needed, after any repairs where the power supply is removed or replaced, or if the monitor has been dropped.
Monitor Maintenance
Check ECG synchronization of the monitor and defibrillator (only if hospital protocol requires use of monitor during defibrillation)
Measurement Tests
Performance assurance for all measurements not listed below.
Measurement Maintenance
NBP calibration
Microstream CO
2 performance test
calibration and
Mainstream and sidestream CO
2 calibration check
Battery Maintenance
Battery
At least once every two years, or as needed.
At least once every two years, or if you suspect the measurement values are incorrect.
At least once every two years, or as specified by local laws.
At least once a year or after 4000 operating hours.
At least once a year, or if you suspect the measurement values are incorrect.
See the section on Maintaining Batteries
198
Troubleshooting
19 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with an individual measurement, read the Instructions for Use and doublecheck that you have set up the measurement correctly.
If you suspect an intermittent, system-wide problem call your service personnel. You may be asked for information from the status log. To view the status log,
1
2
In the
Main Setup
menu, select Revision.
View the status log by selecting the Stat Log pop-up key.
3
View the status log by selecting Status Log from the Monitor Revision window.
Disposing of the Monitor
WARNING
To avoid contaminating or infecting personnel, the environment or other equipment, make sure you disinfect and decontaminate the monitor appropriately before disposing of it in accordance with your country’s laws for equipment containing electrical and electronic parts. For disposal of parts and accessories such as thermometers, where not otherwise specified, follow local regulations regarding disposal of hospital waste.
You can disassemble the monitor as described in the Service Guide.
– There is no metal molded into the plastic case, and there are no metal sprays on the plastic.
– All plastic parts with a weight greater than 10g (0.35 ounces) are marked with the ISO code for identification.
– The sheet metal card cage uses only one kind of steel.
– The screen has a touch resistor laminate.
– You can recycle the paper Instructions for Use.
The battery can be easily removed (see “Replacing a Battery” on page 193),
and can be returned, free of charge, to the worldwide-recycling program run by the battery manufacturer (contact your local supplier).
This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or federal laws. Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display contain mercury.
Do not dispose of waste electrical and electronic equipment as unsorted municipal waste.
Collect it separately, so that it can be safely and properly reused, treated, recycled, or recovered.
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders
1
2
3
Empty the cylinder completely by pushing in the pin of the regulator valve or by pulling out the pin of the fill valve using a tire valve stem wrench or a pair of needle nose pliers.
When the cylinder is empty, either remove the valve stem from the fill (or regulator) hole, or drill a hole in the cylinder.
Write “Empty” on the cylinder and dispose of it appropriately for scrap metal.
199
19 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders
WARNING
Ensure that the cylinder is completely empty before trying to remove the valve stem or drill a hole in the cylinder.
200
20
20
Accessories
You can order parts and accessories from Philips supplies at www.medical.philips.com or consult your local Philips representative for details.
WARNING
Reuse: Never reuse disposable transducers, sensors, accessories and so forth that are intended for single use, or single patient use only. Reuse may compromise device functionality and system performance and cause a potential hazard.
Philips’ approval: Use only Philips-approved accessories.Using non-Philips-approved accessories may compromise device functionality and system performance and cause a potential hazard
Packaging: Do not use a sterilized accessory if its packaging is damaged.
ECG/Resp Accessories
This symbol indicates that the cables and accessories are designed to have special protection against electric shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof.
The following cables may not all be available in all countries. Please check availability with your local
Philips supplier.
Recommended Cables
Trunk Cables
3-Electrode
Cable Set
5-Electrode
Cable Set
Part No. M1669A
Length 2.7m
M1668A
2.7m
6-Electrode
Cable Set
M1667A
2.7m
10-Electrode
Cable set
(5+5)
10-Electrode
Cable set
(6+4)
M1663A
2.0m
M1665A
2.7m
201
20 Accessories
ECG/Resp Accessories
3-Electrode Cable Sets
Description
OR Grabber shielded
ICU Grabber shielded
ICU snap shielded
ICU Clip non-shielded
ICU Clip non-shielded
5-Electrode Cable Sets
Description
OR Grabber shielded
ICU Grabber shielded
ICU Snap shielded
ICU Miniclip non-shielded
Length
1.0m
1.0m
1.0m
0.45m
0.7m
Length
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
0.7m/1.3m
AAMI Part No.
M1675A
M1671A
M1673A
M1622A
M1624A
IEC Part No.
M1678A
M1672A
M1674A
--
M1626A
AAMI Part No.
M1973A
M1968A
M1644A
M1647A
IEC Part No.
M1974A
M1971A
M1645A
M1648A
6-Electrode Cable Sets
Description
OR Grabber
ICU Grabber
ICU Snap
Length
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
10-Electrode (5+5)Cable Sets
Description Length
ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0m
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m
For Limb Leads see 5-electrode cable sets
AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.
M1684A M1685A
M1680A M1681A
M1682A M1683A
AAMI Part No.
M1976A
M1602A
M1979A
IEC Part No.
M1978A
M1604A
M1984A
10-Electrode (6+4)Cable Sets
Description Length
ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0m
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m
For Limb Leads see 6-electrode cable sets
AAMI Part No.
M1532A
M1537A
M1557A
IEC Part No.
M1533A
M1538A
M1558A
202
ECG/Resp Accessories
One-piece Cables
20 Accessories
Description
3-lead Grabber, ICU
5-lead Grabber, ICU
Length
1.0m
1.0m
AAMI Part No.
989803143181
989803143201
Radio-translucent Cables
Pack of five single wires, radio-translucent, 0.9m, M1649A
Set Combiners and Organizers
Set combiners and organizers
Set combiner
Set organizer for shielded leadsets - grabber and snap
Set organizer for nonshielded lead sets - miniclip
3-electrode
5-electrode
3-electrode
4-electrode
5-electrode
6-electrode
3-electrode
5-electrode
Bedsheet clip
Replacement red cover for trunk cable (for 5-electrode cable sets)
Supported Cables
Part No.
M1501A
M1502A
M1503A
M1664A
M1504A
M1679A
M1636A
M1638A
M1509A
989808148861
Trunk Cables
Length
0.9m
2.7m
3-Electrode Cable Set
AAMI
Part No.
M1540C
M1500A
IEC
Part No.
M1550C
M1510A
5-Electrode Cable Set
AAMI
Part No.
M1560C
M1520A
IEC
Part No.
M1570C
M1530A
IEC Part No.
989803143171
989803143191
203
20 Accessories
ECG/Resp Accessories
3-Electrode Cable Sets
Description Length
OR 1.0m
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0m
ICU snap shielded
ICU Clip non-shielded
ICU Clip non-shielded
1.0m
0.45m
0.7m
5-Electrode Cable Sets
Description
OR Grabber shielded
ICU Grabber shielded
ICU Snap shielded
ICU Clip non-shielded
Length
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
1.0m/1.6m
0.7m/1.3m
AAMI Part No.
M1601A
M1603A
M1605A
M1608A
M1609A
IEC Part No.
M1611A
M1613A
M1615A
M1618A
M1619A
AAMI Part No.
M1621A
M1623A
M1625A
M1629A
IEC Part No.
M1631A
M1633A
M1635A
M1639A
3-Electrode One Piece Cables
AAMI 3-Electrode
One Piece Cables
OR Grabber
ICU Snap
Length
1.9m
1.9m
AAMI
Part No.
IEC 3-electrode One
Piece Cables
IEC
Part No.
M1970A OR Grabber M1980A
M1972A ICU M1981A
5-Electrode One Piece Cables
AAMI 5-electrode
One Piece Cables
OR Grabber
ICU Snap
Length
2.5m
2.5m
AAMI
Part No.
M1975A
M1977A
Set Combiners and Organizers
Set combiners and organizers
Set combiner
Set organizer
3-electrode
5-electrode
Shielded 3-electrode
Shielded 5-electrode
Bedsheet clip
IEC 5-electrode One
Piece Cables
OR Grabber
ICU Grabber
IEC
Part No.
M1985A
M1986A
Part No.
M1501A
M1502A
M1503A
M1504A
M1509A
204
NBP Accessories
20 Accessories
NBP Accessories
These cuffs and tubings are designed to have special protection against electric shocks
(particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof. You can use them during electrosurgery.
Adult/Pediatric Multi-Patient Comfort Cuffs and Disposable Cuffs
Patient Category Limb
Circumference
Bladder
Width
Adult (Thigh)
Large Adult
Adult
Small Adult
Pediatric
Infant
42 to 54 cm
34 to 43 cm
20 cm
16 cm
27 to 35 cm 13 cm
20.5 to 28 cm 10.5 cm
14 to 21.5 cm 8 cm
10 to 15 cm 5.5 cm
Disposable cuff
Part No.
M1879A
M1878A
M1877A
M1876A
M1875A
M1874A
Reusable Cuff Kits
Reusable cuff
Part No.
Tubing
M1576A
M1575A
M1574A
M1573A
M1572A
M1571A
M1598B (1.5m) or
M1599B (3m)
Cuff Kits Part No.
Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult
Small adult, adult, large adult, thigh
M1577A
M1578A
Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult, large adult, thigh M1579A
Adult/Pediatric Antimicrobial Coated Reusable cuffs
Patient Category (color) Limb
Circumference
(cm)
Adult Thigh (grey) 45 - 56.5
Large Adult X-Long (burgundy) 35.5 - 46.0
Large Adult (burgundy)
Adult X-Long (navy blue)
35.5 - 46.0
27.5 - 36.5
Adult (navy blue)
Small Adult (royal blue)
Pediatric (green)
Infant (orange)
27.5 - 36.5
20.5 - 28.5
13.8 - 21.5
9 - 14.8
Bladder Width Part No.
21.0 cm
17.0 cm
17.0 cm
13.5 cm
13.5 cm
10.6 cm
8.0 cm
5.4 cm
M4559A
M4558A
M4557A
M4556A
M4555A
M4554A
M4553A
M4552A
Tubing
M1598B
(1.5m) or
M1599B (3m)
205
20 Accessories
Invasive Pressure Accessories
Adult/Pediatric Soft Single Patient Single-Hose Disposable Cuffs
Tubing Patient Category
Adult (Thigh)
Large Adult X-Long
Large Adult
Adult X-Long
Adult
Small Adult
Pediatric
Infant
Limb Circumference
(cm)
Bladder
Width
45 - 56.5 cm
35.5 - 46 cm
35.5 - 46 cm
27.5 - 36.5
27.5 - 36.5 cm
20.5 - 28.5 cm
15.0 - 21.5 cm
9 - 15 cm
20.4 cm
16.4 cm
16.4 cm
13.1 cm
13.1 cm
10.4 cm
8.0 cm
5.6 cm
Neonatal/Infant Cuffs (Disposable, non-sterile)
Part No.
M4579A
M4578A
M4577A
M4576A
M4575A
M4574A
M4573A
M4572A
M1598B (1.5m) or
M1599B (3m)
Cuffs
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Limb Circumference
(cm)
3.1 to 5.7 cm
4.3 to 8.0 cm
5.8 to 10.9 cm
7.1 to 13.1 cm
Bladder Width Part No.
2.2 cm
2.8 cm
3.9 cm
4.7 cm
M1866A
M1868A
M1870A
M1872A
Tubing
M1596B (1.5m) or
M1597B (3m)
Invasive Pressure Accessories
These transducers and accessories are designed to have special protection against electric shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof.
SpO
2
Accessories
Some Nellcor sensors contain natural rubber latex which may cause allergic reactions. See the
Instructions for Use supplied with the sensors for more information. M1901B, M1902B, M1903B and M1904B disposable sensors are not available in USA from Philips. Purchase Nellcor sensors and adapter cables directly from Tyco Healthcare.
Do not use more than one extension cable with any sensors or adapter cables. Do not use an extension cable with Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates “Long” version).
All listed sensors operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin, if the initial skin temperature does not exceed 35°C.
Make sure that you use only the accessories that are specified for use with this device, otherwise patient injury can result.
206
SpO
2
Accessories
Product
Number
Description Comments
Philips reusable sensors.
M1191A/B Adult sensor (2m cable), for patients over 50 kg. Any finger, except thumb.
M1191A/B with longer cable (3 m) M1191AL/
BL
M1192A
M1193A
Small adult, pediatric sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
Neonatal sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand or foot.
M1194A
M1195A
Ear sensor (1.5m cable) for patients more than 40 kg.
Infant sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 4kg and 15 kg. Any finger except thumb.
No adapter cable required.
M1196A
M1191T
Adult clip sensor (3m cable) for patients over 40 kg. Any finger except thumb.
No adapter cable required.
Adult sensor (0.45m cable), for patients over 50 kg. Any finger, except thumb.
Requires M1943
(1 m) or M1943AL
(3 m) adapter cable
M1192T
M1193T
Small adult, pediatric sensor (0.45m cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
Neonatal sensor (0.9m cable) for patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand or foot.
M1196T Adult clip sensor (0.9m cable) for patients over 40 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1191ANL Special Edition (SE) No adapter cable required.
Adult sensor (3m cable), for patients over 50 kg. Any finger, except thumb.
M1192AN Special Edition (SE)
Small adult, pediatric sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193AN Special Edition (SE)
Neonatal sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand or foot.
20 Accessories
207
20 Accessories
Product
Number
Description Comments
M1194AN Special Edition (SE)
Ear sensor (1.5m cable) for patients more than 40 kg.
M1195AN Special Edition (SE)
Infant sensor (1.5m cable) for patients between 4 kg and 15 kg. Any finger except thumb.
No adapter cable required.
Philips disposable sensors. Not available in the USA.
M1904B
M1903B
M1902B
M1901B
Identical to OxiMax MAX-A
Identical to OxiMax MAX-P
Identical to OxiMax MAX-I
Identical to OxiMax MAX-N
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL.
Philips disposable sensors. Available worldwide.
M1131A
M1132A
M1133A
Adult/Pediatric finger sensor, 0.45m cable (patient size >20 kg)
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL.
Infant finger or toe sensor, 0.9m cable
(patient size 3 - 10 kg)
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL.
Adult/Infant/Neonatal, 0.9m cable
Foot or hand for neonates < 3 kg
Big toe or thumb for patients between
10kg and 20kg
Any finger except thumb for patients
> 40kg
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL.
SpO
2
Accessories
NELLCOR disposable sensors (must be ordered from Nellcor)
OxiMax
MAX-A
OxiMax
MAX-AL
OxiMax
MAX-P
OxiMax
MAX-I
OxiMax
MAX-N
Adult finger sensor (patient size kg)
OxiMax MAX-A with long cable
>30
Pediatric foot/hand sensor (patient size
10-50 kg)
Infant foot/hand sensor (patient size
3-20 kg)
Adult finger or neonatal foot/hand sensor (patient size
>40 kg or <3 kg)
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL.
208
SpO
2
Accessories
Product
Number
Description Comments
Oxisensor II
D-25
Oxisensor II
D-20
Adult sensor (patient size
>30kg)
Pediatric sensor (patient size 10-50 kg)
Oxisensor II
I-20
Oxisensor II
N-25
Infant sensor (patient size 3-20 kg)
Neonatal sensor (patient size
>40 kg)
OxiCliq A See OxiMax MAX-A
OxiCliq P See OxiMax MAX-P
OxiCliq I See OxiMax MAX-I
OxiCliq N See OxiMax MAX-N
<3 kg or
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL
Use adapter cable
M1943A or
M1943AL together with OC-3 adapter cable.
Extension / Adapter Cables for Philips and Nellcor Sensors
M1941A
M1943A
M1943AL
OC-3
Extension cable (2 m)
Adapter cable (1.1 m cable)
Adapter cable (3 m cable)
Adapter Cable for OxiCliq sensors
For use with Philips reusable sensors and adapter cables.
Adapter cable for
Philips/Nellcor disposable sensors.
Available from
Nellcor only.
20 Accessories
Product
Number
Description
MASIMO LNOP
®
reusable sensors.
LNOP DC-I Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg)
LNOP DC-IP Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg)
LNOP YI Multi-site Sensor (> 1 kg)
LNOP TC-I Ear Sensor (> 30 kg)
MASIMO LNCS
®
reusable sensors.
Philips Part
Number
989803140321
989803140331 n/a
989803140341
LNCS DC-I Adult reusable Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803148281
LNCS DC-IP Pediatric reusable Sensor (10 - 50 kg) 989803148291
LNCS TC-I Reusable ear Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803148301
LNCS TF-I Reusable forehead Sensor (> 30 kg)
MASIMO LNOP
®
disposable adhesive sensors.
989803148311
LNOP Adt
LNOP Adtx
LNOP Pdt
LNOP Pdtx
Adult Sensor (> 30 kg)
Adult Sensor (> 30 kg)
Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg)
Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg)
989803140231 n/a
989803140261 n/a
209
20 Accessories
Temperature Accessories
Product
Number
Description
LNOP Inf-L Infant Toe Sensor (3 - 20 kg)
LNOP Neo-L Neonatal Sensor (<3kg) or Adult adhesive Sensor (> 40 kg)
LNOP NeoPt-L Neonatal Pre-Term Sensitive Skin
Sensors (<1kg)
MASIMO LNCS
®
disposable adhesive sensors.
Philips Part
Number
989803140311
989803140291
989803140301
LNCS Adtx
LNCS Pdtx
Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg)
Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg)
LNCS Inf-L
LNCS Neo-L
Infant Toe Sensor (3 - 20 kg)
Neonatal Foot Sensor (< 3 kg) or Adult Finger Sensor (> 40 kg)
LNCS NeoPt-L Neonatal pre-term sensitive skin Sensor
(< 1 kg)
Adapter Cable for MASIMO sensors.
989803148231
989803148241
989803148251
989803148271
989803148261
LNOP MP12 LNOP MP Series Patient Cable (3.6 m)
Adapter Cable for Masimo LNOP
Sensors
LNC MP10 LNCS MP Series Patient Cable (3.0 m)
Adapter Cable for Masimo LNCS
Sensors
451261000761
989803148221
The monitor uses Masimo certified pulse oximetry for reduced noise and low perfusion performance with Masimo Sensors under the Masimo NR&LP protocol available from Masimo
Temperature Accessories
Temperature Probes
Reusable
General purpose probe
Small flexible vinyl probe (Infant/Pediatric)
Attachable surface probe
Disposable
General purpose probe
Skin probe
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (12 French)
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 18)
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 24)
Foley Catheter Probe (12 French)
210
Part No.
21075A
21076A
21078A
M1837A
21091A
21093A
21094A
21095A
M2255A
Minimum measurement time for accurate readings
90 sec
60 sec
60 sec
90 sec
60 sec
180 sec
210 sec
310 sec
180 sec
Mainstream CO
2
Accessories
Temperature Probes Part No.
Foley Catheter Probe (16 French)
Foley Catheter Probe (18 French)
Adapter cable 1.5m
Adapter cable 3.0m
Mainstream CO
2
Accessories
21096A
21097A
21082B
21082A
Description Part No.
CO
2
Sensor M2501A
Adult/Pediatric Airway Adapter (reusable) M2513A
Infant Airway Adapter (reusable)
Adult Airway Adapter (single-patient use)
Infant Airway Adapter (single-patient use)
M2516A
M2533A
M2536A
Sidestream CO
2
Accessories
Description
CO
2
Sensor
Nasal and Oral-Nasal Cannulas
CO
2
Nasal Cannula, Adult
CO
2
Nasal Cannula, Pediatric
CO
2
Nasal Cannula, Infant
CO
2
/ O
2
Nasal Cannula, Adult
CO
2
/ O
2
Nasal Cannula, Pediatric
CO
2
Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult
CO
2
Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric
CO
2
/ O
2
Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult
CO
2
/ O
2
Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric
Airway Adapters
Airway Adapter Set, ET > 4.0 mm
Airway Adapter Set H, ET > 4.0 mm
Airway Adapter Set H, ET =< 4.0 mm
Straight Sample Lines
Straight Sample Line
Straight Sample Line H
Part No.
M2741A
M2744A
M2745A
M2746A
M2750A
M2751A
M2756A
M2757A
M2760A
M2761A
M2768A
M2772A
M2773A
M2776A
M2777A
20 Accessories
Minimum measurement time for accurate readings
180 sec
180 sec
211
20 Accessories
Mainstream CO
2
Accessories (for M3016A)
Mainstream CO
2
Accessories (for M3016A)
Description
CO
2
Sensor
Standard Airway Adapter (reusable)
Small Airway Adapter (reusable)
Part No.
M1460A
M1465A
14363A
Microstream CO
2
Accessories
• “FilterLine Set” is a combination of a FilterLine with an Airway Adapter.
• “H” in the accessory name indicates suitability for humidified ventilation and longer usage due to the active removal of humidity from the sample line.
• “Smart CapnoLine” is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine.
• “Smart CapnoLine O
2
” is a combined oral-nasal-O
2
-CO
2
FilterLine.
• “NIV Line” is a nasal FilterLine suitable for mask ventilation (for example, C-PAP).
• “Single purpose” means CO
2
measurement only, “dual purpose” means CO
2
measurement and O
2 delivery.
• The accessories are supplied in packs of 25.
Microstream accessory selection flowchart
Is the patient intubated?
Yes No
Short-term
(up to 6 hours)
Long-term
(up to 72 hours)
Does the patient need oxygen?
Short term
(up to 8 hours)
Oral/Nasal
Yes
Long term
(up to 24 hours)
Nasal
No
Long-term
(up to 24 hours)
Short term
(up to 8 hours)
Short term
(up to 8 hours)
Nasal Oral/Nasal Nasal
Key Applications
Critical Care OR, EMS, ED Procedural
Sedation, Critical
Care, EMS, ED
Critical Care,
Sleep Lab, Longterm Pain
Management
Critical Care,
Sleep Lab
Procedural
Sedation,
Critical Care,
EMS, ED
EMS, ED
Philips part numbers (A = Adult, P= Pediatric, I = Infant, N = Neonate)
FilterLine Set:
A/P: M1920A
FilterLine:
M1925A*
FilterLine H Set:
A/P: M1921A
I/N: M1923A
Smart
CapnoLine O
2
:
A: M2522A
FilterLine H:
P: M2520A
M1926A*
*Not available in all geographies.
CapnoLine HO
2
:
A: M4680A
P: M4681A
CapnoLine H:
A: M4689A
P: M4690A
I/N: M4691A
Smart
CapnoLine:
A: M2526A
P: M2524A
NIV Line:
A: 4686A
P: M4687A
212
Battery Accessories
Battery Accessories
Description
Battery Charger and Conditioner (requires size adapter 4512 610
17451 to charge M4607A battery)
Size adapter for M4607A battery
Part No.
M8043A
4512 610 17451
20 Accessories
213
20 Accessories
Battery Accessories
214
21
21
Specifications
Intended Use
The monitor is intended to be used for monitoring and recording of, and to generate alarms for, multiple physiological parameters of adults, pediatrics, and neonates in a hospital environment and during patient transport inside and outside of the hospital environment. The monitor is intended for use by health care professionals.
The monitor is only for use on one patient at a time. It is not intended for home use. Not a therapeutic device.
Rx only: U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for use with neonatal and pediatric patients.
The ECG measurement is intended to be used for diagnostic recording of rhythm and detailed morphology of complex cardiac complexes (according to AAMI EC 11).
N O T E Hospital Environment
The monitor is suitable for use in all medically used rooms which fulfil the requirements regarding electrical installation according to IEC60364-7-710 “Requirements for special installations or locations
- Medical locations”, or corresponding local regulations.
Indication for Use
The monitor is indicated for use by health care professionals whenever there is a need for monitoring the physiological parameters of patients.
Manufacturer’s Information
You can write to Philips at this address
Philips Medizin Systeme Boeblingen GmbH
Hewlett-Packard-Str. 2
71034 Boeblingen
Germany
Visit our website at: www.philips.com.
© Copyright 2002 - 2007. Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All Rights Reserved.
215
21 Specifications
Symbols
Trademark Acknowledgement
The following are trademarks of Nellcor Puritan Bennett Incorporated: Nellcor
®
, Durasensor
Y
®
, Oxiband
®
, Oxicliq
®
, OxiMax
®
. MAX-FAST
®
is a trademark of Mallinckrodt Inc.
®
, Dura-
Microstream
®
, FilterLine
®
, and Smart CapnoLine
®
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oridion
Systems Ltd.
Masimo
®
, Masimo SET
®
, and LNOP are federally registered trademarks of the Masimo Corporation.
Other product and company names mentioned in this book may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Symbols
These symbols can appear on the monitor and its associated equipment.
‘These symbols can appear on the monitor and its associated equipment (depending on options).
Symbols
Refer to accompanying documents
DC power source
On/Off/Standby
Battery symbol
Main Screen
Battery Eject
SmartKeys
Pressure connector
ECG Sync Pulse Output indicator
Temperature connector
Connection direction indicator
Connector has special protection against electric shocks and is defibrillator proof
216
Installation Safety Information
Symbols
NBP connector
21 Specifications
Silence Alarms
SpO
2
connector
Alarms
Uses FAST SpO
2 algorithm
Alarms Off
ECG connector
LAN connection indicator for connection to a wired network
Error LED
IntelliVue
Instrument
Telemetry wireless network
2002-
06
Identifies year and month of manufacture
Always use separate collection for waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE)
Installation Safety Information
WARNING
If multiple instruments are connected to a patient, the sum of the leakage currents may exceed the limits given in IEC/EN60601-1, IEC60601-1-1, UL60601-1. Consult your service personnel.
Earthing The monitor must be earthed during operation. The earthing is for functional purposes and does not provide protection against electric shock. The protection against electric shock in this device is provided by double and/or reinforced insulation. If a three-wire receptacle is not available, consult the hospital electrician. Never use a three-wire to twowire adapter.
Combining equipment Combinations of medical equipment with non-medical equipment must comply with
IEC 60601-1-1. Never use a multiple portable socket-outlet or extension cord when combining equipment unless the socket outlet is supplied specifically for use with that equipment.
Network Cables All network cables must be unshielded.
Connectors
The actual placement of boards and configuration of connections for your monitor depends on how
your hardware has been configured. See the symbols table on page 216 to see which symbols are used
to mark the connections.
WARNING
• Connect only medical devices to the ECG output connector socket.
• Connecting the ECG sync out to external equipment should only be done by a qualified user. Do not touch the patient when you have contact to the ECG output connector socket.
217
21 Specifications
Altitude Setting
• Always connect the ECG sync cable first to the external device and then to the monitor. Wherever possible, pre-install the cable before the patient is brought into the vicinity of the equipment.
Altitude Setting
Altitude affects CO
2 altitude.
measurements. The monitor must be configured at installation to the correct
Monitor Safety Specifications
0366
The monitor complies with the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
In addition, the product complies with:
IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995; EN60601-1:1990 + A1:1993 + A2:1995; UL 60601-
1:2003; CAN/CSA C22.2#601.1-M90; JIS T 0601-1:1999; IEC 60601-1-1:2001; EN 60601-1-
1:2001; IEC 60601-1-2:2001; EN 60601-1-2:2001.
Classification (according to IEC 60601-1): Class II, Type CF, Continuous Operation.
The possibility of hazards arising from software errors was minimized in compliance with ISO
14971:2000, EN60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999 and IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999.
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-
001 du Canada.
The MP2 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry WMTS (US only)
complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference
.
Operation of this equipment requires the prior coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
The MP2 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry ISM (2.4 GHz) - FCC and Industry Canada
Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by
Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radio frequency interference and void your authority to operate this equipment.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive). Class 2 radio equipment. Member states may apply restrictions on putting this device into service or placing it on the market.
This product is intended to be connected to the Publicly Available Interfaces (PAI) and used throughout the EEA.
218
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance
21 Specifications
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance
The MP2 patient monitor, with the following measurements and interfaces:
– ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO
2
, Pressure, Temperature, CO
2
(only Mainstream Sensor M2501A)
– LAN, Battery can be used in a transport environment such as a road ambulance, airplane or helicopter. For this purpose the monitor fulfils the following additional mechanical, EMC and environmental requirements:
• Shock Tests according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to IEC/EN
60068-2-27 (peak acceleration up to 100 g).
• Random Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to IEC/
EN 60068-2-64 (RMS acceleration 5 g).
• Sinusoidal Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (acceleration up to amplitude 2 g).
• Bump Test according to IEC/EN60068-2-29 (peak acceleration 15 g, 1000 bumps).
• Free Fall Test according to EN1789 (covers also IEC TR 60721-4-7 and Class 7M3). Test procedure according to EN 60068-2-32 (height 0.75 m).
• Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures according to IEC/EN 60529: IP 32
• EN 1789 +A1:2003 Medical vehicles and their equipment - Road ambulances (chapter 6 - Medical
Devices).
• Radiated susceptibility 20 V/m according to EN ISO 9919 (SpO
2
) and EN ISO 21647 (CO
2
).
• Altitude Range from -500 to 3000 m operating and -500 to 4600 m storage and transportation.
• Extended radiated susceptibility tests
The MP2 patient monitor with its out-of-hospital parameter set provides a general immunity level of
20 V/m with only few restrictions. Details are as listed below:
– GSM 900: Immunity at 900 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m (ECG:10V/m), duty cycle
1:8
– GSM 1800: Immunity at 1800 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:8.
– DECT: Immunity at 1800 MHz (digital cordless phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:24
– AM: 1 kHz Immunity from 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz (any radio communication unit, broadcasting and TV transmitter), 20 V/m, modulation factor 80 %.
(ECG: 20 V/m except 600-950 MHz where it is 10 V/m and Temperature which holds 3 V/m over the full range).
CAUTION
Temperature measurement accuracy may be compromised in the presence of strong electromagnetic fields (>3 V/m) in certain small frequency bands.
• Magnetic Field emission according to MIL STD 461E, Chapter RE101: Radiated emissions, magnetic field, 30 Hz to 100 kHz. Limit class: Army.
• Magnetic Field susceptibility: Radiated susceptibility, magnetic field, 50, 60 and 400 Hz,
18 µT(15 A/m)
• Operating ambient temperature testing over the range from 0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F).
219
21 Specifications
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance
• Operating ambient humidity testing up to 95 % RH at 40°C (100°F), non condensing.
• EN 13718-1: Patient transport in air, on water and in difficult terrain - Part 1: Special requirements on interfaces of medical products for continuous care of patients.
N O T E
Additional requirements can be necessary for transport situations in air, on water or in difficult terrain in certain countries, e.g. EU.
Physical Specifications
Specification
Maximum Weight
1.5 kg
(3.3 lb)
Size (W x H x D)
188 x 99 x 86 mm
7.4 x 3.9 x 3.4 in
Comments
including battery, without options without handle and options
M8023A External Power Supply Weight and Dimensions
Maximum Weight
680 g ± 10%
(1.5 lb ± 10%)
Size (W x H x D)
207 x 70 x 113 mm
8.1 x 2.8 x 4.4 in
Environmental Specifications
The monitor may not meet the performance specifications given here if stored or used outside the specified temperature and humidity ranges.
The monitor is protected against ingress of objects and fluids according to IEC 60529 IP32 (applies to all options intended for out-of-hospital use). However, do not expose the monitor directly to heavy rain.
When the monitor and related products have differing environmental specifications, the effective range for the combined products is that range which is common to the specifications for all products.
Item Condition
Temperature Range
Operating
Storage including transportation
Temperature Range when charging the battery
Operating
Humidity Range
Operating
Storage including transportation
Range
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
0 to 40°C (32 to 95°F)
15 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
5 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
220
Monitor Performance Specifications
21 Specifications
Item Condition Range
Altitude Range
Operating
Storage including transportation
-500 m to 3000 m (10000 ft)
-500 m to 4600 m
1
(15000 ft)
Ingress Protection
Monitor (when specified for out-ofhospital use)
IP32 (protected against ingress of water when the water is dripping vertically and the monitor is tilted up to 15°)
Monitor (when not specified for out-ofhospital use)
IPX1 (protection against ingress of water when the water is dripping vertically)
1.Sufficient for flight altitudes up to 12,000 m with pressurized cabins.
Monitor Performance Specifications
Performance Specifications
Power Specifications
Power consumption
Operating Voltage
Battery Specifications
Operating Time
(with new, fully charged battery at
25°C)
Charge Time
Indicators
<12 W average
<30 W while battery is loading
36 to 60 V DC floating
Basic monitoring configuration: 2.5 hours
(Brightness set to Optimum, ECG/Resp, SpO
2 measurements in use, NBP measurement every 15 minutes)
When monitor is off: 2 hours
When monitor is in use, and connected to the external power supply (M8023A), without MMS extensions: 12 hours approx.
Alarms Off
Alarms red (crossed-out alarm symbol) LED red/yellow/cyan LED
On/Standby / Error green / red LED
AC Power green LED
Sounds
Trends
Alarm signal
Battery
External Power yellow (charging)/red blinking (empty) LED green LED
Audible feedback for user input
Prompt tone
QRS tone, or SpO
2
modulation tone
4 different alarm sounds
Resolution
Information
12 or 16 numerics @ 12 sec, 1 minute, 5 minute resolution.
Multiple choices of number of numerics, resolution and duration depending on trend option and application area.
For example:
For neonatal, you can choose between 12 and 16 numerics.
less than 3 seconds System delay
Pause duration 1,2,3 minutes or infinite, depending on configuration
Extended alarm pause 5 or 10 minutes
221
21 Specifications
Monitor Performance Specifications
Performance Specifications
Review Alarms
Information
Real Time Clock
Buffered Memory
Capacity
Range
Accuracy
Hold Time
Hold Time
Contents all alarms / inops, main alarms on/off, alarm silence and time of occurrence
500 items from: January 1, 1997, 00:00 to: December 31, 2080, 23:59
<4 seconds per day (typically) infinite if powered by external power supply; otherwise at least
48 hours if powered by external power supply: infinite without power: at least 48 hours
Active settings, trends, patient data, realtime reports, review alarms
M8023A External Power Supply Performance Specifications
Power Specifications
Indicators
Power consumption
Line Voltage
Current
Frequency
AC Power
<12 W average
<30 W peak
100 to 240 V ~
0.7 to 0.4 A
50/60 Hz ~ green LED
Monitor Interface Specifications
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors
Power
Power Sync.
LAN signals
Serial signals
Local signals
ECG Sync Pulse
Output
Cable detection
Marker In
(See “Connectors” on page 217 for safety-
related information)
Wave Output
Connector
Output levels
Isolation
Pulse Width
Delay from R-wave peak to start of pulse
Minimum required Rwave amplitude
0.5 V
Female ODU (Proprietary)
30 V to 60 V input
RS-422 compliant input 78.125k Hz (typical)
IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
RS-422 compliant
Provided for connecting measurement extensions
Yes
No
No
Binder Series 709/719
Output low <0.8 V @ I = -4 mA
Output high >2.4 V @ I = 4 mA
None
100 +/-10 ms (high)
20 ms maximum per AAMI EC13
222
M4607A Battery Specifications
21 Specifications
M8023A External Power Supply Interface Specifications
Measurement Link
(MSL)
Connectors
Power
Power Sync.
LAN signals
Serial signals
Local signals
Male ODU (Proprietary)
48 V output
RS-422 compliant output 78.125 kHz (typical)
IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
RS-422 compliant output 78.125 kHz (typical)
Not connected
Display Specifications
Integrated QVGA
Display
Sweep Speeds
Resolution
Refresh frequency
Useful screen
Pixel size
6.25, 12.5, 25 and 50 mm/s;
320 x 240
60 Hz
72 x 54 mm (2.8 x 2.1 in)
0.22 x 0.22 mm
Compatible Devices
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network (USA only)
Internal WMTS Adapter Technology compatible with Philips Cellular Telemetry System
(CTS), cellular infrastructure
Frequency Band WMTS, 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1432 MHz
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network (except USA, MP20/30/40/50 only)
Internal ISM Adapter Technology compatible with Philips Cellular Telemetry System
(CTS), cellular infrastructure
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM
M4607A Battery Specifications
One battery is required for battery operation of the monitor.
M4607A Battery Specifications
Physical Specifications
W x D x H
Performance Specifications
Nominal Voltage
Rated Capacity at discharge C/5
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range
Humidity Range
66 mm (2.36 in) x 80 mm (3.15 in) x 20 mm (0.79 in)
10.8 Volt
1000 mAh (typical)
Discharge 0 to 60
°C (32 to 122°F)
Charge 0 to 60
°C (32 to 122°F)
Storage and Transportation: -20 to 65
°C (-4 to 140°F)
Operating: 15 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
Storage and Transportation: 5 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
223
21 Specifications
M4607A Battery Specifications
Battery Type
Safety
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Communication Standard
M4607A Battery Specifications
Lithium Ion Mangan, 10.8 V, 1000 mAh, complies with UL 1642 (UL Recognized) complies with the requirements for FCC Type B computing Device, and EN 61000-4-2 and EN 61000-3-2 complies with the SMBus specification v1.1
224
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
Measurement Specifications
See the Appendix on Default Settings for a list of the settings the monitor is initially shipped with.
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Complies with IEC 60601-2-25:1993 + A1:1999 /EN60601-2-25:1995 + A1:1999, IEC 60601-2-
27:2005/EN60601-2-27:2006, IEC 60601-2-51:2003 /EN 60601-2-51:2003 and AAMI EC11/
EC13:1991/2002.
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications
Cardiotach
PVC Rate
ST Numeric
QT Numeric
QTc Numeric
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Sensitivity
Range
Resolution
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Range
Adult/pedi: 15 to 300 bpm
Neo range: 15 to 350 bpm
±1 % of range
1 bpm
≥200 µV peak
0 to 300 bpm
1 bpm
-20 to +20 mm
±0.5 mm or 15 %, whichever is greater
0.1 mm
200 to 800 ms
±30 ms
8 ms
200 to 800 ms
ΔQTc Numeric
QT-HR Numeric
Resolution
Range
Resolution
Range - adult
1 ms
-600 to +600 ms
1 ms
15 to 300 bpm
15 to 350 bpm
Sinus and SV Rhythm
Ranges
Bandwidth
Range - pediatric and neonatal
Brady
Normal
Adult: 15 to 60 bpm
Pedi: 15 to 80 bpm
Neo: 15 to 90 bpm
Adult: 60 to 100 bpm
Pedi: 80 to 160 bpm
Neo: 90 to 180 bpm
Tachy Adult: >100 bpm
Pedi: >160 bpm
Neo: >180 bpm
Diagnostic Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.05 to 150 Hz
Extended
Monitoring Mode
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 150 Hz
Monitoring Mode Adult: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 55 Hz
Filter Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 20 Hz
225
21 Specifications
Measurement Specifications
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications
Differential Input Impedance
Common Mode Rejection Ratio
Electrode Offset Potential Tolerance
>2 M
Ω RA-LL leads (Resp)
>5 M
Ω at all other leads (at 10 Hz including patient cable)
Diagnostic mode: >86 dB (with a 51 k
Ω/47 nF imbalance).
Filter mode: >106 dB (with a 51 k
Ω/47 nF imbalance).
±500 mV
Auxiliary Current
(Leads off Detection)
Input Signal Range
Active electrode: <100 nA
Reference electrode: <900 nA
±5 mV
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Alarm Specifications
HR
Extreme Tachy
Extreme Brady
Run PVCs
PVCs Rate
Vent Tach HR
Vent Tach Run
Vent Rhythm Run
SVT HR
SVT Run
ST High
ST Low
QTc High
ΔQTc High
Range
15 to 300 bpm maximum delay: 10 seconds according to AAMI EC 13-1992 standard
Adjustment
Adult:1 bpm steps (15 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:1 bpm steps (15 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Difference to high limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Difference to low limit 0 to 50 bpm
Clamping at 15 to 100 bpm
5 bpm steps
5 bpm steps
2 PVCs
1 to 99 PVCs/minute
20 to 300 bpm
3 to 99 PVCs/minute
2 to 99 PVCs/minute
120 to 300 bpm
3 to 99 SV beats
-19.8 to +20 mm
-20 to +19.8 mm
200 ms to 800 ms
30 ms to 200 ms
Not adjustable by user
1 PVC
5 bpm
1 PVC
1 PVC
5 bpm
1 SV beat
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
10 ms steps
10 ms steps
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Supplemental Information as required by AAMI EC11/13
Respiration Excitation Waveform
Noise Suppression
Time to Alarm for
Tachycardia
Vent Tachycardia
1 mV pp
,206 bpm
Sinusoidal signal, 260
μA, 39 kHz
RL drive gain 44 dB max., max. voltage 1.8 Vrms
Gain 0.5, Range 6.5 to 8.4 seconds, Average 7.2 seconds
Gain 1.0 Range 6.1 to 6.9 seconds, Average 6.5 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.9 to 6.7 seconds, Average 6.3 seconds
Vent Tachycardia
2 mV pp
,195 bpm
Tall T-Wave Rejection Capability
Gain 0.5, Range 5.4 to 6.2 seconds, Average 5.8 seconds
Gain 1.0, Range 5.7 to 6.5 seconds, Average 6.1 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.3 to 6.1 seconds, Average 5.7 seconds
Exceeds ANSI/AAMI EC 13 Sect. 3.1.2.1(c) minimum recommended 1.2 mV T-Wave amplitude
226
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Supplemental Information as required by AAMI EC11/13
Heart Rate Averaging Method
Three different methods are used:
Normally, heart rate is computed by averaging the 12 most recent RR intervals.
For runs of PVCs, up to 8 RR intervals are averaged to compute the HR.
If each of 3 consecutive RR intervals is greater than 1200 ms
(that is, rate less than 50 bpm), then the 4 most recent RR intervals are averaged to compute the HR.
Response Time of Heart Rate Meter to Change in
Heart Rate
HR change from 80 to 120 bpm:
Range: [6.4 to 7.2 seconds] Average: 6.8 seconds
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy and Response to
Irregular Rhythm
Accuracy of Input Signal Reproduction
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection Performance
HR change from 80 to 40 bpm:
Range: [5.6 to 6.4 sec] Average: 6.0 seconds
Ventricular bigeminy: 80 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy: 60 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy: 120 bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 90 bpm
Methods A and D were used to establish overall system error and frequency response.
Rejection of pacemaker pulses with amplitudes from ±2 mV to
±700 mV and widths from 0.1 ms to 2.0 ms (Method A)
Respiration
Respiration Performance Specifications
Respiration Rate
Range
Bandwidth
Noise
Accuracy
Resolution
Adult/pedi: 0 to 120 rpm
Neo: 0 to 170 rpm at 0 to 120 rpm ±1 rpm at 120 to 170 rpm ±2 rpm
1 rpm
0.3 to 2.5 Hz (–6 dB)
Less than 25 m
Ω (rms) referred to the input
Respiration Alarm
Specifications Range
High
Low
Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm
Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm
Apnea Alarm
10 to 40 seconds
Adjustment
under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps
Delay
max. 14 seconds for limits from 0 to 20 rpm: max.
4 seconds for limits above 20 rpm: max.
14 seconds
5 second steps
227
21 Specifications
SpO
2
Measurement Specifications
Complies with EN ISO 9919:2005 (except alarm system; alarm system complies with IEC 60601-2-
49:2001).
Measurement Validation: The SpO
2
accuracy has been validated in human studies against arterial blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurements are statistically distributed, only about two-thirds of the measurements can be expected to fall within the specified accuracy compared to CO-oximeter measurements. Display Update Period: Typical: 2 seconds,
Maximum: 30 seconds. Max. with NBP INOP suppression on
: 60 seconds.
SpO
2
Performance Specifications
SpO
2
The specified accuracy is the root-meansquare (RMS) difference between the measured values and the reference values
Range
Accuracy
Pulse
Sensors
Resolution
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Pulse Oximeter Calibration Range
0 to 100 %
Philips Reusable Sensors:
M1191A, M1191AL, M1191ANL, M1191B, M1191BL, M1192A,
M1192AN = 2 % (70 % to 100 %)
M1193A, M1193AN, M1194A, M1194AN, M1195A, M1195AN,
M1196A = 3 % (70 % to 100 %)
M1191T, M1192T, M1193T (Adult), M1196T = 3% (70% to 100%)
M1193T (Neonate) = 4 % (70 % to 100 %)
Philips Disposable Sensors with M1943A(L):
M1132A, M1133A (adult/infant) = 2 %
M1901B, M1902B, M1903B, M1904B, M1131A, M1133A (neonate)
= 3 % (70 % to 100 %)
NellcorPB
®
Sensors with M1943A(L):
MAX-A, MAX-AL, MAX-P, MAX-I, MAX-N, D-25, D-20, I-20, N-
25, OxiCliq A, P, I, N = 3 % (70 % to 100 %)
Masimo Reusable Sensors
®
with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP DC-I, LNOP DC-IP, LNOP YI, LNCS DC-1, LNCS DC-IP,
LNCS TF-I: 2 % (70 % to 100 %)
LNOP TC-I, LNCS TC-I: 3.5 % (70 % to 100 %)
Masimo Disposable Sensors
®
with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP Adt, LNOP Adtx, LNOP Pdt, LNOP Pdtx, LNOP Inf-L,
LNCS Adtx, LNCS Pdtx, LNCS Inf-L: 2 % (70 % to 100 %)
LNOP Neo-L, LNOP NeoPt-L, LNCS Neo-L, LNCS NeoPt-L: 3 %
(70 % to 100 %)
1 %
30 to 300 bpm
±2 % or 1 bpm, whichever is greater
1 bpm
Wavelength range: 500 to 1000 nm
Emitted Light Energy:
≤15 mW
Information about the wavelength range can be especially useful to clinicians (for instance, when photodynamic therapy is performed)
70 % to 100 %
228
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
NBP
SpO
2
Alarm
Specifications
SpO
2
Desat
Pulse
Tachycardia
Bradycardia
Range Adjustment
Adult: 50 to 100 %
Pedi/Neo: 30 to 100 %
Adult: 50 to Low alarm limit
Pedi/Neo: 30 to Low alarm limit
30 to 300 bpm
1 % steps
1 % steps
Adult:
1 bpm steps (30 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (30 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Difference to high limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Difference to low limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 30 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
Delay
(0, 1, 2, 3,... 30)
+4 seconds max. 14 seconds max. 14 seconds max. 14 seconds
Complies with IEC 60601-2-30:1999/EN60601-2-30:2000.
NBP Performance Specifications
Measurement Ranges Systolic
Accuracy
Pulse Rate Range
Measurement Time
Diastolic
Mean
Pulse Rate
Pulse Rate Measurement Accuracy
Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa)
Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)
Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)
Adult: 40 to 300
Pedi: 40 to 300
Neo: 40 to 300
Max. Std. Deviation: 8 mmHg (1.1 kPa)
Max. Mean Error: ±5 mmHg (±0.7 kPa)
40 to 100 bpm:
±
5 bpm
101 to 200 bpm:
±
5 % of reading
201 to 300 bpm:
±10 % of reading
(average over NBP measurement cycle)
40 to 300 bpm
Typical at HR >60 bpm
Auto/manual/sequence: 30 seconds (adult)
25 seconds (neonatal)
Stat: 20 seconds
Maximum time: 180 seconds (adult/pediatric)
90 seconds (neonates)
229
21 Specifications
Measurement Specifications
NBP Performance Specifications
Cuff Inflation Time
Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure
Typical for normal adult cuff: Less than 10 seconds
Typical for neonatal cuff: Less than 2 seconds
Adult: 165 ±15 mmHg
Pedi: 130 ±15 mmHg
Neo: 100 ±15 mmHg
1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60 or 120 minutes
5 minutes
Auto Mode Repetition Times
STAT Mode Cycle Time
Venipuncture Mode Inflation
Inflation Pressure Adult
Automatic deflation after
Pediatric
Neonatal
Adult/pediatric
Neonatal
20 to 120 mmHg (3 to 16 kPa)
20 to 80 mmHg (3 to 11 kPa)
20 to 50 mmHg (3 to 7 kPa)
170 seconds
85 seconds
Measurement Validation: In adult and pediatric mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the American National Standard for Electronic or Automated
Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 - 1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements (depending on the configuration) in a representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference the 5th Korotkoff sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 -
1992 and AAMI/ANSI SP10A -1996) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial measurements in a representative patient population.
NBP Alarm Specifications Range
Systolic
Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa)
Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)
Diastolic
Mean
Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)
Adjustment
10 to 30 mmHg: 2 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
>30 mmHg: 5 mmHg (1 kPa)
NBP Overpressure Settings
Adult >300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec
Pedi
Neo
>300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec
>150 mmHg (20 kPa) >2 sec not user adjustable
230
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
Invasive Pressure and Pulse
Complies with IEC 60601-2-34:2000/EN60601-2-34:2000.
Invasive Pressure Performance Specifications
Measurement Range
Pulse Rate
Input Sensitivity
Transducer
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Frequency Response
Zero Adjustment
Gain Accuracy
Range:
Accuracy
Drift
Accuracy
Drift
Non linearity and Hysteresis
Overall Accuracy
(including transducer)
Volume displacement of CPJ840J6
–40 to 360 mmHg
25 to 350 bpm
±1 % Full Range
1 bpm
Sensitivity:5 µV/V/mmHg (37.5 µV/V/kPa)
Adjustment range:±10 %
Load Impedance:200 to 2000
Ω (resistive)
Output Impedance:
≤3000 Ω (resistive) dc to 12.5 Hz or 40 Hz
±200 mmHg (±26 kPa)
±1 mmHg (±0.1 kPa)
Less than 0.1 mmHg/°C (0.013 kPa/°C)
±1 %
Less than 0.05 %/°C
Error of
≤0.4 % FS (@CAL 200 mmHg)
±4 % of reading or ±4 mmHg (±0.5 kPa), whichever is greater
0.1 mm
3
/100 mmHg
Invasive Pressure Alarm Specifications Range
Pressure
–40 to 360 mmHg
(–5.0 to 48 kPa)
Extreme High
Extreme Low
Pulse
Adjustment
-40 to 50 mmHg
2 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
>50 mmHg
5 mmHg (1 kPa)
Difference to high limit 0 to
25 mmHg
5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa) Clamping at -40 to
360 mmHg
Difference to low limit 0 to
25 mmHg
5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
Clamping at -40 to
360 mmHg
25 to 300 bpm
5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa)
Adult:
1 bpm steps (25 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (25 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Delay
max.
12 seconds
231
21 Specifications
Measurement Specifications
Invasive Pressure Alarm Specifications Range
Tachycardia
Difference to high limit 0 to
50 bpm
Clamping at 150 to
300 bpm
Bradycardia
Difference to low limit 0 to
50 bpm
Adjustment
5 bpm steps
5 bpm steps
5 bpm steps
Clamping at 25 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
Delay
max.
14 seconds max.
14 seconds
Temp
Complies with EN 12470-4:2000
Temp Performance Specifications
Temp
Range
Average Time Constant
Resolution
Accuracy
–1 to 45
°C (30 to 113°F)
0.1
°C (0.2°F)
±0.1
°C (±0.2°F)
Less than 10 seconds
Temp Alarm Specifications Range
–1 to 45ºC (30 to 113ºF)
Temp High/Low Alarms
Adjustment
-1 to 35
°C (30 to 95°F), 0.5°C (1.0°F) steps
35 to 45
°C (95 to 113°F), 0.1°C (0.2°F) steps
CO
2
The CO
2
measurement in the monitor, M3014A and M3015A complies with EN ISO 21647:2004 +
Cor.1:2005 (except alarm system; alarm system complies with IEC 60601-2-49:2001).
M3015A Microstream CO
2
Performance Specifications
CO
2
Range
Accuracy
0 to 98 mmHg (0 to 13 kPa), or 13 % CO
2
, whichever is lower
Up to 5 minutes during warmup: ±4 mmHg or 12 %, whichever is greater
After 5 minutes warmup:
0 to 40 mmHg (0 to 5.3 kPa):±2.2 mmHg (±0.3 kPa)
Above 40 mmHg (5.3 kPa):±(5.5 % + (0.08 %/mmHg above 40 mmHg)) of reading
These specifications are valid for 21 % O
2
and N
2
balance, up to 35
°C ambient temperature, up to 60 rpm in adult mode and 100 rpm in neonatal mode.
Outside of these conditions the accuracy reaches at a minimum
±4 mmHg or ±12 % of the reading, whichever is greater.
Resolution
Stability
Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Included in Accuracy specifications
awRR
Warm-up Time
Range
Accuracy
0 to 150 rpm
0 to 40 rpm: ±1 rpm
41 to 70 rpm: ±2 rpm
71 to 100 rpm: ±3 rpm
>100 rpm: ±5 % of reading
5 minutes for full accuracy specification
232
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
M3015A Microstream CO
2
Performance Specifications
Rise Time
190 ms for neonatal mode
(measured with FilterLine H for neonatal)
Sample Flow Rate
240 ms for adult mode
(measured with FilterLine H for adult)
50 + 15/-7.5 ml/minute
Gas Sampling Delay Time
Sound Pressure
Total System Response Time
Typical:2.3 seconds
Maximum:3 seconds
Acoustic noise: <45 dBA
The total system response time is the sum of the delay time and the rise time.
M3014A Mainstream CO
2
Performance Specifications
CO
2
Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy
Resolution after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5 % of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8 % of reading
The specifications are valid for standard gas mixtures, balance air, fully hydrated at 35°C, P abs
= 760 mmHg, flow rate = 2 l/min.
Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
awRR
Warm-up Time
Response Time
Stability:
Short term drift
Long term drift
Range
Accuracy
±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period
2 to 150 rpm
±1 rpm
2 minutes with CO
2
transducer attached for full accuracy specification
Less than 60 ms (with adult or infant reusable or disposable adapter)
M3014A Sidestream CO
2
Performance Specifications
CO
2
Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5 % of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8 % of reading
For values from 101 to 150 mmHg: ±10 % of reading
At respiration rates above 80 rpm, all ranges are ±12 % of actual. The specifications are valid for gas mixtures of CO
2
, balance N
760 mmHg within specified operating temperature range.
2
, dry gas at
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
awRR
Stability:
Short term drift
Long term drift
Range
Accuracy
±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period
2 to 150 rpm
±1 rpm
233
21 Specifications
Measurement Specifications
M3014A Sidestream CO
2
Performance Specifications
Warm-up Time
Sample Flow Rate
2 minutes with CO
2
sensor attached for full accuracy specification
50 ±10 ml/minute
Total System Response Time
3 seconds
Operating Temperature
0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F)
M8102A/M3014A Mainstream and Sidestream CO
2
Humidity Correction Factor
Either BTPS or STPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the CO
2 formula for the correction calculation is:
readings. The
P
STPD
= P
B TPS
⋅
P
-----------------------------
P a bs
– P
H2O
Where p = partial pressure, P abs
= absolute pressure, and P
H2O
= 42 mmHg @35°C and 100 % RH.
M3016A Mainstream CO
2
Performance Specifications
CO
2
Range –4 to 150 mmHg (-0.5 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 20 minutes warmup and calibration:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.2 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values between 40 and 76 mmHg: ±5.5 % of reading
The specifications are valid for 45 % O
2
and N
2
or N
2
O balance. Outside these conditions the accuracy reaches at a minimum the requirements of
EN864/ISO9918.
Resolution
Stability
Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
±1.0 mmHg over a 7 day period
awRR
Warm-up Time
Response Time
Range
Accuracy
0 to 150 rpm
±2 rpm
20 minutes with CO
2
transducer attached for full accuracy specification
Less than 125 ms (for step from 10 % to 90 %)
Mainstream CO
2
Humidity Correction Factor
Either BTPS or STPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the Mainstream CO
2 readings. The formula for the correction calculation is:
P
STPD
= P
B TPS
⋅
P
-----------------------------
P a bs
– P
H2O
Where p = partial pressure, P abs
= absolute pressure, and P
H2O
= 47 mmHg @37
°C
and 100 % RH.
234
Measurement Specifications
21 Specifications
CO
2
Alarm
Specifications Range etCO
2
High etCO
2
Low imCO
2
High awRR High awRR Low
Apnea delay
20 to 95 mmHg (2 to 13 kPa) 1 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
10 to 90 mHg (1 to 12 kPa)
2 to 20 mmHg
(0.3 to 3.0 kPa)
Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm
Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm
10 to 40 seconds
Adjustment
steps of 1 mmHg
(0.1 kPa) under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps over 20 rpm:5 rpm steps
5 second steps
Delay
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than18 seconds.
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than18 seconds.
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A: less than
14 seconds
M3015A: less than18 seconds.
M3015A: settings <20 rpm: less than 8 seconds
>20 rpm: less than 18 seconds
M8102A/M3014A/M3016A settings <20 rpm: less than 4 seconds
>20 rpm: less than 14 seconds set apnea delay time +4 seconds
(M8102A/M3014A/M3016A) or
8 seconds (M3015A)
Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects On CO
2
Measurement Values
The specified deviations for M8102A/M3014A are valid when the appropriate corrections are switched on and set correctly.
Gas or Vapor
Nitrous Oxide
Halothane
Enflurane
Isoflurane
Sevoflurane
Xenon
Helium
Metered dose inhaler propellants
Desflurane
Ethanol
Isopropanol
Acetone
Methane
15
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
5
5
5
80
Gas Level
(% volume fraction)
60
4
-
50
M8102A/M3014A M3015A
Additional deviation due to gas interfence, measured at
0 - 40 mmHg CO
2
±1 mmHg ±5 %
±2 mmHg ±5 %
±2 mmHg
±2 mmHg
±2 mmHg
-5 mmHg
±1 mmHg not specified for use
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
+5 mmHg
±1 mmHg
±1 mmHg
±1 mmHg
±1 mmHg
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
±5 %
235
21 Specifications
Safety and Performance Tests
Safety and Performance Tests
You must observe any national regulations on the qualification of the testing personnel and suitable measuring and testing facilities. See the maintenance section for a list of required tests. Safety and performance tests, and what to do if the instrument does not meet these specifications are described in the Installation and Service guide.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Specifications
Take special precautions regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) when using medical electrical equipment. You must operate your monitoring equipment according to the EMC information provided in this book. Portable and mobile radio frequency (RF) communications equipment can affect medical electrical equipment.
Accessories Compliant with EMC Standards
All accessories listed in the accessories section comply, in combination with the monitor, with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001 + A1:2004.
WARNING
Using accessories other than those specified may result in increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity of the monitoring equipment.
Electromagnetic Emissions
The monitor is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the table below. You must ensure that it is used in such an environment
Emissions test
Radio Frequency (RF) emissions
RF emissions CISPR 11
Compliance Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference
Group 1 The monitor uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment
Class A The monitor is suitable for use in all establishments other than those directly connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference (Resp)
The respiration (Resp) measurement is a very sensitive measurement that measures a very small signal.
Technological limitations do not allow higher immunity levels than 1 V/m for radiated RF electromagnetic fields and 1 Vrms for conducted disturbances induced by RF fields. Electromagnetic fields with field strengths above 1 V/m and conducted disturbances above 1 Vrms may cause erroneous measurements. Therefore Philips recommends that you avoid using electrically radiating equipment in the close proximity of this measurement.
WARNING
The monitor should not be used next to or stacked with other equipment. If you must stack the monitor, you must check that normal operation is possible in the necessary configuration before you start monitoring patients.
236
Safety and Performance Tests
21 Specifications
Electromagnetic Immunity
The monitor is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The user must ensure that it is used in the appropriate environment as described below.
Immunity test
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60601-1-2 test level
±
6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±2 kV for power supply lines
±1 kV for input/output lines
±1 kV differential mode
±2 kV common mode
Compliance level
±
6 kV contact
±8 kV air
Electromagnetic environment guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30 %.
±2 kV for power supply lines
±1 kV for input/output lines
±1 kV differential mode
±2 kV common mode
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial and/or hospital environment
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial and/or hospital environment
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines
IEC 61000-4-
11
<5 %
U
T
(>95 % dip in
U
T
0.5 cycles
) for
<5 %
U
T
(>95 % dip in
U
0.5 cycles
T
) for
40 %
U
T
(60 % dip in
U
T
) for 5 cycles
70 %
U
T
(30 % dip in
U
T
) for 25 cycles
<5 %
U
T
(>95 % dip in
U
T
) for 5 sec
40 %
U
T
(60 % dip in
U
T
) for
5 cycles
70 %
U
T
(30 % dip in
U
T
) for
25 cycles
<5 %
U
T
(>95 % dip in
U
T
) for 5 sec
3 A/m Power frequency
(50/60 Hz) magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial and/or hospital environment. If the user of the monitor requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the monitor is equipped with an internal battery or is powered from an uninterruptible power supply.
Power frequency magnetic fields should be a t levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial and/or hospital environment
In this table, U
T
is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Recommended Separation Distance
WARNING
The monitor, equipped with a wireless network interface, intentionally receives RF electromagnetic energy for the purpose of its operation. Therefore, other equipment may cause interference, even if that other equipment complies with CISPR emission requirements.
In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres
(m). The values given in brackets are for respiration.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the monitor, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than the compliance level in each frequency range (over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 1 V/m for respiration and 3 V/m for all other functions).
237
21 Specifications
Safety and Performance Tests
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with this symbol:
Immunity test
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60601-1-2 test level
3 V
RMS
150 kHz to
80 MHz
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80 MHz to
2.5 GHz
Compliance level
3 V
RMS
(1 V
RMS
for respiration)
Electromagnetic environment guidance
Recommended separation distance: d = 1.2 P for respiration:
:
3 V/m
(1 V/m for respiration) d = 3.5 P
:
Recommended separation distance:
80 MHz to 800 MHz d = 1.2 P
80 MHz to 800 MHz for respiration d = 3.5 P :
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz d = 2.3 P
800 MHz to 2,5 GHz for respiration d = 7.0 P
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular, cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the monitor is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the monitor should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the monitor.
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
Recommended separation distances from portable and mobile RF communication equipment
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or user of the monitor can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the monitor as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres
(m). The values given in brackets are for respiration.
238
Safety and Performance Tests
21 Specifications
Frequency of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
Equation
Rated max. output power of transmitter (W) for respiration:
d = 3.5 p
for respiration:
d = 3.5 P
for respiration:
d = 7.0 P
Separation distance (m) Separation distance (m) Separation distance (m)
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
0.1 (0.4)
0.4 (1.1)
1.3 (3.5)
3.8 (11.1)
12.0 (35.0)
0.1 (0.4)
0.4 (1.1)
1.3 (3.5)
3.8 (11.1)
12.0 (35.0)
0.2 (0.7)
0.7 (2.2)
2.3 (7.0)
7.3 (22.1)
23.0 (70.0)
Electrosurgery Interference/Defibrillation/Electrostatic Discharge
The equipment returns to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any stored data. Measurement accuracy may be temporarily decreased while performing electro-surgery or defibrillation. This does not affect patient or equipment safety. Do not expose the equipment to x-ray or strong magnetic fields (MRI).
Fast Transients/Bursts
The equipment will return to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any stored data. If any user interaction is required, the monitor indicates with a technical alarm (INOP).
Restart time
After power interruption, an ECG wave will be shown on the display after 30 seconds maximum.
239
21 Specifications
Safety and Performance Tests
240
22
22
Default Settings Appendix
This appendix documents the most important default settings of your monitor as it is delivered from the factory. For a comprehensive list and explanation of default settings, see the Configuration Guide supplied with your monitor. The monitor’s default settings can be permanently changed in
Configuration Mode.
Note: If your monitor has been ordered preconfigured to your requirements, the settings at delivery will be different from those listed here.
Country-Specific Default Settings
Certain default settings are specific to a particular country. These are listed here for all countries alphabetically.
Country-Description
Afghanistan
Åland Islands
Albania
Algeria
American Samoa
Andorra
Angola
Anguilla
Antarctica
Antigua and Barbuda
Argentina
Armenia
Aruba
Australia
Austria
Azerbaijan
Bahamas, The
Bahrain
Bangladesh
Barbados
Belarus
Belgium
50
50
60
50
50
50
60
50
60
50
50
50
50
60
60
50
50
50
60
60
Line Frequency Units
Weight
50/60 [Hz]
50
50 kg, lb kg kg
Units
Height
ECG Cable Color
in, cm IEC, AAMI cm cm
AAMI
IEC kg kg lb lb kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg cm cm in in cm in in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
241
22 Default Settings Appendix
60
50
60
50
60
50
50
60
50
60
50
50
50
60
60
50
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60
50
60
50
50
60
60
60
60
50
50
50
50
50
60
50
50
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60
50
Belize
Benin
Bermuda
Bhutan
Bolivia
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Botswana
Bouvet Island
Brazil
British Indian Ocean Territory
Brunei Darussalam
Brunei
Bulgaria
Burkina Faso
Burundi
Cambodia
Cameroon
Canada
Cape Verde
Cayman Islands
Central African Republic
Chad
Chile
China
Christmas Islands
Cocos Keeling Islands
Colombia
Comoros
Congo
Congo, Democratic Republic of the
Cook Islands
Costa Rica
Côte d'Ivoire
Croatia
Cuba
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Denmark
Djibouti
Dominica
Dominican Republic
Ecuador
Egypt
El Salvador
Equatorial Guinea
Eritrea
Estonia
Ethiopia
Falkland Islands, Malvinas
Faroe Islands
Fiji
242
Country-Specific Default Settings
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm in in in in cm in cm in cm cm in cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm in cm in in cm in cm kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg lb lb lb lb kg lb kg lb kg kg lb kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg lb kg lb lb kg lb kg
Country-Specific Default Settings
Finland
France
French Guiana
French Polynesia
French Southern Territories
Gabon
Gambia, The
Georgia
Germany
Ghana
Gibraltar
Greece
Greenland
Grenada
Guadeloupe
Guam
Guatemala
Guernsey
Guinea
Guinea-Bissau
Guyana
Haiti
Heard Island and McDonald Islands
Holy See, Vatican City State
Honduras
Hong Kong
Hungary
Iceland
India
Indonesia
Iran, Islamic Republic of
Iraq
Ireland
Isle of Man
Israel
Italy
Jamaica
Japan
Jersey
Jordan
Kazakhstan
Kenya
Kiribati
50
60
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of 60
Korea, Republic of 60
60
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Kuweit
Kyrgyzstan
Lao People’s Democratic Republics
Latvia
Lebanon
Lesotho
50
60
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
50
60
60
60
50
50
60
60
50
60
50
60
50
50
60
50
50
50
50
60
60
22 Default Settings Appendix
cm in in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in in cm cm in in cm cm cm in cm cm in cm in cm cm in cm cm cm cm in in
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb lb kg kg lb lb kg kg kg lb kg kg lb kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg kg lb lb
243
22 Default Settings Appendix
Liberia
Libyan Arab. Jamahiriya
Liechtenstein
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Macao 60
Macedonia, The former Yugoslav. Rep. of 50
Madagascar
Malawi
50
50
Malaysia
Maldives
Mali
Malta
50
60
50
50
50
60
60
50
50
Marshall Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Mauritius
Mayotte
Mexico
Micronesia, Fed. States of
Moldova, Republic of
Monaco
Mongolia
Montenegro
Montserrat
Morocco
Mozambique
Myanmar
Namibia
50
50
60
50
60
60
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60
50
60
Nauru
Nepal
Netherlands
Netherlands Antilles
New Caledonia
New Zealand
Nicaragua
Niger
Nigeria
Niue
Norfolk Islands
Northern Mariana Islands
Norway
Oman
Pakistan
Palau
Palestinian Territory
Panama
Papua New Guinea
Paraguay
Peru
Philippines
50
50
50
60
50
60
60
60
60
50
60
50
60
60
50
50
50
60
60
50
60
60
244
Country-Specific Default Settings
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
IEC cm cm cm in cm in in in in cm in cm in in cm cm cm in in cm cm cm cm cm in cm in in cm cm in cm in in in cm cm in cm in cm cm in cm cm cm cm in in cm cm kg kg kg lb kg lb lb lb lb kg kg kg lb lb kg kg kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg lb kg lb lb kg kg lb kg lb lb lb kg kg lb kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg kg lb lb kg kg
Country-Specific Default Settings
Pitcairn
Poland
Portugal
Puerto Rico
Qatar
Reunion
Romania
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Saint Helena
Saint Kitts and Nevis
Saint Lucia
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
Samoa
San Marino
Sao Tome and Principe
Saudi Arabia
Senegal
Serbia
Serbia & Montenegro
Seychelles
Sierra Leone
Singapore
Slovakia
Slovenia
Solomon Islands
Somalia
South Africa
South Georgia and the South Sandwich
Islands
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sudan
Suriname
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Swaziland
Sweden
Switzerland
Syrian Arab Rep
Taiwan, Province of China
Tajikistan
Tanzania, United Republic of
Thailand
Timor-Leste
Togo
Tokelau
Tonga
Trinidad and Tobago
Tunisia
Turkey
50
60
60
60
50
60
60
60
60
60
50
50
60
60
50
50
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
60
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60
50
60
60
50
50
50
60
50
50
60
50
22 Default Settings Appendix
cm in cm in in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in in in in in cm cm in in cm cm cm in cm cm in cm cm in in in cm cm in in in in cm cm in in cm cm cm in cm cm
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
IEC kg lb kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb lb lb lb lb kg kg lb lb kg kg kg lb kg kg lb kg kg lb lb lb kg kg lb lb lb lb kg kg lb lb kg kg kg lb kg kg
245
22 Default Settings Appendix
Turkmenistan
Turks and Caicos Islands
Tuvalu
Uganda
Ukraine
UK
United Arab Emirates
United Kingdom
United States
United States Minor Outlying Islands 60
Uruguay 50
Uzbekistan
Vanuatu
60
60
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
60
Venezuela
Viet Nam
Virgin Islands (British)
Virgin Islands (US)
Wallis and Futuna Islands
Western Sahara
Yemen
Zambia
Zimbabwe
60
50
50
60
60
50
50
60
60 lb kg kg lb lb kg kg lb lb lb kg lb lb kg kg kg lb lb kg lb lb lb
Country-Specific Default Settings
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
IEC
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI
AAMI in cm cm in in cm cm in in in cm in in cm cm cm in in cm in in in
246
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings
22 Default Settings Appendix
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings
Settings are only entered once per table row if they are the same for all patient categories
1
.
Alarm Default Settings
Alarm Settings
Alarm Volume
Alarms Off
Pause Al. 5min
Pause Al. 10min
Auto Alarms Off
Alarm Off Reminder
Visual Latching
Audible Latching
Alarm Reminder
Reminder Time
Alarm Sounds
Red Alarm Interval
Yel. Al. Interval
Alarm Low
Red Alarm Volume
Yell. Alarm Volume
Inop Volume
Auto Increase Vol.
Increase Vol Delay
Keep Blinking
Relay 1 Sensitiv.
Relay 2 Sensitiv.
Relay 3 Sensitiv.
Inop Relay Latency
Yel. Relay Latency
Alarm Text
No Centr Mon Min Vol
Factory Default
AlarmVol +0
2 Steps
20 sec
No
R & Y & I
Red & Yell
Red
5 sec
2 sec
Standard
4
5
2 min.
Enabled
Enabled
Off
Off
Red & Yell
Red & Yell
On
3 min
Traditional
10 sec
20 sec
4
AlarmVol +2
AlarmVol +0
1.A profile “Outdoor” exists for use in typical outdoor conditions (bright sunlight, higher ambient noise). See the Configuration
Guide for details.
247
22 Default Settings Appendix
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
ECG Settings
High Limit
Low Limit
Alarms
Alarm Source
ECG
QRS Volume
Primary Lead
Secondary Lead
Analysis Mode
Lead Placement
Mod. Lead Placment
Filter
Speed
Auto Filter
Default ECG Size
Color
Asystole Thresh
Δ ExtrTachy
Tachy Clamp
Δ ExtrBrady
Brady Clamp
ALL ECG IN.
Fallback
Alarms Off
Alarm Source Sel.
Arrhythmia Settings
Arrhythmia
Pause Threshold
VTach HR
VTach Run
Vent Rhythm
SVT HR
SVT Run
PVCs/min
Non-Sustain
Factory Defaults
Adult
II
V
On
1
120 bpm
50 bpm
On
Auto
Multi-lead
Standard
Off
Monitor
25 mm/s
Off x1
Green
4.0 sec
20 bpm
200 bpm
20 bpm
40 bpm
On
On
Enabled
Enabled
Pedi
160 bpm
75 bpm
220 bpm
Neo
200 bpm
100 bpm
3.0 sec
240 bpm
50 bpm
Factory Defaults
Adult Pedi Neo
On Off
2.0 sec
100 120
1.5 sec
150
5
14
180
5
10
On
200
5
210
5
248
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
Arrhythmia Settings
Vent Rhythm
Run PVCs
Pair PVCs
R-On-T PVCs
V.Bigeminy
V.Trigeminy
PVCs/min
Multif. PVCs
Pacer N. Cap
Pacer N. Pac
Pause
Missed Beat
SVT
IrregularHR
TimeOut 1st
TimeOut 2nd
Arrhy Off Message
SOME ECG IN
Factory Defaults
Adult
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
3 min
10 min
Yes
On
Pedi
22 Default Settings Appendix
Neo
249
22 Default Settings Appendix
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings
Lead-independent ST Settings
ST Alarm Mode
Alarms
ST Analysis
ST-Index
ISO Point
J Point
ST Point
Factory Defaults
Adult
Single ST
On
On
On
-80 ms
48 ms
J+60
Pedi
Off
Lead I, II, III, V, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1-6,
MCL Settings
Factory Defaults
Factory Adult
ST
(Label)
For Alarm Mode = Single-ST
On
ST
(Label)
High +2.0 mm
ST
(Label)
Low -2.0 mm
For Alarm Mode = Multi-ST
ST
(Label)
High +1.0 mm
ST
(Label)
Low -1.0 mm
Factory Pedi
Off
QT Settings
QT Lead
QTc High Limit
ΔQTc Limit
QTc High Alarm On/Off
ΔQTc High Alarm On/Off
QT Analysis
QTc Formula
Factory Defaults
Factory Adult
All
500 ms
60 ms
On
On
Off
Bazett
Factory Pedi
480 ms
Neo
Factory Neo
Factory Neo
460 ms
250
Pulse Default Settings
Pulse Default Settings
Respiration Settings
High Limit
Low Limit
Apnea Time
Alarms
Resp
Auto/Manual
Resp Speed
Color
Factory Defaults
Adult
30 rpm
8 rpm
20 sec
On
On
Auto (Trigger Mode)
6.25 mm/s
Yellow
Pedi
22 Default Settings Appendix
Pulse Settings
Alarms Source
Pulse (Label)
System Pulse
Alarms Off
Alarm Source Sel.
Factory Defaults
Adult
Auto
On
SpO2
Enabled
Enabled
Pedi Neo
Pulse Alarm Settings
Pulse (SpO2)
Pulse Alarms
High Limit
Low Limit
Δ Extr Brady
Brady Clamp
Δ Extr Tachy
Tachy Clamp
Factory Defaults
Adult
On
Off
120 bpm
50 bpm
20 bpm
40 bpm
20 bpm
200 bpm
Pedi
160 bpm
75 bpm
40 bpm
220 bpm
Pulse alarms use the settings of the currently selected Pulse alarm source.
Respiration Default Settings
Neo
200 bpm
100 bpm
50 bpm
240 bpm
Neo
100 rpm
30 rpm
251
22 Default Settings Appendix
SpO
2
Default Settings
SpO
2
Settings
Alarms
QRS Volume
Tone Modulation
Tone Mod. Type
Speed
Perfusion
Average
NBP Alarm Suppr.
Extd. Auto OnOff
Color
SpO
2
Alarm Default Settings
Setting
Desat Limit
Low Limit
High Limit
Desat delay
High Alarm delay
Low Alarm delay
Parameter Alarms On/Off
Label
Pulse Settings
Pulse (SpO2) On/Off
Pulse Alarms On/Off
Pulse High Limit
Pulse Low Limit
Δ Extr Brady
Brady Clamp
Δ ExtrTachy
Tachy Clamp
Adult
80
90
100
20 sec
10 sec
10 sec on
SpO
2 on on
120 bpm
50 bpm
20 bpm
40 bpm
20 bpm
200 bpm
Factory Defaults
Adult
On
1
Yes
Enhanced
25 mm/s
On
10 sec
On
Disabled
Cyan
Pedi
Pediatric
80
90
100
20 sec
10 sec
10 sec on
SpO
2 on on
160 bpm
75 bpm
20 bpm
40 bpm
20 bpm
220 bpm
Neo
SpO
2
Default Settings
Neonatal
80
85
95
20 sec
10 sec
10 sec on
SpO
2 on on
200 bpm
100 bpm
20 bpm
50 bpm
20 bpm
240 bpm
252
NBP Default Settings
NBP Default Settings
22 Default Settings Appendix
NBP Settings
Auto/Manual
Alarms from
High Alarm Limit
Low Alarm Limit
Alarms
NBP
Repetition Time
Pulse (NBP)
Unit
Done Tone
Start Time
VP Pressure
Reference
Color
Temperature Default Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult
Auto
Sys.
160/90 (110)
90/50 (60)
On
On
10 min
On mmHg
Off
Synchronized
60 mmHg
Auscultatory
Red
Pedi
120/70 (90)
70/40 (50)
40 mmHg
Temp Settings
Low Limit
High Limit
Alarms
Unit
Range
Color
Factory Defaults
Adult
36
39
On
0
C
35...43
Green
Pedi
Invasive Pressure Default Settings
Neo
Manual
90/60 (70)
40/20 (24)
30 mmHg
Invasive
Neo
ABP, ART, Ao, BAP, FAP, P, P1, P2, P3,
P4, UAP Settings
Factory Defaults
Adult
Alarms from
High Limit
Low Limit
Alarms
Extreme Alarms
Sys.
160/90 (110)
90/50 (70)
On
Enabled
Pedi
120/70 (90)
70/40 (50)
Neo
90/60 (70)
55/20 (36)
253
22 Default Settings Appendix
Invasive Pressure Default Settings
Pedi
10
10
140/80 (100)
60/35 (45)
100
Neo
5
5
105/75 (75)
45/15 (30)
100
Pedi
10/2 (4)
2/-4 (0)
5
5
15/5 (10)
0/-5 (-5)
Neo
10/2 (4)
2/-4 (0)
5
5
15/5 (10)
0/-5 (-5)
254
Invasive Pressure Default Settings
ICP, IC1, IC2 Settings
Alarms from
High Limit
Low Limit
Alarms
Extreme Alarms
ΔExtreme High
ΔExtreme Low
Low Clamp
High Clamp
Scale
Speed
Mean Only
Filter
Mercury Cal.
Artifact Suppr.
Unit
Color
PAP Settings
Alarms from
High Limit
Low Limit
Alarms
Extreme Alarms
ΔExtreme High
ΔExtreme Low
High Clamp
Low Clamp
Scale
Speed
Mean Only
Filter
Mercury Cal.
Artifact Suppr.
Unit
Color
22 Default Settings Appendix
Factory Defaults
Adult
Dia.
34/16 (20)
10/0 (0)
On
Enabled
5
5
45/20 (25)
5/-5 (-5)
30
25 mm/s
No
12 Hz
Yes
60 sec mmHg
Yellow
Factory Defaults
Adult
Mean
14/6 (10)
6/-4 (0)
On
Enabled
10
10
20/10 (-5)
0/-5 (0)
30
25 mm/s
Yes
12 Hz
Yes
60 sec mmHg
Magenta
Pedi
10/2 (4)
2/-4 (0)
Enabled
10
10
15/5 (-5)
0/-5 (0)
Pedi
60/4 (26)
24/-4 (12)
Enabled
5
5
65/5 (35)
15/-5 (5)
Neo
10/2 (4)
2/-4 (0)
Enabled
10
10
15/5 (-5)
0/-5 (0)
Neo
60/4 (26)
24/-4 (12)
Enabled
5
5
65/5 (35)
15/-5 (5)
255
22 Default Settings Appendix
CO
2
Default Settings
Factory Defaults
CO
2
Settings
etCO
2
low etCO
2
high imCO
2
high
CO
2
Alarms
Unit
Adult
30
50
4
Scale
ImCO
2
N
2
O Corr (only M3015A/M3016A)
Oxygen Corr (only M3014A) on mmHg
40 mmHg on
Gas Corr (only M3014A)
Humidity Corr
Max Hold Off
AwRR On
Off
16 %
Off
BTPS
AwRR Alarms
AwRR high limit
AwRR low limit
Apnea time
Color
On
30
8
20 secs
Yellow
Pedi
CO
2
Default Settings
Neo
100
30
256
1
Index
#
10-lead placement (ECG)
12-lead placement (ECG)
3-lead placement (ECG)
5-lead placement (ECG)
A
AAMI ECG lead labels
abdominal breathing and Resp electrode placement
aberrantly conducted beats
accessories
10-electrode cable sets
3-electrode cable sets
,
5-electrode cable sets
,
5-electrode one piece cables
6-electrode cable sets
CO2
CO2 (mainstream)
CO2 (microstream)
ECG
NBP adult cuffs
comfort cuffs
disposable cuffs
multi-patient comfort cuff kits
neonatal/infant cuffs
(disposable)
reusable cuffs
single-hose disposable cuffs
Nellcor
pressure
Pulsion
resp
set combiners and organizers
SpO2
Nellcor adhesive sensors
(disposable)
Philips sensors (disposable)
Philips sensors (reusable)
temperature
trunk cables
,
active alarms
address, Philips
addressograph (printer configuration setting)
adjusting ST measurement points
adjusting wave scale (pressure)
adjusting wave size (CO2)
admit editing information
quick admit
admitting a patient
airway adapter
CO2, microstream accessory
alarm latching
alarm limits changing
checking
manually adjusting
narrow
report
ST
switching auto limits on/off
using automatic limits
wide
window
alarm recording choosing recorded measurements
alarm source selection, disabled
alarms acknowledging
active
active SpO2 source
alphabetical listing
apnea delay
apnea delay time (Resp)
arrhythmia
audible indicators
awrr limits
chaining
CO2 specific
CO2, apnea delay
CO2, awRR
desat, SpO2
effect on pressure alarms during zero
extending pause time
high priority
INOP
ISO/IEC standard 9703-2
key
limit, SpO2
message field
NBP source
off indicator
patient messages
pausing
physiological
pleth as source
recordings
red
reminder
restarting
reviewing window
selftest
silencing
SpO2 high and low limits
SpO2 specific
ST
suspended symbol
switching on and off
temperature
testing
tone configuration
traditional
visual indicators
volume, changing
yellow
alarms key
alphabetical listing of alarms
analog output
ECG
apnea alarm delay
CO2
apnea alarm delay time (RESP)
apnea alarms and Resp detection modes
arrhythmia aberrantly conducted beats
analysis, how it works
atrial fibrillation and flutter
beat labels
initiating learning
intermittent bundle branch block
learning during ventricular rhythm
levels of analysis
,
monitoring non-paced patients
monitoring paced patients
options
relearning
relearning and lead fallback
status messages
switching on/off
understanding the display
arrhythmia alarms
,
adjusting alarm limits
all yellow on/off
i
chaining
latching
multiple
pvc-related alarms
sinus and SV rhythm ranges
switching on/off
timeout periods
arrhythmia monitoring and defibrillation
arrhythmia options
arrhythmia relearning with EASI INOP
arterial pressure source
arterial pulsation
artifact suppression (pressure)
atrial fibrillation and flutter
audlatching (arrhythmia alarms)
auto alarm limits switching on/off
using
auto detection mode (Resp)
autofilter
automatic arrhythmia relearn
automatic default setting
automatic NBP repeat time
autosize
ECG wave
awRR alarm limits
awRR alarms
CO2
B
baseline
ST map, updating
ST, updating
basic arrhythmia option
battery and display brightness
battery reports
battery status window
charge status
compartment
conditioning
conserving power
indicators
LED
malfunction indicator
malfunction symbols
monitoring time
power gauge
recharging
replacing
safety information
ii
status indicator
symbol
time to empty
time to full
battery eject symbol
battery performance optimizing
battery status indicator
beat labels arrhythmia
bed information
blood pressure. See also NBP (non-invasive) or PRESS (invasive)
Brightness SmartKey
brightness, adjusting
C
calculating cerebral perfusion
calculating temperature difference
calibrating
CO2 transducer
calibration interval, NBP
NBP
pressure
pressure transducer
capnography mainstream
Microstream
carbon dioxide, see CO2
cardiac overlay and Resp detection modes
when measuring Resp
cardiotach alarms
cautions
central recorder choosing
cerebral perfusion
chaining
change screen menu
change screen window
Changing
changing ECG lead sets
changing Resp detection mode
changing Resp wave size
changing Resp wave speed
changing screen content
channels recorder
checking battery charge
checking paced status
checklist delivery
installation
cleaning infection control
method
monitoring accessories
recommended substances
CO2 airway adapter
alarms, apnea delay
alarms, awRR
alarms, specific
awRR alarm limits
checking transducer accuracy
correction, humidity
correction, N2O
corrections
FilterLine
measuring mainstream
,
measuring microstream
method, mainstream
method, microstream
method, sidestream
microstream accessories
microstream extension
removing exhaust gases
transducer, calibrating
transducer, using
wave scale, adjusting
CO2 (mainstream).
accessories
CO2 (microstream).
accessories
conditioning batteries
configuration mode
entering
conflict label
connecting power
connecting temperature probe
connection direction symbol
connectors
ECG
temp
conventional 12-lead ECG
correcting the NBP measurement
CPAP (RESP)
cuff pressure, NBP
selection, NBP
current view
ST map
D
damage mechanical
damage claims
date, setting
,
DC power symbol
default profile
default settings
checking country-specific
defibrillation and arrhythmia monitoring
and ECG monitoring
synchronization marks
defibrillator proof symbol
defibrillator synch maintenance interval
delay time recording
demonstration mode
desat alarm, SpO2
detection modes (Resp)
diagnostic (ECG filter setting)
discharging a patient
disconnect INOPs silencing
disinfecting infection control
recommended substances
display arrhythmia
ECG
NBP
Resp
ST
display brightness
display settings
disposal gas cylinder
parts and accessories
dual Temp measurement
dyshemoglobins intravascular (SpO2)
E
early systolic blood pressure, NBP
EASI activating
ECG monitoring
lead placement
EASI ECG lead labels
ECG
accessories
alarms off (Config Mode)
changing lead sets
choosing electrode sites
conventional 12-lead
external pacing electrodes
filter settings
fusion beat pacemakers
intrinsic rhythm
modified 12-lead
New Lead Setup
pacemaker failure
rate adaptive pacemakers
unfiltered
wave size
ECG analog output
ECG cable for operating room
ECG cables, connecting
ECG connector
ECG display
ECG electrode colors
ECG electrode placement during electro-surgery
ECG gain in reports
ECG lead labels
ECG lead placement choosing EASI/Standard
ECG leads monitored
ECG report
lead layout
ECG safety information
ECG wave autosize
calibration bar
ectopic status messages (arrhythmia monitoring)
electrical output symbol
electrode placement (ECG)
conventional 12-lead
modified 12-lead
electrode placement (Resp)
with abdominal breathing
with lateral chest expansion
electro-surgery and ECG
EMC interference
Resp
EMI filter for ECG
end case discharging a patient
report, printing
end case reports setup
enhanced arrhythmia option
exclamation mark symbol
exhaust gases, removing
extension cable for SpO2
external pacing electrodes and ECG monitoring
extreme bradycardia alarm
extreme pressure alarms
extreme rate alarms
extreme tachycardia alarm
,
F
fallback (ECG)
FAST
Fourier artefact suppression technology
filter (ECG filter setting)
filter (ECG)
FilterLine
CO2, microstream accessory
flushing invasive pressure accessories
functional arterial oxygen saturation
fusion beat pacemakers and ECG monitoring
G
gas cylinder empty, disposing of
getting started
global trend time
graphic trends
graphic trends report
H
hemodynamic measurement extension
hemodynamic MMS extension
horizon trend trend time
HR = RR (Resp)
HR alarms when arrhythmia off
HR alarms off (Config Mode)
HR and pulse alarm source selection
HR from (heart rate source)
humidity correction
CO2
I
IEC ECG lead labels
IIT
IMV (Resp)
indicators battery malfunction
battery status
,
infection control cleaning
disinfecting
iii
sterilizing
Information Center central recording
transferring patients
INOPs indicators
message field
silencing
installation checklist
connectors
personnel
Instructions for Use intended audience
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry System
(IIT)
intermittent bundle branch block
intermittent mandatory ventilation
(Resp)
interruption symbol
intravascular dyshemoglobins (SpO2)
intrinsic rhythm
ISO point (ST)
J
J point (ST)
K
keyboard, on screen
keys alarms
main screen
pop-up
silence
SmartKeys
L
label conflict resolution
label conflicts,resolving
labels
changing
LAN connection
latching alarms
alarms, behavior
latching arrhythmia alarms
lateral chest expansion (neonates) monitoring Resp
lead fallback and arrhythmia relearning
lead fallback (ECG)
lead labels (ECG)
lead placement activating EASI/Standard
iv
for Resp measurement
leads monitored (ECG)
Leads Off INOP (ECG)
levels of arrhythmia analysis
M
main screen key
main setup
mains power connecting to
mainstream capnography
mainstream CO2 measuring
maintenance cables
cords
measurements, schedule
microstream CO2, calibration
schedule
visual inspection
malfunction symbols battery
manual detection mode (Resp)
and apnea alarms
manufacture date symbol
manufacturer’s information
map
ST
Mason-Likar lead system
max hold setting (CO2)
measurement adjusting a wave
preparation
setting up
wave speed, changing
measurement extension
M3012A
M3015A
M3016A
measurement label
measurement labels
changing
measurement points, ST
measurement server
ECG connector
measurement settings
measurement setup menu
measurements setting up
switching on and off
mechanical damage
menu main setup
measurement setup
messages alarm
INOP
status and prompt
methemoglobin (SpO2)
Microstream capnography
microstream CO2
accessories
maintenance, calibration
measuring
mismatch patient data, resolving
MMS extensions
modified 12-lead ECG
modifying screens
monitor inspecting before use
quick operating giude
starting monitoring
switching on
monitor (ECG filter setting)
monitor defaults
monitor revision how to find
monitor settings
changing
monitoring preparation
starting
monitoring mode
mounting power supply
mounting information
MSL cable
multi-lead ST alarming
N
N2O correction
CO2
narrow alarm limits
NBP adult cuffs
alarm source
ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992
automatic mode, enabling
calibrating
calibration interval
comfort cuff kits
comfort cuffs
cuff pressure
cuff, applying
cuff, selecting
cuff, tightness
disposable cuffs
how the measurement works
measurement correction
measurement limitations
measurement methods, auto
measurement methods, manual
measurement methods, sequence
measurement methods, stat
measurement, starting
measurement, stopping
neonatal cuffs (disposable)
numerics
oscillometric method
pediatric cuffs
preparing to measure
repeat time
repeat time for automatic
repetition time, setting
reusable cuffs
single-hose disposable cuffs
site inspection
time of last measurement
units
venous puncture
neonates
Resp electrode placement
network connection indicator
networked monitoring
non-invasive blood pressure. See NBP
non-paced patients arrhythmia monitoring
numerics explanation of NBP display
O
on-screen keyboard
operating modes
configuration
demonstration
monitoring
passcode protection
service
operating room ECG cable
orange ECG cable
organizers
Oridion Systems Ltd
oscillometric NBP measurement method
overlap in recordings
overlapping screen trends
P
pace pulse rejection (ECG) about
switching on/off
paced patients arrhythmia monitoring
repolarization tails
safety information
setting status
paced status
checking
pacemaker failure
paper size for reports
parameter scales trends
passcode protection
patient admit
category, NBP
discharge
end case
patient alarm messages
patient category field
patient demographics window
patient mismatch
patient name field
patient reports contents
patient trends viewing
paused alarms
extending time
restarting
performance specifications pressure
,
performance test
perfusion indicator
,
Philips contact information
physiological alarms
pleth alarm source
pleth wave
pleth waveform
Pop
pop-up keys
power connecting
connection
disconnecting from mains power disconnecting from
power supply
mounting
power-on LED
preparing skin for ECG
pressure alarms during zero
arterial source
calibration pressure
cerebral perfusion, calculating
performance specifications
,
wave scale
wave size
zeroing the transducer
pressure accessories
pressure artifact suppression
pressure of NBP cuff
pressure transducer calibration
zeroing
primary lead (ECG) selecting
print job suspended
printer disabling
settings
status messages
unavailable
printing
ST map reports
status log
trends reports
priority list for trends
probes disposable temperature
profiles
default profile
patient category
swapping a complete profile
swapping setting block
prompts
pulse alarms
system pulse source
pulse numerics for SpO2
PVC-related alarms
Q
QRS tone
changing volume
QRS tone pitch, SpO2
QRS volume, changing
QT alarms
QT baseline
QT measurement algorithm
QT monitoring limitations
QT/QTc monitoring
quick admit
v
R
radiated field immunity
Resp
rate adaptive pacemakers and ECG monitoring
realtime report
realtime reports content
recorder status messages
recording central
changing recording type
channels
choosing central recorder
choosing recording speed
creating templates
preventing fading ink
runtime
setting the runtime
setup menu
starting and stopping
wave overlap
recording alarms
recording delay time
recycling
rejecting pace pulses
relearning arrhythmia
reminder, alarm
replacing batteries
repolarization tails
reports alarm limits
battery reports
choosing paper size
contents
ECG
end case
patient trends
realtime report
re-routing
scheduled
setting up
ST map
stopping printouts
re-routing reports
resolution trends
resolving patient mismatch
resp accessories
Resp alarms apnea alarm delay time
Resp detection level and apnea detection
Resp detection modes
vi
and cardiac overlay
changing
Resp display
Resp monitoring and cardiac overlay
Resp safety information
Resp wave changing size
changing speed
restarting paused alarms
retrolental fibroplasia (SpO2)
reviewing alarms window
rhythm status messages (arrhythmia monitoring)
runtime setting recording runtime
S
safety maintenance interval
monitor
safety information batteries
ECG
Resp
safety test
safety tests performance tests
power on test
system
visual inspection
scale
ECG wave
Resp wave
scales for trends waveforms
scheduled reports
screen adjusting brightness
screen trend trend time
screen trends
screens changing content
switching
understanding
visitor screen
secondary lead (ECG) selecting
selecting the primary lead (ECG)
selecting the secondary lead (ECG)
selftest alarms
sensor disposable SpO2
sequence mode
service mode
set combiners
setting up trends
setting up reports
setting up the sepuence
settings
about
default
measurement settings
monitor settings
screen settings
settings blocks
Setup Recording menu
short yellow alarms on/off
signal quality of SpO2
silence key
sinus and SV rhythm ranges
skin preparation
ECG
SmartKeys
key
SmartKeys key
SmartKeys symbol
specifications
arrhythmia
speed recording
wave speed, changing
SpO2 accessories
active alarm source
alarms specific to
arterial pulsation
assessing suspicious reading
connecting the cables
disposable sensors
extension cable
FAST technology
Nellcor adhesive sensors
(disposable)
perfusion indicator
,
Philips sensors (disposable)
Philips sensors (reusable)
pleth as alarm source
pleth wave
pleth waveform
pulse numerics
QRS tone
signal quality
site inspection
site selection
tone modulation
SpO2 desat alarm
SpO2 limit alarms
ST adjusting alarm limits
alarms
baseline, updating
ensuring diagnostic quality
filtering
measurement points, adjusting adjusting
multi-lead alarms
numerics in ECG wave
snippets
ST display
ST map baseline, updating
current view
report, printing printing
ST map report
scale, changing scale
ST map
task window
trend view
trending interval, changing
trending priority
ST maps
ST point
standard 10-lead placement
standard 3-lead placement
standard 5-lead placement (ECG)
standby mode
Standby screen
standby symbol
starting monitoring
status line
status log printing
status messages printer
recorder
status messages (arrhythmia)
ectopic
rhythm
sterilizing infection control
stopping reports printouts
surgical ECG cable
suspended alarm
suspicious SpO2 reading
switching on monitor
switching screens
symbols
battery
synchronization marks (defibrillator)
system pulse
systolic blood pressure, NBP, early
T
tabular trends
Tamb
task window for ST map
Tcereb
temperature
accessories
alarm settings
connecting probe to monitor
difference, calculating
dual Temp measurement
extended label set
first
label
making a measurement
probe, disposable
probe, selecting
second
temperature probe connecting
templates creating for recordings
test blocks, how to perform
testing alarms
time, setting
tone configuration, alarm
tone mod (SpO2)
tone modulation
touch tone volume
touchscreen disable/re-enable
using
transducer
CO2, accuracy
CO2, calibrating
pressure, zeroing
transferring centrally-monitored patients
transport brightness setting
trend time
global
trend view
ST map
trending interval
ST map
trends resolution
screen trends
setting parameter scales
setup
viewing
trends pop-up keys
trends priority list
ST map
trunk cables accessories
Ttymp
Tvesic
U
Understanding
unfiltered ECG signal
unpacking
user interface settings changing
V
V electrode placement (ECG)
venous puncture
viewing arrhythmia waves
viewing trends
visible waves report
visitor screen
vislatching (arrhythmia alarms)
vital signs report
voltage setting
volume alarm
touch tone volume
W
warnings
wave adjusting
changing speed
scale (CO2)
scale (pressure)
size (CO2)
size (pressure)
wave channel speed
wave group speed
wave size
Resp
wave size (ECG) changing
wave speed eeg speed wave speed global speed
respiratory speed
wave speed (Resp)
vii
wide alarms limits
wired network connection symbol
Z
zero effect on pressure alarms
zeroing pressure transducer
viii
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project